Ernest P. Moyer: Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter
One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight Nine Ten Eleven Twelve Thirteen Fourteen
Title
Page
1 15 22 35 50 55 60 70 79 93 1 02 1 09 1 21 139 1 50 1 62 172 180 1 93
A Warning From Jesus About the End of the Age The Bitter Harvest of Godlessness The Prince of this World The Release The Wrath of the Prince The Judy Tuttle Message Demons Spirit Entry Sordid Spiritualism Devil Possession Jane Roberts and Seth An Angel of Light John Ballou Newbrough and Oahspe The Devil's Bible -- A Course In Miracles A Course In Miracles An Examination Fifteen Jesus Names in A Course In Miracles (ACIM) Sixteen Klimo On Channeling Seventeen The Storm Clouds Gather Eighteen The Cosmic Reserve Corps Appendix
1- A Warning From Jesus
~1~
CHAPTER ONE A Warning From Jesus About The End of the Age
All this I have told you so that you will not go astray. They will put you out of the synagogues. Indeed, a time is coming when everyone who kills you will think he is offering service to God. They will do such things because they have not known the Father or me. I have told you these things so that when their hour comes you will remember that I warned you. John 16:1-4 This warning is contained within the Last Discourse Jesus gave his apostles. According to Johns account, it occurs at the end of the Last Supper before he offered his final prayer, and before the group departed for the Garden of Gethsemane. Much debate centers around this text. Did Jesus address these remarks to his personal apostles, a warning of the suffering they would endure at the hands of fellow Jews? The statement that his followers would be thrown out of the synagogues certainly suggests so. Or did the time refer to Roman persecutions; did he speak to generations beyond his apostles? Perhaps his remarks were intended to warn about both possibilities. Or did he speak to the far future, knowing in his divine mind that John would make such a record? The remark shows religious persecution, not secular oppression. The source of the persecution comes from those who believe they are doing a service for God, not service to political, social, or ideological programs. More importantly, the supposed service is to God, and not to pagan gods, nor to human representatives of those pagan gods. Many persons believe that the warning pertained to the days of the apostles. But we must be careful. We may encounter logical difficulties if we accept the traditional date for the creation of Johns text late in the first century. According to early church historians, Irenaeus and Eusebius, John lived into the reign of Trajan, 98-117 AD. The initial Jewish persecutions were past. The Jews were then a scattered people, without a home land, and without the presence, authority, or power of the Sanhedrin. Subsequent Jewish persecutions indeed continued, but they were sporadic and isolated, by local groups in Greek and Roman communities. If John wrote late in the first century he would have had no need to record remarks by Jesus which he knew pertained to those years gone by. In fact, warnings about the end of the age in the synoptic gospels, Matt 24, Mark 13, and Luke 21, are not found as such in Johns record.
~2~
Spirit Entry Into Human Mind
Jewish Persecutions
I searched the religious persecutions which are described in the New Testament. They do not fit the tone or evident intent of Jesus warning. Acts 4:3f C Annas and Caiaphas arrested Peter and John because of the healing of a cripple but released them. Acts 5:18f C They were arrested again for persisting in their teaching. Gamaliel interceded. The high priest had them beaten and let them go. Acts 6 C Believers greatly multiplied. Acts 6-7 C Stephen was accused. He was condemned through false witness. He was stoned to death. Saul was consenting, 7:58, 8:1, 22:20. Acts 8:1 C On that day a great persecution arose against the church, with scattering into the countryside of Judea and Samaria, but the apostles were unmolested. Acts 8:3 C Saul ravaged the church, entering house after house, dragging off men and women and committing them to prison. Acts 9:1 C He sought letters to the synagogues of Damascus to bring them bound to Jerusalem. Acts 12 C Herod laid violent hands on some who belonged to the church. He killed James Zebedee. He arrested Peter during Passover, but Peter escaped through miraculous help. Acts 26:10 C Saul shut many up in prison, and cast his vote for their death. Acts 26:11 C Paul states that he was in raging fury against them; he persecuted them even to foreign cities. Gal 1:13 C Paul persecuted the church violently and tried to destroy it. After his conversion experience he did not go to Jerusalem seeking the approval of the apostles, but rather into the desert of Arabia. He returned to Damascus and then, after three years, he went up to Jerusalem where he visited with Peter and James. He stayed for fifteen days. Although Paul says that he persecuted them even to foreign cities this statement may have been one of intent, not actual fulfillment. His desire was cut short by his conversion. The New Testament record does not support the assertions he makes in Acts 26:11. The time of Pauls conversion can be determined from Galatians 1:15-18, 2 Cor. 11:31, and Josephus Archeol. 18:5:1:3. When Paul left Damascus to return to Jerusalem the city was in the possession of the Arabian king, Aretas. According to Josephus a war between Aretas and the Romans began in the year Tiberius died, 37 AD. According to Dio Cassius 59:9,12, the difficulties with Aretas were settled in 38. This would place Pauls conversion in the year 35 or 36, certainly only a few short years after Jesus death and resurrection. Since the city of Damascus was no longer under siege, three years later he departs and visits Jerusalem, about 38 or 39 AD.
~3~
Note that in spite of the vigorous efforts of Paul, and with the enmity of the Jewish leaders, the apostles continued to live in Jerusalem. If he were reaching into private homes to fetch members of the new sect into prison, why did he leave the leaders unmolested? The statements of both Acts 8:3, and 26:10-11 seem exaggerated. Even more, the statement in Acts 8:1 seems self-contradictory. Why would Jewish authorities scatter abroad the followers of the new sect but permit the leaders to remain unmolested in Jerusalem? After 14 years, in 52 or 53 AD, Paul again goes up to Jerusalem, Gal 2:1, where he visited with Peter, James and John. Again, the apostles are living unmolested under the very eye of the Sanhedrin and the high priests. Other evidence attests to the fact that Jewish persecutions were not severe, or even intermittent. Acts 9:31 C After Pauls conversion the church had great peace. Acts 21:8 C Philip, one of seven elected as first leaders of the church, Acts 6:5, evangelized from Caesarea, within the territory of Herod, and had a group of disciples 21:16. While the city may have been under Roman control Jewish authorities certainly could reach individuals there. Acts 21:10 C Agabus, a Christian prophet, presumably lived and taught unmolested in Judea. We do not know how much Pauls conversion may have served to dampen the purpose of Jewish authorities. He was their fair-haired boy. He had letters of commission directly from the Sanhedrin. He was well educated and articulate. He had demonstrated great enthusiasm. He was on fire to eliminate the new sect. Suddenly he turns about. For all the fervor he displayed to suppress the new sect, that much he now turns to support it. Jewish leaders certainly were dumbfounded, with plenty of debate and speculation. Perhaps they feared committing other resources. Pauls conversion, coupled with other miraculous events, Acts 5:18f, Acts 12:4f, Acts 16:23f, probably created great confusion and irresolution among them. As I listed above, several episodes in Acts have been used to illustrate persecution. But consider circumstances. Zealots and other rebel factions may have had much to do with the fear of the Jewish leaders. Unless they minded their relationship with Roman authorities they were in danger of losing their civil autonomy. Concern by Jewish leaders centered on civil threats, not on religious contests. John 18:14 C Jesus was executed for political expediency. The Romans did not want to become involved in internal religious disputes. Witness Pilates hesitation. Acts 23:29 C The Roman Tribune did not recognize serious charges against Paul except for concerns of civil disobedience. Acts 24:1-9 C Ananias and Tertullus framed their charges against Paul before Felix, the governor, in civil terms, not religious defiance.
~4~
In his defense Paul clearly emphasized the obedience of the new sect to civil authority. Refer also to the legal hearings before Festus and Agrippa, Acts 25 and 26. This conduct on the part of Jewish authorities shows their struggle to maintain themselves against the new religious sect. They did not act as a people who were in sure command. Under examination the supposed Jewish religious persecutions appear as not much more than social repression. Some commentators have suggested that persecution under service to God might include those after the first century. Eusebius and other early Christian historians record individuals who suffered martyr deaths at the hands of Jews and Romans. These include Ignatius, bishop of Antioch, c110-c118AD, Polycarp of Smyrna, c155AD, Justin, c155AD, and so on. Others have suggested that Jewish persecutions during the Barhochba uprising, 132 to 135AD, might explain the remark by Jesus. But these suggestions are long past apostolic efforts; they are used to justify a statement which has puzzled the generations.
Roman Persecutions
While it is true that Pauls work in Ephesus provoked a riot, this episode was instigated by commercial traders over their concern for contributions to the goddess Artemis, Acts 19. The account is not a good illustration of persecution under service to God. In fact, none of the Roman persecutions were done under service to God. They were done to preserve the status and authority of the pagan Emperor gods. Ancient religions derived from a particular people and state, just as the Jewish religion was unique to the people of Israel. Among the Romans the laws of the Twelve Tables required that any religious worship not publicly sanctioned was penally forbidden, religio illicita. While the religion of Rome was the only official religion she could not hold control over her vast domains without sanctioning the religions of all conquered nations. Thus Roman law was less than absolute. Acceptance of many different pagan religions nurtured a highly tolerant environment. Roman pagan religious observances throughout the year demanded that everyone give obeisance to the gods. Citizens of other pagan countries did not object; they merely translated their gods and goddesses to the equivalents in Rome. But this Jews and Christians refused to do. Still, the Romans permitted Jewish religious observances. Christian religion was uniquely different. Contrary to Jewish faith it did not have a national allegiance; it had no temple, altar, or sacrifice in Jerusalem or other holy city. It excluded all other religions. And it had an invincible belief that there was only one God, in heaven, and that no human being could represent that God, or become the object of worship. Thus Christian belief and practices aroused deep suspicion among the emperors, who were considered as gods, and among the general populace.
~5~
As evidence of the uncertainty with which Roman emperors greeted the new religion, consider the following examples. Tertullian (Apologeticus 5:21) relates that Tiberius, upon receiving a report from Pilate about the resurrection of Jesus, proposed to the Roman Senate that Jesus should be enrolled among the deos Romanus, but the Senate refused. According to Suetonius (Claudius 25), and Acts 18:2, Claudius commanded that all Jews leave Rome. Many of the early Roman Christians were Jews; thus they were subject to that edict. The first severe Christian persecution took place under Nero (54-68). When Rome burned he accused the Christians of starting the conflagration. By this time the general populace, deeply suspicious, readily believed the worst. Ancient inscriptions suggest that the persecutions spread into the provinces. It was during this period that Paul and Peter suffered their martyrdom, and may have been the period of Johns exile to Patmos. According to Tertullian and Hegesippus, Domitian planned a persecution against Christians but did not execute it. Upon hearing the phrase kingdom of Christ he summoned two of the relatives of Jesus to Rome for examination but soon released them upon finding that they were not suspicious persons. The good emperor Nerva (96-98) recalled those who had been exiled for religious purposes, allowed none of his subjects to bring accusations against another, and especially forbade the reception of charges brought by slaves against their masters. Later persecutions by the emperors were sporadic, many halfhearted. They were not done as a service to God; they were done to uphold respect for the pagan gods who came under increasing pressure. Scattered between those emperors who actively pursued Christian persecution were others who ignored the new religion, or even welcomed it. Even if the Romans killed many thousands of Jews as part of the troubles around 70 AD, or even thousands of Christians, we cannot legitimately regard Roman persecutions as fulfilling this prediction by Jesus. If we look for religious persecutions later in history to fulfill this forecast can we say that the Protestant Reformation defines that period? Were Joan of Arc, who appeared as a divine prophetess to the French but as a sorceress to English soldiers, or William Tyndale, who gave us the first English translation of the Bible, both of whom were burned at the stake, persecuted under service to God? Is that what Jesus meant? Are we to say that all religious persecutions took place in the past, and that such warnings could not possibly refer to us? The twentieth century has seen the most horrendous persecutions of all time. Hitler systematically killed millions of Jews to solve the Jewish problem. Stalin killed millions of his fellow countrymen in order to stifle voices against his authoritarian rule. The forces of evil today are far stronger than any time in the past, forces many of us have been unwilling to admit.
~6~
When Their Hour Comes

An essential feature of the forecast is the manner in which Jesus framed his remarks. He said a time is coming, that it would take place at a certain hour. Indeed, his phrasing emphasized the difference between expulsion from the synagogues and other persecution. By stating that a time is coming@ he sharpened his remarks in order that we all pay attention. His statement was designed to distinguish between persecutions upon his apostles by Jewish authorities and later persecutions. Unfortunately, the nature of the remarks created such puzzlement for the generations this separation of thought has effectively smothered our understanding. The translators linked the thoughts together by joining them into one sentence. Commentators and interpreters have universally lumped the remarks into one historic view. Consider how the word hour is used in the New Testament, and especially by John. Matt 24:36 But of that day and hour no one knows . . . Matt 24:44 Therefore, you must also be ready; the Son of Man is coming at an hour you do not expect. Luke 12:46 . . . the master of that servant will come on a day when he does not expect him and at an hour he does not know . . . John 2:4 Oh, woman, what have you to do with me? My hour has not yet come. John 4:21 Woman, believe me, the hour is coming when neither on this mountain nor in Jerusalem will you worship the Father. John 7:30 . . . but no one laid hands on him, because his hour had not yet come. John 16:1 . . . the hour is coming when whoever kills you . . . I have listed these phrases to show the dramatic context of the word hour. The word had a meaning which is not lost on modern generations, except to erudite scholars who are annoyed at the significance of the term. They struggle over modifying words, or Greek phraseology, in attempt to deny its crisis portent. Whether we would translate Greek ora as hour or time, the implication is not lost. The use of hour as a predictive term is not some loose or hazy classification but an indicator of specific time. It is often associated through the phrase of that day and hour, certainly denoting a high degree of locality in time. It offers a method for indicating that an event, a condition, an expectation, or a moment of fulfillment will come according to the unfolding of destiny, according to the schedules of God. Their hour is not a designation for feeble attempts by Jews over several generations to eliminate an upstart Christian sect. Nor is it a description of three hundred years of Roman persecutions upon the rising tide of Christianity. Nor is it
~7~
a means to characterize centuries of religious harassment by the Roman Catholic church. It is a precise description for a world moment of religious truth. And that recognition of truth will come when all of us become the target of death, a death wrought by those who believe they are serving God, but truly are not. Their hour will belong to them, all those who are called to an extremity of human sacrifice, a program to eliminate Gods people from the face of the earth. The world has never witnessed that which is about to come down upon all of us.
Possible Confusion in the Gospel Record

In our attempt to understand the context of Jesus remarks we must distinguish between those statements which pertain a) to the rigors of new religious belief and the consequent persecution individuals might experience while living in an inimical but organized world, the traditional historic context, and b) to that suffering which Jesus expected to occur at a great world extremity, when law and order would break down, and when social consensus of proper human behavior would become chaotic. Historically, Jews, Romans and Catholics all respected social norms; the world has now lost its foundation in social standards. Most anything goes that falls within the bounds of modern secular law. Jesus spoke of such a time. He reserved remarks on such matters to the end of his earthly life because, as he said, I was with you. Now he was leaving and he wanted to provide warnings to those who would live in such world extremity. What was the context of those remarks? Can we determine from comparison among the four gospels more exactly what Jesus meant, and a time of fulfillment? Two separate discourses may have become confused in our records. The first contained remarks he made to the assembled group Tuesday evening on the Mount of Olives; the second contained those remarks he made Thursday evening at the Last Supper. The first discourse was provoked by somber events Tuesday in Jerusalem when Jesus severely rebuked the scribes and Pharisees, Matt 21-23. To cheer themselves, and to recover some hope that Jesus might now proceed to take up the throne of Israel, the apostles pointed out the glory of the temple as they departed from Jerusalem, Matt 24:1, Mark 13:1, Luke 21:5. Jesus quickly dashed their hopes to the ground. Not one stone would be left standing upon another. They were a downcast lot as they returned to the Mount of Olives. Later that evening they asked him what he meant. We should note that the apostles provoked the inquiry about the end of the age, Jesus did not. They could conceive of the complete destruction of the temple only under a great planetary event. They understood that there must be, by Gods necessity, an end to the planetary age. At that time God would sum up the age, would assess its accomplishments, would examine it against his goals, and would
~8~
decree those actions necessary to retrieve his world. There would be a divine judgment. Many ancient people understood such matters; most modern minds do not. My Oxford edition of RSV has a footnote about Matt 24:1-4: These verses, together with the discourse that follows, seem to merge teachings about an immediate destruction of Jerusalem with details associated in Scripture with the end of human history. These teachings were set down by the Evangelist in the light of events between AD 30 and 70. It is difficult to be certain what the original form of Jesus word was. This footnote is well stated, except the idea that human history will come to an end is a distortion of biblical teaching. Isaiah 45:18 is explicit: For thus says the LORD, who created the heavens (he is God) who formed the earth and made it (he established it) he did not create it a chaos; he formed it to be inhabited. Again, in Psalm 72 we see that an idea of a world end is an error. A royal son will reign upon the earth for untold ages of time. May he live while the sun endures, and as long as the moon, throughout all generations! May he be like rain that falls on the mown grass, like showers that water the earth! In his days may righteousness flourish, and peace abound, till the moon is no more. May he have dominion from sea to sea, and from the River to the ends of the earth. The Greek word for age used in the New Testament is aion, and its adjective form, aionos. It is the source of our English word aeon. In Vines Expository Dictionary aion signifies a period of indefinite duration, or time viewed in relation to what takes place in the period. The dictionary then goes on to say that aionos denotes that which is eternal in contrast to proskairos, that which is temporal. However, this remark carries the meaning of the term aionos too far. A more correct understanding would be in the concept of dispensations, time structured according to goals of divine administration, a purpose according to God in relation to what takes place during that specific, even if long, period. How truly unfortunate that KJV translated the phrase as end of the world. This depended on the understanding of the King James translators at the beginning of the seventeenth century, but conditioned many following generations to the idea that the world would end. The ancients did not view time as coming to an end. Even in 2 Peter 3 the idea of the heavens being on fire, and the elements melting away with fervent heat led to renewal. New heavens and a new earth were expected wherein would dwell righteousness. We take these spectacular descrip-
~9~
tions of nuclear abominations raining fire from the sky, literally melting the elements of the earth under their scorching heat, and transpose them into an idea that Peter believed one grand conflagration would end all creation. Without question, Jesus warned his followers about the coming destruction of Jerusalem. He did not want his fledgling flock to be destroyed in the political turmoil of the near future. Neither did he want them to be ignorant of events of the far future. His immediate apostles and disciples needed warning; his people of the far future needed warning also. These two crisis periods may, indeed, have become confused in the Synoptic gospels. But John was not thus confused. In his gospel he did not provide an account of Jesus remarks about the destruction of Jerusalem. He had no need to do so. First, when he wrote at the end of the first century the destruction of Jerusalem in 70 AD was long past; his audience had no need for such warning. Second, events of the far future were described in his Apocalypse. Further commentary in his gospel was unnecessary. Therefore, he did not refer to the end of the age as such. He merely gave an account of Jesus remarks and concentrated on those subjects which could be instructive to the future. The fact that he did not report on the Tuesday evening discourse shows that he felt it unnecessary; he placed the end-of-the-age warning into the discourse at the Last Supper. We must examine Johns record in the context of possible confusion among the discourses of Jesus, the limitations John imposed upon himself in the formulation of his remarks, the dramatic nature of the statements by Jesus, and the recognition by John that he was leaving important information to the future. We must especially remember that his later work was conditioned by his vivid experience on the island of Patmos
Gospel Parallels
I shall now proceed to gospel parallels. I shall demonstrate that the remarks by Jesus which John places at the Last Supper were actually part of the discourse about the end of the age on Tuesday evening. Indeed, Mark and Luke make these part of the Tuesday evening discourse, Mark 13:9-13, and Luke 21:12-17. Unfortunately, the Gospel of Matthew introduces even more difficulty in that it divides these warnings into two different sections, part of the Tuesday evening discourse as with Mark and Luke, Matt 24:9-14, and part of an earlier exhortation to the twelve apostles to teach among the Jewish people, Matt 10:18-24 . For purposes of discussion here I use the passages from John 15:18-27 and 16:1-4. I restrict reference to other parts of the respective passages to limit this immediate discussion. I also relocate individual phrases to draw out the parallels.
~10~

John 15:18 If the world hates you, know that it has hated me before it hated you. John 15:21 But all these things they will do unto you because of my name, because they do not know him who sent me. Matt 10:22 . . . you will be hated by all because of my name. Mark 11:13 . . . you will be hated by all because of my name. Luke 21:17 . . . you will be hated by all because of my name.
Part of my purpose in these discussions is to demonstrate the textual difficulties we encounter in a serious attempt to understand messages from the Bible. The placement by John of details into the Last Discourse, while Mark and Luke place them on the Mount of Olives Tuesday evening, and fragmenting of the same remarks by Matthew into two different scenes, clearly show human interpretation which affects our traditional text. Different writers had different motives with obvious difference in understanding of Jesus purpose. Such human factors modify how we understand. John expands upon the thoughts. While the synoptic gospels state simply that we will be hated because of Jesus name, John felt impelled to elaborate. He casts the remarks into a personal light, centered on Jesus, and repeatedly introduces the Father as an important part of the message. We can easily conclude that he was concerned that the heart of Jesus message not be lost in the information. That heart was Jesus love for us, and how he had given of himself because of his love. When our trials come we should remember that he loves us. Johns technique shows that he had the synoptic texts with him, and referred to them, as he composed his document. He was dissatisfied with their simplicity and lack of understanding. He not only does away with the Tuesday evening discourse; he reframes. In spite of this, we do not lose the essential message. Jesus people should not expect open arms from the world; the world would hate them, not because they represented darkness and evil, but because they represented light and truth. The world does not want to know truth. In the versions the phrase is translated as for my names sake. What does that mean? Literally, in Greek, it is on account of the name of me, or, in modern English, because of my name. It seems ridiculous that translators would carry such antique expressions into a modern world where they do so much to confuse. Jesus was warning that anyone who would identify with his name would suffer persecution. They would die if they expressed loyalty to him. In a world which was so familiar to us for its great freedoms, untold numbers of people hate the name of Jesus. Modern minds do not want to recognize or express spiritual loyalties. They are not responsible to anyone. They demand religious freedom. But these warnings were far more than the religious suppression of the centuries. These warnings were for the acute and horrible persecutions now about to come down upon us.
~11~
John 15:20a Remember the word that I said to you, À servant is not greater than his master. Matt 10:24 A disciple is not above his teacher, nor a servant above his master . . . John 15:20b If they persecuted me, they will persecute you . . . Matt 10:23 When they persecute you in one town, flee to the next . . . Luke 21:12 But before all this they will lay their hands on you and persecute you . . . Jesus was warning those who would take up his service now, at the end of the age. They should expect to be treated as he was. The price of service to God was persecution. The meaning of the Greek word is to put to flight or to pursue. It suggests an extreme social action; the persecuted are not allowed to perform their service with freedom. The meaning is much more than neighbors spurning one another because they attend different churches. These individuals are subject to active pursuit and apprehension. Furthermore, if Jesus suffered pursuit, his followers should expect to suffer pursuit. If he was killed in service to his Father, his servants should expect to be killed in service to him. Many Jews and Christians today believe they suffer persecution. And indeed, Jews suffered severe persecution in this century in various countries. But we cannot consider that the vast body of Christians throughout the world have suffered persecution within recent centuries. Certainly not after large segments of western civilization became liberated from the Roman Catholic church, and religious freedoms infiltrated western culture. Migrations from Europe to the New World to escape religious persecutions brought an end to that era. The so-called western countries are now socially Christian; their governments and social norms derive from Christian principles and standards. They have great religious tolerance. Christianity today composes the body of modern western culture, from the spectrum of liturgical and mainline conservative churches to fundamentalist groups. Those Christian groups and individuals who cling to and espouse the current civil order cannot claim persecution in recent centuries. They are the accepted social norm. Nor would they be the ones to bring persecution in the sense indicated by Jesus. The modern Christian world is highly tolerant; it would not institute persecutions for mere religious differences. Therefore, if we are to understand this passage we must look for activity which falls outside accepted social Christian norms. If the followers of Jesus, certainly not modern Jews, are to be persecuted at the end of the age the persecution cannot come as part of todays accepted social regime. It cannot be ordinary Christian, of any class. Many fundamentalist Christian groups, in order to salvage this prediction by Jesus, then conceive a social order which comes under the direct supervision of the Devil. They believe this is the origin of the so-called new world order or one world government, brought about by individuals in powerful economic or civil positions conspiring to obtain world control. Their concept is one of political persecution by malicious satanic governments. In order to shape this idea to the
~12~
biblical predictions they conceive that this malicious world rule will demand obeisance to satanic personalities who take power. If they are Gods people they will refuse such obeisance; hence the persecution will be upon them. Because of their confusion in understanding their framework is awry. They have not arrived at the possibility that these persecutions arise outside the scope of civil regimes, beyond the context of social norms. Something totally unexpected is about to occur, but no one, from the most liberal social scholar to the most adamant fundamentalist group, has been able to penetrate this forecast by Jesus, or to perceive or predict that which is about to unfold. John 15:27 And you also are witnesses, because you have been with me from the beginning. Matthew 10:18 And you will be dragged before governors and kings for my sake, to bear testimony before them and the nations. Mark 13:9 But take heed to yourselves; for they will deliver you up to councils; and you will be beaten in synagogues; and you will stand before governors and kings for my sake, to bear testimony before them. Luke 21:12 . . . delivering you up to the synagogues and prisons, and you will be brought before kings and governors because of my name. We must keep in mind the circumstances which conditioned Jesus remarks. If he were to speak of future Christian gentile groups, and they were not pagan, he could not use the word temple. That would denote pagan religious worship. He did not have the word church; he had only the word synagogue. This use has forced biblical students, scholars, and theologians to believe that Jesus spoke of Jewish persecutions upon the new religion. This lack of perception has thrown them back into early apostolic days for their time reference. As a consequence, great confusion has arisen out of these forecasts, a confusion which left an indelible imprint upon all Christian understanding. If Jesus were placing his forecasts into the end of the age the word synagogue must mean church. Persecution by Jews is not realistic in this modern era. These witnesses may be brought up to synagogues for their testimony, but they will be brought up even more to witness in Christian churches. The scope of this activity is indicated further by the witnesses being brought up before governors and kings and councils. They are not brought up to those civil authorities because they are under criminal indictment; they are brought up because they are witnessing to a phenomenon which those governors and kings do not understand. Something so dramatic is taking place it does not fit ordinary human understanding. Then the beating in synagogues = churches arises because of the extreme disturbance Christians (and Jews) feel about this testimony. This view should be an indicator to those who seek recourse in conspiracy theories. A world government, under the direct supervision of the Devil, or any of its divisions, would not be soliciting testimony from Gods people, nor would they be tolerant of such testimony if it were offered voluntarily.
~13~
With comparison against the synoptic gospels Johns statements now take on a different complexion. The comments by Jesus about witnessing appear to be directed exclusively to his personal apostles, because they have been with him from the beginning. Regardless how we may look at this, we should note that our record displays a confusion in accounts, and that Johns composition does not necessarily reflect Jesus actual discourse. Rather, it seems to reflect the fact that Jesus made such remarks, that John was dissatisfied with the synoptic record, and that he redrafted to suit another purpose. The many parallels are much too powerful a testimony to the fact that Jesus made such remarks. We are left with the important question why the synoptic record would apply these remarks to the end of the age, while John would place them in apostolic days. The strength of the parallels suggest that he adapted. This is further attested by other parallels. John 15:26 But when the Counselor comes, whom I shall send to you from the Father, even the Spirit of Truth, who proceeds from the Father, he will bear witness to me. Matt 10:19-20 For when they deliver you up, do not be anxious how you are to speak or what you are to say; for what you are to say will be given to you in that hour; for it is not you who speak, but the Spirit of your Father speaking through you. Mark 13:11 And when they bring you to trial and deliver you up, do not be anxious beforehand what you are to say; but say whatever is given you in that hour, for it is not you who speak, but the Holy Spirit. Luke 21:13-15 This will be a time for you to bear testimony. Settle it therefore in your minds, not to meditate beforehand how to answer; for I will give you a mouth and wisdom, which none of your adversaries will be able to withstand or contradict. Here is the crux of the revelation. The circumstance is one for which no preparation can be made. These are not theological dissertations, and they are not sermons from a pulpit. Witnessing will be in secular as well as religious environments, spontaneous from the heart, as given by Gods Holy Spirit, and the Spirit of Truth. Matthew and Mark offer confirmation of that hour. The revelation does not speak of two thousand years of Christian struggle, nor of complacent social religion. The passages show a time of extreme world condition, to appear at a brief moment of world destiny. Again we see how John differs from the synoptics. He uses a unique term, the paraclitos. In Greek this means an advisor or counselor. It does not mean one who comforts. This is a spirit helper who comes directly from the Father to teach us in that hour of need. The word pneuma=spirit used in the synoptics does not capture the true intent of Jesus remark. John attempted to set the record straight. Gods people will see special help, more than the mere spirit of God.
~14~
Now we can come to a far greater insight into the extreme circumstances of the warnings. John 16:2 They will put you out of the synagogues. Indeed, the hour is coming when whoever kills you will think he is offering service to God. Matt 10:21 Brother will deliver brother to death, and the father his child, and children will rise against parents and put them to death. Matt 24:9 Then they will deliver you to tribulation, and put you to death; and you will be hated by all nations because of my name. Mark 13:12 And brother will deliver brother to death, and the father his child, and children will rise against parents and put them to death. Luke 21:16 You will be betrayed by parents and brothers and relatives and friends, and some of you they will put to death. In Matthew and Mark the translators used the phrase and have them put to death. This reflects the notion that delivery will be to civil authorities; relatives and friends will bring charges against them in criminal courts. Again we have one of those unfortunate cases of translation conditioned by the notions of the translators. The translators altered the tense of the Greek verbs. The phrase in Greek is certain: and put them to death. The hand of death will be directly by relatives and friends, not by government agencies. The phrase You will be delivered up given in some translations, rather than You will be betrayed, again falsely suggests the same concept of delivery to civil authorities, not delivery up to death. The difficulty which faced the translators was this persecution unto death by relatives and friends. Where in history did such action take place? We might cite numerous historic episodes where relatives and friends brought accusations against those who believed in Jesus, but always those accusations were through civil channels. Suggestion of such historic context is another attempt to understand a forecast which has puzzled the generations. This persecution at the end of the age will come directly from the hand of those whom we know and love. Brother will kill brother; son and daughter will kill mother and father; friend will kill friend.
2 - The Bitter Harvest of Godlessness
~15~
CHAPTER TWO The Bitter Harvest of Godlessness

We have been unwilling to accept that we bring our own judgments. We do not hold ourselves accountable for our own actions. If the fate of the world is judgment by religious persecution then we acted to bring that persecution. We permitted a social environment in which the Devil could work. God will now determine who are his true people. He will separate the wheat from the chaff. He is using the Devil to do it. This modern godless generation detests previous generations who were so intolerant. They perceive strict moral and religious standards as Victorian and anachronistic. They take the weaknesses of those generations as justification for condemnation, not recognizing that moral and religious structure was the glue which kept civilization together, in spite of imperfections. Earlier generations focused on God; that focus gave life direction. They had purpose, they had worth, and they had hope. Whether they were elite noblemen or peasant workers they lived daily with concentration toward that ultimate goal. When we threw God away we lost focus; we lost direction; we lost worth; we lost hope. We then degenerated into mere fleshly and material gratifications. The modern generation seeks freedom. Freedom means tolerance. Most anything goes; there are no strict standards of conduct. Social behavior is now conditioned by liberal consensus, not by rigorous principles. But many people still have a desire for God. They really and truly would like to bring a transformation. Unfortunately, when they were disconnected from the old forms they sought new forms. This is a new age. The old ages and the old fashions have passed away. The human race is now liberated from the old nonsense. This is Devil time. He introduces into the world a renunciation of those principles which provide wholesome integrity of society. His purpose is to create an environment in which he can carry on free intercourse with men. He nurtures the spiritual milieu of freedom and liberty. This provides social conditions which permit him to gain entry into human mind. By creating a new age environment, with its great tolerance of any spiritual exploration, human dabbling in communication with the Spirits is no longer under social restraint. It no longer carries the strong social stigma which attached in prior ages. Many more human beings begin to see a new spiritual age. They can now commune directly with the spirit realms. They can receive messages from above. They can be taught the most devious and insidious concepts of human purpose. And they can have their minds conditioned to Devil=s work. Such is the framework for the coming spiritual judgment of mankind. We wanted new spiritual freedoms; we shall reap the rewards of spiritual apostasy.
~16~
If we had remained righteous, if we had held true to God, and to a firm will of his purpose, we would not have opened ourselves to the Devil. But when we liberated ourselves we set up conditions for our own judgment. As God provided the resources for material power, and the coming physical judgment, so he provided the resources for spiritual power, and the coming spiritual judgment. Our former Prince remained on this planet at the mercy of God; he will now execute his malicious schemes simply because we did not remain true to God. He will bring the judgment; we permitted him to do so. Matt 13:24-43 Another parable he put before them, saying, The kingdom of heaven may be compared to a man who sowed good seed in his field; but while men were sleeping, his enemy came and sowed weeds among the wheat, and went away. So when the plants came up and bore grain, then the weeds appeared also. And the servants of the householder came and said to him, `Sir, did you not sow good seed in your field? How then has it weeds? He said to them, Àn enemy has done this. The servants said to him, `Then do you want us to go and gather them? But he said, `No, lest in gathering the weeds you root up the wheat along with them. Let both grow together until the harvest; and at harvest time I will tell the reapers, Gather the weeds first and bind them in bundles to be burned, but gather the wheat into my barn. . . . Then he left the crowds and went into the house. And his disciples came to him, saying, Explain to us the parable of the weeds of the field. He answered, He who sows the good seed is the Son of man; the field is the world, and the good seed means the sons of the kingdom; the weeds are the sons of the evil one, and the enemy who sowed them is the devil; the harvest is the close of the age, and the reapers are angels. Just as the weeds are gathered and burned with fire, so will it be at the close of the age. The Son of man will send his angels, and they will gather out of his kingdom all causes of sin and all evildoers, and throw them into the furnace of fire; there men will weep and gnash their teeth. Then the righteous will shine like the sun in the kingdom of their Father. He who has ears, let him hear. We should not jump to the conclusion that, somehow, if we believe in God, we shall escape tribulation. No personal view could be more deceptive. Matt 24:30-31 and parallels show clearly that the sign of the Son of Man in the heavens, and the appearance of his angels, will be after the Great Tribulation. All mankind upon this planet must suffer these woes. There is no human being living today who is worthy of rescue from the judgments now about to come down upon us. Revelation 7:9f is also clear. The great multitude standing before the throne of God were those who came out of the Great Tribulation. They did not wash their robes and make them white except through that cleansing fire.
~17~
An inherent part of Gods mercy is to give every human mortal an opportunity to demonstrate spiritual allegiance, clearly and unequivocally. Men cannot do so unless they come under extreme spiritual trial. The complacent environment of a stable social order does not bring human mortals to spiritual trial; it merely offers opportunity to display social allegiances. We should recognize that the Prince has come, is now in his power, and has planted his seed among mankind. He did so while mankind slept. The weeds grow with the wheat, and coexist, side by side. They are relatives, friends and neighbors. It has been customary for Christians to conceive of this coexistence as those who publicly espouse a devotion to Jesus, and those who do not. But such public display is mere social appearance. Unfortunately, for their sad disappointment, the forces now shaping around us are not so neatly defined. The forces are far more insidious and deadly. If death comes from family members, relatives, friends, and neighbors, by what preposterous stretch of the imagination could such event take place? What will bring ordinary men and women, all those lovely and loved ones, all those gentle women and kind men, to an extreme which reaches beyond any conceivable human possibility? In this century we have become accustomed to genocide and persecution unto death of entire segments of population. Whether it was Germany, or Russia, or Cambodia, or other programs of mass human extermination we have witnessed in the past hundred years, we cannot raise our imagination to the possibility that mass human murder will now come by the hands of seemingly sane comrades and jovial companions living in the midst of us. The key to understanding was provided by John. It is supposed service to God. These individuals will believe that they are obeying the instructions of God. They will be given the reasons and the spiritual influence to believe they are offering a service to God. This truly diabolical action will come out of new age persons who have placed themselves under the psychic and spiritual influence of the Devil. They did not have their hearts centered on God; they knew neither Jesus nor the Father. They were after new spiritual experiences and communications; they are now receiving them with true vengeance. Emerging today, around our planet, are large masses of people who experience new psychic phenomena. They hear quiet voices within their minds. They produce a literal flood of new revelations from those voices. And they experience intimations of new spiritual bliss which they heartily believe is coming directly from God. Mark Farley, of Corvallis, Oregon, made the following statement in the spring of 1994. And so I started my quest for my teacher. I didnt have any guidelines so I just made up everything as I went along. During the hour that I commuted each way to work I began talking to my teacher and listen-
~18~

ing for answers. I half expected to hear audible voices, even though other transmitters had told me that the teachers voices sound like your own thoughts at first . . . I sat in the car a long time. I knew I was at a spiritual junction. I just sat there and watched the trees move in the wind and the river flow by. I thought about the cycles and my place in the world. I tried to feel lonely but I couldnt. I realized that I would never feel or think the same way again. I had already changed. Something within me had made up its mind to see where this road would lead.
They believe they are the pioneers of a new planetary age. They believe the earth will be renovated and that they are the agents of such renovation. What the mission means to me has evolved and matured as I have become involved with it, and it becomes apparent that we will be instrumental in what is to come. The few flashes of the future that I have received from the teachers make me wonder if I will be up to the challenge . . . I found myself wanting all the challenges the universe could give me so that I could grow enough to be involved in whatever the teaching mission would become . . . I have waited all my life for the fulfillment of the purpose that I have always felt within me. I will not allow my fear, prejudice, and self-loathing to stand in the way of becoming what the Father intended me to be. I wanted a taste of it on this planet . . . We all need to become projectors of the Fathers love. I have experienced a few brief flashes of that love in moments when my guard was down and I can tell you that its potent medicine. I would give anything to be able to spread that love around. I think I have had glimpses of what this mission is really about and I pledge myself anew every time I get an expanded view . . . At the moment of this writing they are being conditioned to new attitudes of reality, to different mental frameworks, to strong psychic readjustments. They are being conditioned to accept the instructions of that Master Mind who has gained entry into their minds, with a control they do not recognize because of the subtleties of his technique. While he is conditioning them they continue to believe they are free agents. And they will continue to believe they are free agents as he leads them into the most horrifying human action of all planetary time. A constant theme runs through all of the messages received from that spiritual God. This time is indeed the early stages of the mission, the testing ground, as it were. Although this stage reaches around the globe, in the years to come you will barely recognize this mission for what it appears today . . . You concern yourselves overmuch with this process, breaking your hearts against the rejections and the falseness that appear to
~19~
batter you . . . The outcomes are not yours . . . Think not that I will ever abandon you as you struggle on this rocky and lonely road, and know that wherever possible, I will not only light your path, but show you the wonders that all who seek reality will see along the way. You will not regret this, however many dark hours you must bear. There will always be the light . . . . . . there are enough souls present to minister to wherever you pass by. You are the leaven in the dough. Not all can be the leaven, and there is no shame in this, but you will lighten the entire population of the world . . . Trust in me; trust in my mission . . . Know that I love you, each one of you, tenderly and truly and personally. When you are uncertain, my spirit is with you, my mind is available to you . . . The emphasis is mine. Christians customarily believe in two types of diabolical influence. The first is the spirit of sin which now pervades our world, a spiritual atmosphere which conditions our lives but from which we are safe as long as we remain true to God in righteousness. The second is diabolical possession in which the victim is subjected to actual seizure by evil spirits. These traditional views have frozen into mythical notions which do not reflect a recognition of the true reality of Spirit control. Even though their literature is filled with new age concerns, Christians do not recognize the middle ground, where neighbors and friends have subjected themselves to literal mental and psychic control while going about ordinary lives. The Prince is real. He is alive. He is a personality. He thinks. He plans. He acts. And he watches to see who will become his son or daughter. When we literally open our minds to him he readily jumps in. And then we become his. Christians cannot grasp the reality of living spirit personalities. They do not understand that the Prince is part of the Kingdom of Heaven. They do not apprehend that the Kingdom is real. They have not formulated a scheme which would permit them to place different spirit personalities within the Kingdom. They do not conceive of structure, or spatial dimension, or administrative purpose. For them the Kingdom of Heaven is mystical, words pronounced without content. A network of influence now exists all around our globe. It is not a network of formal human structure. From my personal contacts with these people I know they have had difficulty organizing. The Prince does not want them to become organized at the human level; they would interfere with his plans. He wants to maintain individual control which will permit him to direct their actions as suits his purpose. The network is his, not theirs. Paul told us that the god of this age comes as an angel of light. He has appeared to individuals in the past as a being of light. But this is not the significance of the revelations now being given to the servants of the Prince. He will provide them, literally, with light. It will be such a powerful influence they will not be able to deny it. It will give them absolute conviction that it is from God himself. And it is C from their God.
~20~
Indeed, they will enlighten the entire population of the world. This will be a worldwide action, to cleanse the human race according to his criteria. And they will do so because he has made his mind available to them. When he opens his mind to them they will see his light. It will appear glorious to them. This leaves us with a disturbing situation. Christians today are ineffective in thwarting this upsurge of psychic social formations because they cannot shake the mystical attitudes in which they now stumble. How many of them are willing to give credit to the living power of this fallen being? How many are willing to accept that, indeed, he will provide such light? Christians are subject to distortions of spiritual realities which prevent them from contributing to the salvation of Gods people. This means that the witnesses who will be brought up before governors and kings and before churches and synagogues will not come from the ranks of ordinary Christians. They must be from other places who have an understanding of the reality of this fallen being, and who have been prepared for this service. This does not mean that a few Christians here and there may not become part of the witness service. But it does mean that the rank and file of Christians will not be able to serve in this capacity. They are too constrained by their conventional and traditional mythical and mystical notions.
The Kingdom of Heaven

Matt 24:10-14 And then many will fall away, and betray one another, and hate one another. And many false prophets will arise and lead many astray. And because wickedness is multiplied, most mens love will grow cold. But he who endures to the end will be saved. And this gospel of the kingdom will be preached throughout the whole world, as a testimony to all nations; and then the end will come. The gospel preached at the end of the age is the gospel of the Kingdom, not the gospel of personal salvation. This is not to say that personal salvation was not the business of God over the past two thousand years. Paul was commissioned to take that gospel to the Gentiles. The other apostles understood their service also as that of the gospel of personal salvation through the life, death and resurrection of Jesus, who became a savior to all members of the human race. But now God has a different need: to salvage this planet and his people on this planet. Christian theologies and views are not adequate to that task. Christians are unaware of the administrative structure of the Kingdom, or even the location of that Kingdom. C. S. Lewis, one of their favorite champions, stated it succinctly:
~21~
What we need for the moment is not so much a body of belief as a body of people familiarized with certain ideas. If we could even effect in one per cent of our readers a change-over from the conception of Space to the conception of Heaven, we should have made a beginning. The Kingdom of Heaven is within space and time. The fallen One wanted to ascend above the stars, to place his throne on the Mount of Assembly in the far north, above the heights of the clouds, and make himself like the Most High, Isa 14:13-14. The far north cannot be in some mystical heaven; it must have a spatial reference in a three-dimensional universe. But Christians have no understanding of such matters, in spite of the revelations they carry with them to church each Sunday morning. They know there are Michaels, and a Gabriel, and many Melchizedeks, and seraphim and cherubim, but they have not the slightest notion how they relate to one another. Michael is a Chief Prince, a Prince above all Princes, Dan 10:13, but Christians do not know what that means. Furthermore, he is only one of many Chief Princes, but Christians flee, frightened by such revelations. When this gospel of the Kingdom is preached to all nations the end will come. The gospel of the Kingdom cannot be preached until a dramatic change in world attitude occurs, until Christians are willing to reexamine where they stand. And they will not reexamine where they stand until they are brought out of their arrogance to their knees in more certain humility. And that striking result will only be brought by persecution unto death. Our God will change the attitudes of this world, and he will use the Devil to do it. Our God will bring a spiritual judgment upon all of us, and we deserve it. What will men and women do when the slaughter comes? Who can be trusted? How many will seek to save their skins by betraying neighbor and friend and brother? What will become of all the brotherly love which so many espouse today? We all can make claims of our respect for others, and the Christian fellowship we share, within a comfortable and safe social environment. But we will turn an altogether different face when death comes to our doorstep. Many false prophets will arise. Those who teach that Gods people will be rescued from all trouble and woe are false prophets. Those false prophets are in many Christian pulpits around this planet. But the truly wicked false prophets will be those who serve the fallen Prince. They will teach a new world order, and claim themselves as the agents of that new order. They will believe they are serving Christ. And they will lead many astray. God is bringing a spiritual judgment upon mankind. Men and women everywhere will show their true colors in a time of trial this world has never before witnessed.
~22~
CHAPTERTHREE The Prince of This World

John 14:30 I no longer will speak many things with you: for the Prince of this world is coming. And he has nothing in me. But that the world may know that I love the Father, and as the Father has commanded me, so do I. Any question we might have on the integrity of Johns text, as it has come down to us, should not deter us from clear recognition that Jesus made very important remarks to his apostles and disciples, and that he kept those remarks to the end of his association with them. He reserved those warnings for the end of his life. Revelation of a severe religious persecution, and notice that a rebel spirit personality was now coming on this world, should help us understand. Unfortunately, we modern people lost the reality of spirit transactions. When we did, we opened the door to this rebel spirit. Ancient people accepted such possibilities; otherwise Jesus would not have addressed them as he did. He would not make remarks that were totally obscure to his apostles. They carried significant weight for John. Emphatically, John placed them at a crucial point in his account. Thus, for two thousand years, a very important warning from Jesus was preserved. Can we neglect the testimony of the New Testament? The idea that a rebel Spirit Personality was an immediate threat to everyone is a major theme of Christianity. The author of 1 Peter said that he prowls about, seeking to devour, 5:8. The author of the letter of James stated that if we resist him he will flee, 4:7. John told us in Rev 12:12 that he now comes with exceeding anger because he knows his time is short. Such strong tradition had solid foundation in the teachings of Jesus. But modern generations lost contact with the reality. We resorted to mythological images of this Great Being. In our doubt and disbelief we created skepticism about his true power, to give the Prince freedom to exercise his diabolical schemes. We viewed this Prince as a Devil or Satan, who, somehow or other, was around our planet deceiving mankind. We did not grasp him as a real personality bent on literally destroying mankind. Jesus accorded him honor. Prince is from Greek archon. It means Ruler, and is applied to Jesus as Prince of the kings of the earth, Rev 1:5 (KJV), to rulers of the nations, Matt 20:25, judges and magistrates, Acts 16:19, and rulers of the synagogues, Matt 9:18. It is also translated Prince by both KJV and RSV in Matt 9:34 and 12:24. It denotes ruling authority. This Prince was assigned administrative responsibility for our world.
3- The Prince of This World
~23~
The Greek word kosmos is translated world. But it meant much more. It meant order, as intelligently planned, arrangement, as purposeful design, or embellishment or decoration, as that by which God blessed creation. This word is the origin of the English word cosmos. In Rom 1:20 it is used for the universe, recognized by the Greeks for the order observable within it. In most applications in the New Testament it meant the earth as a body within the order of creation, the planet. This word must be distinguished from aion, the Greek word for age. Thus, the Prince of this World meant a distinct personality, ruler of this planet. If we used modern terminology we might more readily understand him as Prince of this Planet. In more formal terms we might say Planetary Prince, as a title of lordly administrative authority. Did Jesus have power to remove him? Certainly. He is the Creator; he is God. This Prince was a divinely created being. Divine beings do not exist and do not function without the consent, approval and blessing of their Creator. Why, then, did Jesus permit him to remain? Why did Jesus not remove this diabolical personality? Jesus was following his Fathers will. Jesus did not permit the Prince to remain strictly because it was his own will. Jesus spoke plainly about it; he had nothing in him. He wanted nothing to do with this fallen Prince. The rebel had long since taken his own devious path, not aligned with his Creator. He was a rebel, pure and simple. The Father wanted this rebel to remain here. This the Father had commanded, and this Jesus would do. AAs the Father has commanded me, so do I.@ The will of Jesus was in perfect alignment with the will of the Father. We should infer that the Father had reasons which must be for the greater benefit of creation, and for all his created children, reasons which we do not now appreciate, and reasons which Jesus did not discuss.
The Coming of the Rebel Prince

In order to more clearly determine the spiritual influence of this rebel I shall now examine the phrases in this passage from John 14:30, and the other two references in John 12:31 and 16:11. Coming is from Greek erchomai. It is a frequent verb, denoting to come, to go, or to pass. In Matt 11:3 two apostles of John the Baptist inquired if Jesus was the coming one, the Messiah. The remark in John 14:30 was intended to indicate that the Prince of this World is now coming, i.e. will be permitted to perform his diabolical work. Jesus did not specifically say when this coming would take place. But he gave us warning. Nothing is from Greek ouden. It meant nobody, nothing, none. It was an emphatic word which removed all possibility that he had any connection with Jesus goals, was in the same spirit of intent with Jesus, or was aligned with the will of Jesus. This Prince had nothing in Jesus.
~24~
In is from Greek en. It is used in a wide variety of applications, such as upon, among, before, in the presence of, with, and so on. In Mark 5:2 it is translated as with an unclean spirit. In John 14:30 Jesus meant that the Prince of this World, this Planetary Prince, has absolutely nothing to do with him. He is a rebel. Judgment is from Greek krisis. The word meant to separate, or to make a distinction between, to judge, and to sentence. Cast out is from Greek ekballo. It meant to cast out, eject by force, or expel. A modifying word, eko, meant outside. The Prince of this World would be ekblithisetai eko, cast out, completely removed from existence. But not before his coming. He would be permitted to do his diabolical work. He would be given ample opportunity to demonstrate the justice of the judgment placed upon him. Our God is a God of mercy; he is merciful to all his created children. He will extend full mercy opportunity to this rebel Son. And he will extend mercy opportunity to all human beings to demonstrate their spiritual loyalties. But he cannot offer such mercy without spiritual trial. Jesus is using this rebel to determine our true loyalties.
The God of This Age

2 Corinthians 4:3-4 And even if our gospel is veiled, it is veiled only to those who are perishing. In their case the god of this age has blinded the minds of the unbelievers, to keep them from seeing the light of the gospel of the glory of Christ, who is the likeness of God. In 2 Cor 4:4 god is from Greek theos. In the polytheism of the Greeks the word denoted a god or deity. See Acts 14:11, 19:26, 28:6, and Gal 4:8. The Greek word was appropriated by Jews in their Greek-speaking communities, and retained by Christians to denote the one true God. In the Septuagint theos translates the Hebrew word Elohim. This word should be distinguished from Yahweh, the Hebrew name for God, which was given to the tribes of Israel at Mt. Sinai. Yahweh is translated in several English versions as LORD. In the Septuagint it was translated as Kurios, the Greek word for Lord. However, the Septuagint was inconsistent; sometimes if would translate Yahweh as Theos, depending on context. I emphasize that Yahweh is a name, and not an adjective of royal designation. The translations are incorrect when they translate Yahweh as Lord. As I indicated the word translated world by most of the versions is from Greek aionos. Aion denotes an age or an era, a significant period of time; it does not mean the world. Translation as world is incorrect and has introduced gross confusion in our understanding. In fact, the modern translations probably reflect a desire to steer clear of the true significance of the term. Aionos is indeterminate as to duration, of unknown length, although it does not necessarily mean unending. The inflected form aionion is translated everlasting or eternal, in Matt 25:41, Rom 16:26, 2 Cor 4:18, and so on.
~25~
By shifting emphasis of the word aeon from age to world modern translators placed a veil over the significance of the presence of this god on this planet. Jesus was leaving and now permitted him to come. Since that coming the Prince has held the world in his grip. In the Dead Sea Scrolls this influence on the present age is designated as the Era of Wrath. Although he was denied rulership when he was cast down, his power did not end. As a spirit personality he is about to perform a dramatic act in defiance against his Creator. Whether Jesus used Greek archon, meaning Prince or Ruler, or if Paul used Greek theos, the designation is one of royal celestial status. This personality was a spirit administrator appointed to rulership of this planet. Paul wrote to a world embedded in pagan ideas of heavenly realms populated by the gods. The Greeks, Romans, Egyptians, Phoenicians, Phrygians, Babylonians and other surrounding people all believed the skies were ruled by the gods. No matter how debased, mythologized, paganized, humanized, or corrupted, the central concept was one of rulership by spirit entities. They are immortal; they are spirit personalities; hence they were regarded as gods. When Paul used the word god his audience readily understood his intent. Only modern people, far removed from the social milieu of those days, and under the blindness wrought by this rebel personality, would fail to recognize Pauls meaning. Paul emphasized the difference between this god who was given administrative power, and Jesus, who was in the likeness of God the Father, far superior to all lesser gods, including the god of this age. Jesus, as our Creator, is a God who demonstrates true righteousness and glory. Paul confirms the fact of world spiritual power, granted by God to the god of this age, for a period of unspecified duration.
Many Gods and Many Lords

1 Corinthians 8:5 For although there may be so-called gods in heaven or on earth, as indeed there are many gods and many lords, yet for us there is one God, the Father, from whom all things are and for whom we exist, and one Lord, Jesus Christ, through whom are all things and through whom we exist. In this passage gods is from thei, the Greek plural of theos. Here Paul supports a theme of celestial rulership. Did he use the term so-called because celestial personalities, the gods C a. do not exist and are so-called out of imaginary pagan mythology, or b. actually exist but are not gods in the sense that they should be worshipped? Philo, for example, argued that, while there is but one sovereign God, he has commissioned many lesser authorities and ministering angels to serve his purpose. Paul was expressing the same understanding. The god of this age would
~26~
be one who was commissioned, but a rebel who is now in spiritual power, blinding the minds of those who do not believe. Their understanding was conditioned by a desire for smooth things. The confirming parenthetical remark, as indeed there are many gods and many lords, has been variously interpreted to reject the possibility that God has commissioned many lesser gods and lords as administrators in the celestial realms. One commentator described it as ironic, meaning that Paul did not intend a literal statement, but was speaking in irony, reflecting on prevailing social attitudes. Another described it as felicitous, patronizing his spiritist-minded Corinthian audience, but again not literally true. Still another commentator remarked that Pauls wording . . . is not to be taken to affirm that the gods and lords of the pagan religions have some sort of existence. Paul is not affirming that these gods have actual reality, for this would be directly contrary to Jewish-Christian faith that there is no God but one. The commentators thus reflect prevailing attitudes that there are no commissioned spirit rulers in the heavenly realms who may be called gods and lords. However, Paul was emphatic of their actual existence. Indeed, there are many gods and many lords in the heavenly realms, immortal spirit beings who deserve human respect. But for us there is only one God, the Father, and one Lord, Jesus. Only they are to be worshiped. Attempts to reduce the significance of Pauls remark denies the value of his statement, and elucidation of our understanding. The modern world, whether secular, Jewish, or Christian, did not want to understand. The reason for this reduction in reality is simple: if the Devil no longer existed, if he was no more than mythological, he could not be of danger. He then was only a harmless image in those Christian, Jewish, and secular minds. He could proceed with his diabolical work unopposed. And that is exactly where we are today. We human mortals permitted an environment which gave him free reign. And all because we did not remain righteous and true to God The greatest deception the Devil ever taught was to lead us to believe he did not exist.
The Prince of the Power of the Air

Ephesians 2:2 In which you then walked, according to the age of this world, according to the Prince of the power of the air, the spirit now operating in the children of disobedience. Power is from Greek exousia. It meant freedom of action, the right or authority to act. This personality has authority from God to act, according to his celestial status. Air is from Greek aer. It occurs seven times in the New Testament. In five applications aer means the atmosphere; in the other two, of which Eph 2:2 is one, it could carry a meaning of a spiritual atmosphere, or an atmosphere not physically visible. This latter sense may also be implied in 1 Thes 4:17.
~27~
Again, as with all other revelations of the fallen Prince, this passage received considerable attention from biblical commentators, with confusion about its meaning. As one commentator said: Power is used in the sense of area of dominion. The idea that the air is the realm of Satans authority is obviously connected with the current astrology; it presupposes that the several areas of the universe have each its spirit ruler, and assigns the air to Satan. Note that this commentator admits the air as a common designation for the domain of this spirit ruler, and states that it presupposes several areas of the universe have each its spirit ruler. He abstracts his idea of administrative dominions by the phrase several areas. Although he admits these Aseveral areas@ as within the universe, he does not see them as planets, or systems of worlds. A large Kingdom of Heaven of many worlds is beyond his thought. He would see Pauls remarks as a reflection of the then current astrology C meaning that others worlds in space do not actually exist, and that such notion is strictly astrological. He would not credit Paul with understanding of such matters beyond appeasement to this popular myth. If administrative realms are real, and if they have a multitude of ruling personalities, the commentator is the one who refuses to admit such existence, not Paul. He regards such existence as mythological. He would unjustly apply his myth suppositions to the ancients. Once again, he is reflecting the general unbelief which pervades Christian thought. Another commentator said this: It is possible, therefore, to understand the words as meaning the ruler to whom belongs the power over the region of the air; but this would create difficulty in connection with (pneumatos, the Greek word for spirit). It is therefore perhaps best to take the phrase as the power whose seat is in the air. . . . Eadie ingeniously suggests that . . . as there is an atmosphere round the physical globe, so air (Greek aer) envelopes this spiritual kosmos. . . . That the notion of the air being the dwelling place of the spirits, and especially of evil spirits, was current, appears to be beyond doubt. . . . There is no difficulty in supposing that St. Paul is here alluding to such current notions. Nor are we to suppose that he is conveying any special revelation about the matter. Here the commentator is willing to quote from Eadie that the air in Pauls remarks refers to a spiritual cosmos, although he discounts the validity of such suggestion. The silent inference is that Paul was conceding to current intellectual fashion but did not himself actually believe such myth. Paul used such imagery because it derived from common views; he was not making any special revelation. How truly unfortunate that so many modern Christian minds deny Pauls intent.
~28~
The power of this Prince was in world spiritual influence granted him by God. How he used that power was within his hands, a freedom of personality expression also granted by God. As a spirit being he is resident upon this planet, but it would be primitive for us to view his abode as in the physical air.
The Divine Councils On High

Psalms 82: God has taken his place in the divine council; in the midst of the gods he holds judgment. How long will you judge unjustly and show partiality to the wicked? Give justice to the weak and the fatherless; maintain the right of the afflicted and the destitute. Rescue the weak and the needy; deliver them from the hand of the wicked. They have neither knowledge nor understanding, they walk about in darkness; all the foundations of the earth are shaken. I say, You are gods, sons of the Most High, all of you; nevertheless, you shall die like men, and fall like any prince. Arise, O God, judge the earth; for to thee belong all the nations! In 1888 Thomas K. Cheyne wrote: No psalm makes a stronger demand than this on the historic imagination of the interpreter. The ideas may be perennial, but their outward forms are no longer understood. How true. We human mortals, isolated for thousands of years from contact with the celestial realms, no longer understand revelation. Celestial beings appeared to Abraham, Gen 18:1f; Melchizedek was one of those, Gen 14:18. Moses had direct contact with heavenly representatives, Exod 19, 24:9-11. Other examples could be cited from the Old Testament. The apostle John states explicitly that he had conversation and revelation direct from celestial beings, Rev 1:1, 17, 22:8. In commenting on this Psalm the writer in The Interpreters Bible stated: The crux of the interpretation of the psalm is the meaning to be attached to gods in vs 1b,6, and on this point commentators differ widely. The principle meanings proposed are: (1) the lesser gods and angels; (2) the national gods of the heathen; (3) the wicked governors of the nations holding Israel in subjection; (4) kings and those invested with authority; (5) the judges of Israel. . . . This variety of interpretation testifies to the paucity and ambiguity of the available data. While it is true that we have no explicit revelation on celestial administrations in the Bible, sufficient evidence exists for us to come to more certain understanding. How truly the Prince of this World blinded us. It was his purpose to keep us
~29~
from understanding; the generations reflect the results of his diabolical influence. These possible explanations given in The Interpreters Bible, and other scholarly studies, show the darkness which has afflicted us. Consider the manner in which the word gods is used in the Psalms. All are from KJV. Ps 82:6 I have said, Ye are gods; and all of you are children of the most High. Ps 86:8 Among the gods there is none like unto thee, O Lord; neither are there any works like unto thy works. Ps 138:1 I will praise thee with my whole heart: before the gods will I sing praise unto thee. Ps 136:2 O give thanks unto the God of gods: for his mercy endureth for ever. Ps 135:5 For I know that the LORD is great, and that our Lord is above all gods. Ps 97:9 For thou, LORD, art high above all the earth: thou art exalted far above all gods. Ps 97:7 Confounded be all they that serve graven images, that boast themselves of idols: worship him, all ye gods. Ps 96:4 For the LORD is great, and greatly to be praised: he is to be feared above all gods. Ps 95:3 For the LORD is a great God, and a great King above all gods. Do we really believe our God would be King over pagan gods? Would he be a Lord to all those? Would the Psalmist ask those pagan gods to worship our God? Would we sing praises to our God in an assembly of pagan gods? Can we not understand that the heavenly realms are populated with many gods and many lords, divine administrators who serve our common God? Is this not sufficient evidence to demonstrate how the god of this world blinded us to clear vision of the might of our heavenly Father? As further evidence of this blindness consider the KJV translation. Congregation of the mighty is properly rendered as divine council. Literally, in Hebrew, bedath-el is assembly of God. Such denial by translation can be followed through the entire passage. As a consequence of our mythologized fears few recognize the existence of a divine administration in the heavens. God is a great and powerful God, he has many lesser gods to assist him in the transactions of a universe. He assigns Planetary Princes to rule the worlds of space. And if they rebel he gathers divine councils to deliberate on justice, and the actions necessary to correct disruptions. As The Interpreters Bible goes on to say:
~30~

The view that the psalmist has in mind a heavenly concourse of gods, demigods, and angels, has much to be said for it. The ancient Near East was well acquainted with assemblies of gods, and, a priori, we should expect the Hebrews to be familiar with such an idea. . . . Ultimately, of course, the Hebrews abandoned the concept that there were lesser gods in heaven, and the heavenly host was thought to consist solely of angels.
How true. Blind Judaism and Christianity admit of a heavenly host, but solely of angels. Jews bear a heavy burden; they were entrusted with the oracles of God, as stated so eloquently by a Jew in Romans 3:2. How unfortunate that they also became blind to divine revelations. We cannot escape the view that those of Hebrew heritage are more accountable; they received revelations directly; they did not need the environment of the Near East to so inform them. When the Devil brought blindness to this planet he did not favor Christians over Jews; they were of equal mark. If God consults with other divine beings does this mean he is a lesser God? Certainly not. It means that he gives respect to the existence, function and service of his heavenly created Sons. We might devise a scenario of the deliberations which took place. Those other gods might ask him: How long are you going to permit this to go on? How long will you show partiality to these rebels? Will you not bring justice to the earth? Consider the disruptions caused by this fallen Son, a Son which you created. Look at all the fatherless of the earth. Can you not see all the weak and needy, all the afflicted and the destitute? Do you not see what has happened upon earth? They have neither knowledge nor understanding. They know nothing of the heavenly realms, and of the administration which rebelled. They walk about in darkness; they are like children without light. And then God might respond: I shall bring restitution. I know that all the foundations of the earth are shaken. I shall rescue my creation from that turmoil and woe. I shall demonstrate to those fallen Sons true justice and righteousness. I say to them: You are gods, Sons of the Most High, all of you; nevertheless, you shall die like men, and fall like any prince. If they could not bring justice as heavenly princes, perhaps they will exhibit justice as human mortals. Out of the mercy of my heart I shall permit them one final opportunity. They brought havoc to the human
~31~
races. Now I will make them human also, that they may taste of the wine they created. I shall give them the same opportunity they gave to each of those mortals. Then we shall know their true worth. But I know their hearts. They shall not repent. They shall not forgive. They shall die as any mortal would die, and shall fall as any earthly prince would fall. And they shall be no more forever. And now God rises to judge the earth. To him belong all the stars and worlds of space. Now creation will know who is God. This Psalm shows that unusual transactions are to take place. The passage suggests that divine beings are to live as men; in one final mercy extension they will be given opportunity as human mortals. This concept is so profound, and so utterly beyond the theological range of existing Jewish or Christian religions, it demands careful attention. It is revealed to us in more than one passage.
His Celestial Origins

Ezekiel 28:12-19 Son of man, raise a lamentation over the king of Tyre, and say to him, Thus says the Lord GOD: You were the signet of perfection, full of wisdom and perfect in beauty.You were in Eden, the garden of God; every precious stone was your covering, carnelian, topaz, and jasper, chrysolite, beryl, and onyx, sapphire, carbuncle, and emerald; and wrought in gold were your settings and your engravings. On the day that you were created they were prepared.With an anointed guardian cherub I placed you; you were on the holy mountain of God; in the midst of the stones of fire you walked.You were blameless in your ways from the day you were created, till iniquity was found in you.In the abundance of your trade you were filled with violence, and you sinned; so I cast you as a profane thing from the mountain of God, and the guardian cherub drove you out from the midst of the stones of fire.Your heart was proud because of your beauty; you corrupted your wisdom for the sake of your splendor. I cast you to the ground; I exposed you before kings, to feast their eyes on you.By the multitude of your iniquities, in the unrighteousness of your trade you profaned your sanctuaries; so I brought forth fire from the midst of you; it consumed you, and I turned you to ashes upon the earth in the sight of all who saw you.All who knew you among the peoples are appalled at you; you have come to a dreadful end and shall be no more for ever.
~32~
Previous passages demonstrated the difficulty we have in understanding and accepting divine revelations. This passage is further encumbered by the symbolism and figures employed. The phrase King of Tyre has thrown most expositors into the assumption that it refers to the historic Tyre, and the kings who ruled it. Their commentary centers on the idea that the prophet intended a description and pronouncement against an ancient earthly prince. The ruler of Tyre has been led to imagine himself as more than human, and his city as impregnable, like the seat of the gods. They believe this view is confirmed by the fate which is decreed against him. He will be turned to ashes upon the earth, in the sight of all who see him. How could that be other than an earthly king? But the statement is clear; he was cast to the ground; he became a physical being. And in that physical condition he was burned to ashes in the sight of the kings of earth. Now he will be no more forever. Thus, we now have two passages which show that a divine being will be given one final mercy opportunity as a human mortal. But he will fail; his mind became so distorted with pride, and betrayal of the trust placed in him, he long since lost his mental equilibrium. No being, human or divine, can betray such immense trust without paying the personal price. He is truly insane. From The Urantia Papers: P.754 - In all the administrative work of a local universe no high trust is deemed more sacred than that reposed in a Planetary Prince who assumes responsibility for the welfare and guidance of the evolving mortals on a newly inhabited world. And of all forms of evil, none are more destructive of personality status than betrayal of trust and disloyalty to ones confiding friends. In committing this deliberate sin, Caligastia so completely distorted his personality that his mind has never since been able fully to regain its equilibrium. Other commentators suggest this chapter in Ezekiel is a continuation of Chapters 26 and 27, which contain an extended description of a land of Tyre. In both passages the prophet is speaking, not so much of an particular individual, as of the nation whose character is embodied in the person of the chief. Unfortunately, for this view, the prophet promised that Tyre would be totally destroyed and covered by the waters of the sea, 26:19, 27:27. This never actually happened to the historic Tyre; therefore, the commentators seek recourse in the suggestion that the terms are merely poetic, or that some later editor corrupted the original text. Little did the commentators and theologians recognize that Chapter 26 and 27 deal with a different, but related, subject. As King of Tyre this celestial personality will focus his insane activities in a land of Tyre. The symbolism of Tyre is fitting to a land upon earth at the last days of a planetary age.
~33~
The commentators also believed this oracle was part of a myth cycle then current in the Near East. The story belonged, no doubt, to the common stock of Semitic myths, some of them preserved in the Babylonian epics, some in the Phoenician traditions. For parallel, the commentators cited the expulsion of Adam and Eve from the Garden of Eden, Genesis 3, and the placement of a cherubim to guard against their return. This Archon, this Ruler, this Prince, was created perfect, as was Adam, until iniquity was found in him. His fate is similar to that of Lucifer in Isaiah 14:12, who fell from heaven and was cast down to earth, again to die like any man. Contrary to the scholarly godless view the passage informs us in some detail of the origin of this heavenly personality. The use of the phrase King of Tyre was convenient for the prophet to provide a context for his message. He was writing among people who no longer respected the heavenly realms. Ezekiel composed his prophecies following 600 BC and the Babylonian captivity. Disbelief and failure to remain true to God led to that captivity. Under conditions of revelation imposed upon him, Ezekiel could conceal his purpose; the revelation would then await a future generation which might examine it with greater care. Indeed, this personality was in the heavenly Eden, in the literal garden of God. This home was prepared for him on the day that he was created. He was created a divine being, a personality of celestial brilliance. His habitat was suited to his divine splendor. He was on the holy mountain of God, a distinct physical abode within the universe. Angelic beings were in service to him. Compare his walking among stones of fire, glistening crystals ablaze with spirit light, to the witness of the writer of the ancient Book of Enoch 18:6-9: And I saw a place which burns day and night, where there are seven mountains of magnificent stones. . . And I saw flaming fire. Consider also the description that this writer of the Book of Enoch provides of his visit to a great Majesty in the heavenly realms. And I went in till I drew nigh to a wall which is built of crystals and surrounded by tongues of fire. . . . And I drew nigh to a large house which was built of crystals, and the walls of the house were like a tesselated floor made of crystals, and its ground work was of crystal. Its ceiling was like the path of the stars and the lightnings, and between them were fiery cherubim, and their heaven as clear as water. A flaming fire surrounded the walls, and its portals blazed with fire. These brilliant crystals, composing walls and floors, are not in some mystical heaven beyond space and time. They are within space and time. Furthermore, the apostle John provides description of a great crystalline structure, sometime to come down upon earth, composed of numerous gems, and the city was pure gold, clear as glass, Rev 21:18. This great edifice also is lit with a glorious celestial light; it has no need of the sun or the moon to obtain its light.
~34~
Do any of us really believe that a great crystalline structure, obviously composed of materials that one can see and touch, would come down out of some mystical heaven? Are we to continue to believe that the Kingdom of Heaven is not within the physical realms of time and space? Consider the statements. That personality of Ezekiel 28 was in Eden, the Garden of God. The Garden was not an earthly Eden, it was a heavenly Eden. He was cast as a profane thing from the mountain of God. The guardian cherubim drove him out. For those of us unacquainted with textual study the word Eden may be a major stumbling block. We traditionally identify it with the Garden of Eden, the earthly home of Adam and Eve. Study of the Hebrew word, and other uses in the Bible, shows that it is a generic term for any place of great beauty, luxuriousness, and natural bounty. Refer to the Commentators, such as Davidson and Brown, et al. In Isaiah 51:3 the word is used to describe the dramatic changes in world environment which will take place in the coming new age: For Yahweh shall comfort Zion: he will comfort all her waste places; he will make her wilderness like Eden, and her desert like the Garden of Yahweh. Joy and gladness shall be found therein, thanksgiving, and the voice of melody. Here the Garden of Yahweh, located in the heavenly realms, is used as an archetype for great beauty. The material beauty surrounding the residence (throne) of God is also indicated by John. Rev 22:1: And he showed me a pure river of water of life, clear as crystal, proceeding out of the throne of God and of the Lamb. In another oracle Ezekiel compares great beauty to the cedars in the garden of God, and to the trees of Eden, Ezek 31:8-9. I have made him fair by the multitude of his branches: so that all the trees of Eden, that were in the garden of God, envied him. The commentators see this as mere poetic emphasis. Blinded by the Prince of this World, they do not recognize the literal significance of such revelations. This personality, this heavenly being, was created perfect. Then, as he considered his perfection and his beauty, he became proud. He began to question his Creator and his Creators purpose. As temptation grew in his heart he entertained the notion of independence. He could function without his Lord and Creator. When he succumbed to this sophistry iniquity was found in him
CHAPTER FOUR The Release

2 Thes 2:1-12 Now concerning the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ and our assembling to meet him, we beg you, brethren, not to be quickly shaken in mind or excited, either by spirit or by word, or by letter purporting to be from us, to the effect that the day of the Lord has come. Let no one deceive you in any way; for that day will not come, unless the rebellion comes first, and the man of lawlessness is revealed, the son of perdition, who opposes and exalts himself against every so-called god or object of worship, in order that he can sit in the sanctuary of God, proclaiming himself to be God. Do you not remember that when I was still with you I told you this? And you know what is restraining him now so that he may be revealed in his time. For the mystery of lawlessness is already at work; only he who now restrains him will do so until he is out of the way. And then the lawless one will be revealed, and the Lord Jesus will slay him with the breath of his mouth and destroy him by his appearing and his coming. The coming of the lawless one by the activity of Satan will be with all power and with pretended signs and wonders, and with all wicked deception for those who are to perish, because they refused to love the truth and so be saved. Therefore God sends upon them a strong delusion, to make them believe what is false, so that all may be condemned who did not believe the truth but had pleasure in unrighteousness. This passage is the most crucial in the Bible for our understanding of events as they are unfolding today, yet the most confusing. That blinding confusion rests on the powerful tradition that a man of lawlessness will take his seat in the Temple of God, proclaiming himself to be God. In popular notion there must be a man, there must be a seat, there must be a Temple, and there must be such intense megalomania this man believes himself to be God. 1. The Temple of God can find no easy location, although most expositors assume modern Jerusalem. Some expect the construction of a new temple, since the sectarian and ecumenical temples presently in Jerusalem do not seem appropriate to the tenor of these remarks. 2. Examination of the attributes of this man of lawlessness suggests components of character which place him above ordinary human capacities; i.e. he seems almost as a god. 3. We all have difficulty conceiving how a human being would somehow get it into his head that he is God. An ordinary mortal, reaching to such megalomania, would not have the sanity to function as a world leader, regardless of how depraved the world would become. 4. Of course, if a human mortal were driven by the power of an evil spirit within his head, he might aspire to believe he was God. But then the human mortal would be merely
a robotic agent, and not the personality assuming the Godship. Many Christians entertain these notions out of their mythical mental framework; they do not take time to examine reality. If this being is truly a man he must be born of a woman; he must grow up in some geographical location in some identifiable country; he must have social training; he must have been educated in some earthly school; he must have been reared in some political environment; he must have had association with scores or hundreds of fellow human mortals. Given the mundane nature of ordinary human life how would he arrive at such extraordinary presumption? We might argue that Jesus was the incarnation of God, yet his human nature and physical appearance prevented many from believing in him. Even the apostles had trouble coming to grips with his divine nature, for all the miracles they witnessed, until he appeared to them after his resurrection. If another fantastic personality were to appear we might not, at first, notice him. But the extraordinary role described by Paul would require our elevating a supposedly human mortal to godlike status. The supposition almost requires another incarnation, one of a diabolical personality. Does such a man exist somewhere on this planet? If so, and if events are imminent, we should expect that he already has indicated his wild propensities to comrades and compatriots. This would mean he is a "sleeper." He has not yet asserted himself in such blistering megalomania. Regardless of how we view such plausibility, it is time to replace mythical notions with reality. We must get our feet on the ground. We must evaporate mysticism and replace it with down-to-earth hard criteria. It is easy to create boogie men out of our imaginations. It is time for us to exercise discipline in our thinking. This is not to deny the fearsome tone of this revelation. It carries portent which demands the utmost care. Is Christian tradition correct? What was Paul really trying to say? Did he confuse different elements in a destiny episode for this planet? Much of the difficulty is linguistic. How did Paul use the Greek words? What did he intend in his statements? Another part of the difficulty is in his private revelations. He was not one to expound at length on those things which had been revealed to him; he made only passing remarks. Yet those aside comments provide us with important clues to God's plans for this world. A third difficulty is the limitation of Paul's understanding; depending on how information was given to him, his human mind may have tied the wrong two-and-two together, or otherwise confused planetary events. All of these elements condition our understanding of this passage.
Part 1: The Temple of God

The New Testament uses two Greek words which are translated as "Temple." The first is heiron; it meant a sacred place. In Mark 11:11 the word denoted the entire Jerusalem building with its precincts. This word was never used figuratively. The second word is naos. It meant a shrine or sanctuary. It was used both figuratively and metaphorically. The naos of the Jerusalem temple was the inner sanctuary, the holy of holies, where only the priests could enter. The word was used among Greeks and Romans as the shrine containing the idol of worship. The word was used figuratively by Jesus of his own physical body, John 2:19,21. In apostolic teaching it was used metaphorically for the church, the mystical body of Christ, Eph 2:21. It was also used by John, both literally and
figuratively, in Rev 3:12, 7:15, 11:19, 14:15,17, 15:5,6,8 16:1,17 for the new and heavenly Jerusalem, Rev 21:22. As an illustration of the confusion which tradition and modern translation have placed upon the word naos, consider Paul's remarks in 2 Cor 6:14-16. There he draws out the contrasting parallels between the children of God and the children of darkness: Righteousness with lawlessness. Fellowship in light with darkness. Christ with Beliar. Believer with unbeliever. A shrine of God with idols. Or, we could use sanctuary, the alternate word: "You are the sanctuary of the living God, as God has said, 'I shall dwell in them, and walk with them, and I will be their God, and they shall be my people.'" This passage is universally translated as the "temple of God." But consider the difference between sanctuary and temple. Although temple denotes a place of dedicated worship, perhaps even sacred, it carries with it the idea of physical structure. Shrine, or sanctuary, denotes a hallowed or holy place, not necessarily physical. By translating naos as temple we reduce the significance the term carried in the original writing. The two words were not directly synonymous for the ancient writers. Temple can mean only that which is physical; it has no figurative application. Sanctuary, on the other hand, can mean any place that is hallowed or holy, physical or spiritual, figurative or metaphorical. If we are the sanctuary of God he can dwell in our minds and our souls; the physical body then carries little significance, although Paul specified the physical body in 1 Cor 6:19. A living God does not occupy a physical structure; he dwells in a spiritual edifice. We must make our sanctuary holy for his indwelling; he would not indwell an unholy place. When this rebel personality takes his place it is not in the Temple of God, but in the Sanctuary of God. That is what Paul wrote, and that is what Paul meant. Therefore, Paul did not necessarily intend a physical location; he easily could have meant a spiritual place, or occupation of a spirit position. Such possibility would throw away interpretation which would identify Jerusalem or any other earthly location.
Part 2: Lawlessness
The Greek words anomos denotes lawless, without law, not subject to law. Anomias means lawlessness, violation of law. If the framework is the rules of creation set forth by God it would mean sin and iniquity, open and conscious defiance of God's laws, beyond simple blundering acts which are unlawful. Divine beings or human mortals who do not obey the will of their Creator, but substitute their own will in purposeful defiance, are in rebellion. Lawlessness is not limited to human mortals; it can be practiced by divine beings. The statement strongly implies a celestial personality who is in defiance against his Creator, and therefore, not human.
(This Greek word finds parallel in Latin inimicus and modern English inimical, enemy, and enmity.)
Part 3: The Man

The Greek word is anthropos. We get such English words as anthropology, the study of man, and anthropomorphic, ascribing human attributes. This one word throws understanding completely awry. Many interpreters believe the reference can only be to a human mortal. The International Critical Commentary engages in discussion of the various scholars who have viewed this word as a reference to a divine personality, not a human mortal. The use by Paul could be metaphorical; he may have used the word in a derogatory sense. For example, I have often referred to the Devil as the "Old Man." A difference in view comes about because the ancient manuscripts are not in agreement on use of the word describing this lawlessness. Some use the Greek word amartias, denoting error or offense, an act of the unaware human mortal, in contrast to anomias, an open defiance. ICC offers these remarks about 2 Thes 2: Instead of anomias (found in some ancient manuscripts) the majority of uncials read amartias. Occasionally (the opposite is true). As these variants and the parallelism in Job 7:21, Ps 31:5, and Isa 53:5 show, the two words are similar in meaning, amartia being the more general. Though common in LXX (the Septuagint), both anomia (Rom 4:7, 6:19, 2Cor 6:14) and anomos (1 Cor 9:21) are rare in Paul. Unless (the more ancient manuscripts were) revised in the light of verses 7-8, or substituted anomias for amartias in light of an exegesis which understood "the man of sin" to be Belial, the more specific anomias is the preferable reading. It is tempting to identify the figure described in the four phrases with Belial (Beliar), though we cannot be sure that Paul would assent to this identification. ICC goes on with a very important remark: (R. H.) Charles notably identifies "the man of lawlessness" with Belial but elaborates an hypothesis to account for the Antichrist as he appears in Paul and in later N. T. literature. The Anomos of Paul, a god-opposing man, a human sovereign armed with miraculous power, is the resultant of a fusion of two separate and originally independent traditions, that of the Antichrist and that of Beliar. The Antichrist is not, as Bousset supposes, originally the incarnate Devil but a god-opposing being of human origin. The first historical person to be identified with Antichrist is Antiochus Ephiphanes; and the language applied to him "recalls, though it may be unconsciously, the old Babylonian saga of the Dragon's assault on the gods of heaven." Beliar, on the other hand is a purely Satanic being. "It is through the Beliar constituent of the developed Antichrist myth that the old Dragon saga from Babylon gained entrance into the eschatologies of Judaism and Christianity. This fusion of Antichrist with Beliar "appears to have been affected on Christian soil before 50 A. D.," and is attested by 2 Thes 2:1-12. These remarks well describe the situation facing us. Indeed, two episodes are fused together, one now unfolding in our day, and the other to come at the end of the millennium.
We need not resort to Babylonian myth or obscure early Christian eschatology to show this confusion. Suffice it here to say that several revelations show rebel celestial personalities in human incarnation: Isa 14:12-20, Ezek 28:18-19, Psalm 82:6-7, and Ezek 38-39 with Rev 20:7-10. Returning to verse four we can examine the attributes of arrogant character which lead us to assign these actions to a celestial personality, not an incarnate personality. He is not an incarnate Devil in our own day, keeping in mind that the designation man is part of the fusion from two different revelations. 1. He is impious: "the one who opposes and exalts himself against every so-called god or object of worship." Here Paul is telling us that he is a rebel; he says to all the loyal spirit personalties, all those so-called gods, that he will no longer obey the laws of God. Although the translated word object does not capture the sense of divine personality, the object of worship must be only those who may be worshiped, the Father and Jesus. 2. He has a spirit of self-exaltation: "so that he sits in the sanctuary of God." That is, he takes his spirit place along with all the other celestial personalities who are loyal to God, and they must suffer his insolence. 3. He is blasphemous: proclaiming himself to be God." He pretends to be a god of superior power and might. Refer to later discussions on the AChrist@ channeled by so many people. Paul gave us precedent for the phrase so-called god in 1 Cor 8:5 where he used the same word. He meant all those loyal gods and lords of the heavenly realms. The personality of this passage opposes those gods and exalts himself above them. He ranks himself with them but thinks he is better than they. He will not accept his divinely assigned role in creation. A human mortal would not rank himself with the gods of the heavenly realms. Only a celestial personality would presume to such cosmic arrogance. We might believe that Paul made reference to pagan gods, not only from use of the word so-called, but also when he uses the phrase object of worship. For the true son and daughter of God there is only one place for our worship, the Father and the Son. Paul meant that the so-called gods were objects of worship to pagan people; again, they readily understood his reference. He was writing to people who believed in and were surrounded by pagan gods; they had been converted from those beliefs. Paul's remarks may reflect a struggle with their habit of mind which understood lesser beings of the heavenly realms as worthy of worship.
Part 4: The Seat

As a further example of how we have been falsely influenced by early Christian attitudes, (and misunderstanding), and how Christian tradition has become chained to those early attitudes, consider the translation "so that he takes his seat in the Temple of God." This phrase has a subject "he", a verb "takes," and an object "seat." The verb and the object do not exist in the Greek text. They are inferred from the form of the Greek phrase, and our view of Paul's intent. Literally, from Greek to English: ooste = so as
auton = him eis = in ton = the naon = sanctuary tou = --Theou = of God kathesai = to sit The verb "kathesai," to sit, is an aorist infinitive. An aorist verb expresses action without further limitation or implication. An infinitive is a verbal substantive, which means it is not a verb in the full sense; it is a verbal noun. The infinitive then led to the idea of a seat. Consider how the identical word "kathesai" is translated in Acts 8:31. "And he invited Philip to come up and sit with him." Again, the identical word "kathesai" is translated in Rev 3:21. "He who overcomes, I will grant him to sit with me on my throne . . ." Simply, the word means "to sit." The Greek says nothing about taking a seat. The translation of verse 4 is properly rendered as "Who opposes and exalts himself against every so-called god and object of worship, in order to sit in the sanctuary of God . . ." Now we can understand how the sanctuary and the sitting take on a different meaning. The sanctuary need not be a physical structure in a geographical location upon earth. Rather, it is a spirit center. That spirit center is the naos, the sanctuary of God. He presumes against God in order to sit there. He was cast down but does not respect his judgment. The idea of God's sanctuary carries several possible implications. 1. The sanctuary offers protection from other spirit beings. Those other beings respect the sanctuary, just as the Jew respects the inner sanctuary of the Temple, the holy of holies. This being is using this sanctuary as a means of protection, in rebellion against God, and against the laws of the universe. The sanctuary may be nothing more than God's command to "leave him be.@ 2. The sanctuary may carry a functional advantage. By sitting in it he may be able to contact the minds of human mortals more directly. He is using God's spirit environment to prosecute his wicked purpose. He is a rebel; he has no respect for holiness. 3. "Sanctuary" may be used metaphorically, as often in the New Testament. Although he was "cast down" he presumes to his former status, equal to that of loyal beings. 4. Or, he pretends to a status equal to loyal beings, that human mortals may believe he operates from the same holy estate.
From that sanctuary he openly blasphemes against God. He proclaims himself to be God. We must get a tight grip on our attitudes. We must recognize that all loyal divine beings know he is not God. Only susceptible human mortals are not able to discriminate. His proclamation as God therefore can only be to foolhardy human kind. If this personality is divine, and not human, the proclamation as God now takes on more sense. We need not postulate a human scenario to interpret the passage. He is not now a deluded human mortal; he is a spirit being who is trying to delude mankind. Perhaps he is trying to reclaim the respect he possessed as our former planetary ruler, our planetary god, but which he lost when he rebelled. Held up against the reality of Creation his actions are truly insane. His pretense that he is God makes human beings susceptible to belief that he is God. Through this mechanism he will lead to the mass slaughter about to burgeon forth on our world. In a preceding chapter I quoted a statement made by this rebel personality to Mark Farley. There he pretended to be Michael, as God. Current spiritist communications, now rampant around this planet, are rife with these pretenses and impersonations as God. A good example is the "Christ" of A Course in Miracles. Little did we recognize how this prediction by Paul would be fulfilled. Our mythological images prevent us, even now, at the last hour, from understanding the deadly transactions being prosecuted before our very eyes, by neighbors, friends and relatives. The current development of spiritist groups in all corners of the land is the practical fulfillment of Paul's prediction. This rebel does not appear as some mystical figure, taking his seat in some mythical temple, shouting to the world that he is God. He appears in the minds of human mortals proclaiming that he is God. And they believe him.
Part 5: The Restraint

Return now to verses six-eight. These may be the most cryptic in the Bible, simply because Paul refers to conversations he had with the Thessalonians in which he provided details and a context, but which he does not relay to us. The Thessalonians may have known what was restraining or withholding "him"; we do not. Speculation has soared around this passage. Many and diverse suggestions have been proffered for the identity of the lawless one, who or what is restraining him, when he will be revealed, and the context of the actions. Much of that speculation uses political scenarios, either of early Christian days, or others down through the centuries. Some interpreters believe it was Nero who was doing the restraining; others suggest other Roman emperors. Persons in later centuries suggested a Pope, or political leaders, or national dictators, and so on. All are in error. The context is religious, not political. These are divine transactions; not human earthly activities. The context is heavenly; the environment is not geophysical, political, or commercial. These are cosmic transactions. Through heavenly processes unknown to us, God held the Devil in check. God limited his ability to function. God placed restraints upon him. Now those restraints have been removed. The statement"He who restrains him will do so until he comes out of the midst" is so confusing because Paul was limited in his vocabulary. The "midst" may be the sanctuary. Or it may be a spirit environment not discernible to human kind. Or it may be a spirit restraint which God has now lifted.
The mystery of lawlessness is the permission by God that the Devil remain on this world to prosecute his evil designs. We do not have a clear perception why God would allow this; hence it is a mystery. As Jesus stated, it was not his wish that this rebel remain, but he would do the will of the Father. When Paul said the mystery of lawlessness was already at work he meant the methods employed by this rebel to destroy the world. Prior to the present release those methods were of two kinds: a) the antagonistic and deceptive spiritual environment the Devil created, the one spoken of by the apostles and Christians down through the centuries, and b) phenomena displayed under the general designation of spiritualism. We were immune to the environmental influence as long as we remained righteous, as long as our hearts were centered to God. But when the world became godless we opened the way to an ever more powerful influence which now pervades our current social order. We became increasingly subject to his sly suggestions. Furthermore, spiritualism was limited in cultural power, although it was pursued increasingly at many levels during the past 150 years. For example, Mary Todd Lincoln, the wife of Abraham Lincoln, sought out spiritualist phenomena, as did many reputable scientists. The coming of the lawless one is the same word as used for the coming of Jesus. The Greek perousia means "a presence." His coming will be according to his celestial status, in power, with many signs and lying wonders. The demonstration of his power will reach beyond any traditional view, far beyond the current conceptual range of Jew or Christian. About to unfold upon this planet is an episode that escapes the most erudite religious theoretician, the most sophisticated theologian, the most perceptive Rabbi, and the most adamant fundamentalist Preacher. In order to demonstrate how this release is understood by this rebel Prince, I quote statements he made to a spiritist group in Woods Cross, Utah. He made these remarks through the mind of Jan Messenger, a member of that group. You are a small minority. Most would never accept or understand these transactions. Yet, they will change within. Our goal, mission is twofold. It consists, firstly, in transforming the individuals, individuals involved in, with these communications. Secondly, it consists of spreading, sharing, maintaining the spiritual progress momentum of the masses. This general spiritual level has not necessarily improved for many years, and now the time has come to correct this and begin to enlarge the spiritual capacity and receptivity of mankind in general. This is occurring due to spiritual forces of a more generalized nature. The Supreme Being is acting in an overall patterned manner about this area in time space. . . . Therefore, this generalized spiritual force creates pressure upon humankind which humankind reacts to and will help to create the atmosphere or prepare the way for the reception, receiving of these teachings. And furthermore, all these forces will gently and carefully reveal God's love to humankind, but not only this fellow sharing and revealing love
of God is the most supreme form of pleasure. This preparation will better your planet in many areas of life, in environment, in technology, in social culture and political structure. These refinements will gradually lead this world step-by-step towards light and life. Is this understood? . . . The gravity of the Son, the Eternal Son that is, has tremendous power and weight. Your spiritual sensitivity and capacity for receptivity will increase noticeably. His drawing power is unmistakable to the spirit, to the soul, which will increasingly respond to this feeling. Communication such as this will increase worldwide spread. Many people will respond. These statements are full of portent, but the human beings of today to whom they were given did not recognize the significance. Yet they will change within His human agents have now been conditioned to his presence and to his power, but not that they are consciously aware. Thus he is transforming the individuals involved in his spirit transformations spreading, sharing, maintaining the spiritual progress momentum of the masses By this he means his increasing influence upon the general mass of mankind through recruitment into his direct mental communication, which he styles as "A progress momentum." This general spiritual level has not necessarily improved for many years, and now the time has come to correct this and begin to enlarge the spiritual capacity and receptivity of mankind in general. By many years he means the many millennia of ages gone by, when he did not have such power. Now he has been released to such power. This is occurring due to spiritual forces of a more generalized nature. The Supreme Being is acting in an overall patterned manner about this area in time space. Here he explicitly states that God has opened the gates for him to exercise unprecedented power, now on this world. . . . Therefore, this generalized spiritual force creates pressure upon humankind which humankind reacts to and will help to create the atmosphere or prepare the way for the reception, receiving of these teachings. Now, unless men and woman are extremely careful, they may fall into the persuasive power of this rebel. God has opened the spiritual gates. And furthermore, all these forces will gently and carefully reveal God's love to humankind, but not only this fellow sharing and revealing love of God is the most supreme form of pleasure. This is his great deception. He has conditioned his human agents to believe that he brings a renovated mankind, and that all is done out of love. He then propose to them where this will lead. But all in deception.
This preparation will better your planet in many areas of life, in environment, in technology, in social culture and political structure. These refinements will gradually lead this world step-by-step towards light and life. Is this understood? He then goes on, justifying the manner in which his power is now being exercised in their minds. . . . The gravity of the Son, the Eternal Son that is, has tremendous power and weight. Your spiritual sensitivity and capacity for receptivity will increase noticeably. His drawing power is unmistakable to the spirit, to the soul, which will increasingly respond to this feeling. Communication such as this will increase worldwide spread. Many people will respond. With due regard to the caution that his purpose is to deceive, this statement probably well captures the nature of the spiritual transactions transpiring on our world today. He is not afraid to discuss these elements because he needs justification for those individuals who are now following him. They may wonder how this is now coming about, why the exact form of this phenomena was not known in prior historical times. The reason is simple; a spiritual release has now come. Since this view of new spiritual transactions is totally outside the purview of Jews and Christians, not included in their theologies or popular notions of God's control of this planet, it could not have come out of the unconscious mind of Jan Messenger. These concepts are foreign to any historical view and could not have human origin. My purpose is not to provide justification for the authenticity of these remarks. Each of us must decide for ourselves the validity of the information being given to us, whether from holy and righteous sources, or from the vile Prince. We should remember that he mixes truth with lies. Everything he says is not false; otherwise foolish human kind would quickly see through him. The power of his appeal is in his judicious mixing of false concepts with truthful statements. And even his false concepts are centered in the wishful thinking of man. He uses their weaknesses to appeal to them. He is very devious. Our world is about to enter a spiritual judgment, the likes of which have never before taken place in God's creation. And we human mortals now living will respond according to our individual relationships with God. Whether we want to or not, we are participants in a unique cosmic episode. I shall now go on to other historic revelations concerning these events.
Unclean Spirits
Mark 16: (14-15) "And they excused themselves, saying that this age of lawlessness and unbelief is under Satan, who, through the agency of unclean spirits, does not allow the true power of God to be apprehended. Wherefore, they said to Christ, 'reveal now Thy righteousness.' And Christ said to them, 'The limit of the years of Satan's authority has been fulfilled, but other terrors draw near, and I am delivered up of death on behalf of those that have sinned, that they may be turned to the truth and sin no more, so that they may inherit the spiritual and incorruptible glory of righteousness in heaven.'"
You will not find this text in your Bible. It is not published in any modern edition. Three reasons exist. First, the text does not appear in many of the most ancient manuscripts; it appears in later manuscripts. Second, the character of the writing appears expository, a later Christian commentary, not as something that was part of Mark=s original gospel. Third, the passage is highly disturbing; it makes specific assignment of the activities of the Devil, and that assignment is in the sordid practices of spiritualism or spiritism, through the agency of unclean spirits. This brief passage, located between verses 16:14 and 16:15, is only part of the textual problems found at the end of the Gospel of Mark. Various versions occur in different ancient manuscripts. These are summarized in most editions of RSV. The New Oxford Annotated (RSV) Bible, 1973, adds the remark that ". . . a few authorities insert additional material after verse 14," but does not quote the text. This text is quoted in the International Critical Commentary under the section dealing with John 16:11. It also appears in the exhaustive critical edition of The Greek New Testament by Kurt Aland, Matthew Black, Carlo Martini, Bruce Metzgar, and Allen Wikgren, published by the United Bible Societies, 1968. The commentator in ICC goes on to remark that: "The impending 'terrors' may be the persecutions foretold in John 16:2-3." Indeed, that is exactly what is going on. This text carries multiple portent. 1. The Prince of this World acts through the agency of "unclean spirits." Or, stated otherwise, through "seducing spirits." See 1 Tim 4:1. That is the only mechanism available to him. The spirits are unclean because they invade the sacredness of human mind. The spirits are seducing because they betray man. 2. Through this agency the true power of God cannot be apprehended. The agency of "unclean spirits" camouflages a true relationship with God. This God effectively diverts his believers to false directions. 3. The persecutions he will bring through the agency of "unclean spirits" are recognized for their terror content. Although he may have brought terror to previous world regimes, greater horrors draw near. All residents of this planet will experience a true spiritual judgment. This small section, and its history deduced from surviving manuscripts, added some time after the first century, demonstrates that knowledge, discussion, and considerable interest in Jesus' prediction was current in early Christian days; it was part of the body of early Christian thought. As the centuries passed the significance of Jesus' remarks became diluted, while practical belief of Devil's work faded under increasing skepticism. The Devil gained ever tighter grip on the attitudes of men.
As we approached this century the validity of those remarks were increasingly discounted. Those fundamentalist groups who continued to believe in the Devil were buried beneath the debris of mythology and mysticism. Hence, the fearful tone and apprehensive nature of the Mark appended text caused it to be excluded from modern editions. Godless generations discount the reality of spirit personalities; they do not believe the Devil would have such power. This suppression is an excellent indicator of how this Prince has blinded the minds of recent generations. What is meant by unclean spirits? In many cases in the New Testament it meant demonic possession, the actual seizure of certain human mortals by rebel spirits. See Mark 1:23f, 3:11, 7:25, Luke 9:42, Acts 8:7, and so on. In some cases the context is uncertain; it could mean spirits who do not actually possess human mortals, but merely communicate with them in their minds. See Mark 6:7, Luke 6:18, Acts 5:16, and so on. Notably, references to unclean spirits do not appear in John's gospel. The fact of demonic possession is well attested in the record prior to Jesus' resurrection. It is not well attested after his resurrection. The ancient Druids, the priesthood of the Celtic people, upon hearing reports of Jesus' resurrection, recognized that all demonic spirits had been removed from the planet at that time. If demonic possession existed yet today it would be far more prevalent. Recent cases which have received great notoriety can be explained through emotional or mental illness. Or, in some rare cases, certain human mortals have submitted their minds and bodies to actual Devil possession. If this evidence is indicative of the current planetary regime it would mean that spirits capable of involuntary demonic possession are no longer with us; all spiritist activities today originate with the fallen Prince. Beyond this cursory comment I shall defer other discussion to later chapters. Here I wish to focus on the fallen Prince. Given these brief remarks about spirit communication through human mind the curious passage in Matt 12 now takes on striking meaning. Matt 12:38-45 Then some of the scribes and Pharisees said to him, "Teacher, we wish to see a sign from you." But he answered them, "An evil and adulterous generation seeks for a sign; but no sign shall be given to it except the sign of the prophet Jonah. For as Jonah was three days and three nights in the belly of the whale, so will the Son of man be three days and three nights in the heart of the earth. The men of Nineveh will arise at the judgment with this generation and condemn it; for they repented at the preaching of Jonah, and behold, something greater than Jonah is here. The queen of the South will arise at the judgment with this generation and condemn it; for she came from the ends of the earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon, and behold, something greater than Solomon is here. When the unclean spirit has gone out of a man, he passes through waterless places seeking rest, but he finds none. Then he says, Ì will return to my house from which I came.' And when he comes he finds it empty, swept, and put in order. Then he goes and brings with him seven other spirits more evil than himself, and they enter and dwell there; and the last state of that man becomes worse than the first. So shall it be also with this evil generation."
I shall not engage in discussion of the textual problems of this passage. Regardless of the integrity of this text it shows the stern attitude of Jesus. Those spiritual events which are about to come down upon us are far more significant than what Jonah witnessed. They are far more weighty than what Solomon gave us. This is judgment, planetary judgment, great and incisive judgment, far more than the men of Nineveh saw, and far more than the Queen of Sheba saw. Do you want a sign? You will not get one. Do you want someone or something to reassure you or give you "proof." You will not get it. Those sleeping in the dust of the earth will arise at this judgment and they will condemn this unbelieving and adulterous generation. Something greater than Jonah is going on here. Something greater than Solomon is going on here. When the fallen Prince departs from the mind of a man and returns to find it empty, swept, and put in order he returns with even greater vengeance to perform his nefarious purpose. The state of that man becomes worse then when he first started seeking the spirits. So shall it be with this perverse and evil generation. They wanted spirit communications; they shall receive thunderbolts which will take them into light, into bliss, and into death. But not before his deadly work is done.
~50~
CHAPTER FIVE The Wrath of the Prince

There is a Great Babylon, the Great Harlot, who will lead the nations in rampant slaughter of Gods people. Rev 17:6 And I saw the woman, drunk with the blood of the consecrated ones and the blood of the witnesses of Jesus. When I saw her I marveled greatly. This woman is mother of the abominations of the earth. The abominations are those which bring total desolation: nuclear weapons. Within her land the blood of the witnesses of Jesus will flow. She will become drunk with a great bloodlust. The word normally translated saints in the Bible versions is Greek agios. It means separated from common tradition and use, thus dedicated or consecrated. The common understanding of the New Testament writers was of dedication or consecration to God, following pagan Greek use of the word for dedication to the gods. As stated in Vines Expository Dictionary, As used of believers, it designates all such and is not applied merely to persons of exceptional holiness . . . In 2 Thes 1:10 His saints are described simply as them that believed. The word saints is from Latin sanctus, with the same original significance of consecration as the Greek agios. The idea of holiness is derived from later great respect for early Christian leaders, but that was not the original meaning of either the Greek or the Roman words. No human mortal can be truly pure and holy before God. The word translated as martyrs is from Greek marturon. The root is martus. The word had an original meaning as judicial witness, one who can be deposed, or testify to evidence in a legal matter, of what he has seen or heard, a declaration of facts. Because of early Christian persecutions, the word was applied to those who testified and witnessed for Jesus under social repression. Hence the modern usage as martyr. Those who testify and witness today in Great Babylon will be martyrs beyond any previous historical example. Great Babylon will receive her judgment, Isa 47. In her heart she says, Look at me! See how great I am! There is none like me. I shall not sit as a widow, and as one without children. She felt secure in her wickedness. She said, No one sees me. But she shall sit in the dust. Her nakedness will be revealed; her shame will be seen. She shall sit in silence and go into darkness. Evil will come upon her, for which she cannot atone. Disaster will fall upon her which she will not be able
5- The Wrath of the Prince
~51~
to expatiate. Ruin will come upon her suddenly, of which she knows nothing. She should stand fast in her enchantments, her consulting of the spirits, in her many sorceries, and in her reliance on evil fallen Princes. Now her judgment will come. Isa 47:14 Behold, they are like stubble, the fire consumes them; they cannot deliver themselves from the power of the flame. No coal for warming oneself is this, no fire to sit before!
His Wrath
Rev 12:12-17 Rejoice then, O heaven and you that dwell therein! But woe to you, O earth and sea, for the Devil has come down to you in great wrath, because he knows that his time is short! And when the dragon saw that he had been thrown down to the earth, he pursued the woman who had borne the male child. But the woman was given the two wings of the great eagle that she might fly from the serpent into the wilderness, to the place where she is to be nourished for a time, and times, and half a time. The serpent poured water like a river out of his mouth after the woman, to sweep her away with the flood. But the earth came to the help of the woman, and the earth opened its mouth and swallowed the river which the dragon had poured from his mouth. Then the dragon was angry with the woman, and went off to make war on the rest of her offspring, on those who keep the commandments of God and bear testimony to Jesus. Who is this mysterious worman? She represents God=s people, those who remained true during the Great Tribulation. God has a salvation program for his people, a physical salvation since the woman takes steps for her physical safety. While the text may be corrupt, the revelation is sufficient for God=s people to recognize the decisions they must take in the salvation of this world. We face major difficulties because John used several terms: Devil, Satan, serpent, dragon, and beast in his Revelation. From these discussions it is clear that the term Devil means a spirit personality resident on this planet, another word for the fallen Prince. But we have serious difficulties with the other designations. Whether Satan is the Devil or some other celestial personality, whether the dragon is symbolic for a host of rebel beings, or if the beast is a physical agency, we do not know. We can only speculate. The usual lazy habit is to lump them all together into one grand personality and thus avoid the troubling confusion we find in the Bible. We would make no more childish error than to shrink a vast creation down to one small and lonely planet, reduce rebel celestial beings to one Devil, or identify the mighty heavenly host as a group of effeminate angels.
~52~
Many elements demand attention, beyond the scope of this presentation. I will limit my remarks to certain elements of the revelation. Suppose the Great Eagle represents the wilderness of North America, and that the woman who bore the child represents all those people of spiritual Israel who built this new land, Afor a time, times, and half a time.@ Such interpretation would not be more speculative than the wild speculations that have centered on this passage. Regardless of the context in which the references occur, the pouring out of a flood to drown the woman is more easily identified. The spiritists today, whether they call themselves mediums, or channelers, or transmitters/receivers, are pouring out a literal flood of revelations from that rebel. His productions fill the shelves of the New Age book stores. Dozens upon dozens of publishing organizations exist for the production of those revelations. Instruction books exist to help the fool who would open his mind to the Devil. How will the earth swallow this flood of Devil words? Major and dramatic physical changes will take place in the planet to remove those Devil productions, once and for all. But not before he performs his death program. And not before Gods people are forced to major life and death decisions. For references, see The Truth That Goes Unclaimed, Jean K. Foster, Uni*Sun, Kansas City, MO, 1987, as an example. Opening to Channel, How to Connect With Your Guide, Sanaya Roman and Duane Packer, H. J. Kramer, Inc., Tiburon, CA, 1987, is another example.
The Beast
Rev 13:4-10 Men worshiped the dragon, for he had given his authority to the beast, and they worshiped the beast, saying, Who is like the beast, and who can fight against it? And the beast was given a mouth uttering haughty and blasphemous words, and it was allowed to exercise authority for forty-two months; it opened its mouth to utter blasphemies against God, blaspheming his name and his dwelling, that is, those who dwell in heaven. Also it was allowed to make war on the saints and to conquer them. And authority was given it over every tribe and people and tongue and nation, and all who dwell on earth will worship it, every one whose name has not been written before the foundation of the world in the book of life of the Lamb that was slain. If any one has an ear, let him hear: If any one is to be taken captive, to captivity he goes; if any one slays with the sword, with the sword must he be slain. Here is a call for the endurance and faith of the saints. This section is most relevant to our decisions today.
5- The Wrath of the Prince
~53~
Do you want to hear haughty and blasphemous words? Read the spiritist productions. His mouth is all those spiritists who believe he is God coming into their minds. Sometimes his words are explicit, but the fools do not recognize his remarks for their literal exactness. The following came from channeled materials of Jean Foster. There is a wonderful entity who is elder in his age, as it were, that I send to you who will help you. The entity is quite a master though he would never admit it, and he will give you the wisdom without seeing you for the beautiful woman you are, but seeing you for the God that needs understanding and will help you. We will open the doors to let you express. We can see the madness of his haughty pride when he refers to himself as a wonderful entity. Elder in age, as it were, indeed. Very elder. Hundreds of thousands of years elder. And the fools do not understand. He not only will come to help; he is already helping with his utmost might. Is he a master? Oh, ever so much, and never admits it to his gullible agents. He will provide the wisdom this human God needs to accomplish his purpose. How truly he will open the doors to let them express in ways they do not even imagine or suspect. Your Christ figure represents, symbolically, your idea of God and his relationships. There were three separate individuals whose history is blended, and they became collectively known as Christ . . . The events as they are recorded, however, did not occur in history. The crucifixion of Christ was a psychic, but not a physical event. . . . The three Christ personalities were born upon your planet, and indeed became flesh among you. None of these were crucified . . . Blasphemous words, indeed. Thousands upon thousands of such vile pronouncements flood our world today. They are haughty in their profanity against God, against heaven, and against the heavenly host. This beast will make war on Gods dedicated people, to kill them, and to remove them from the face of the earth. Wonders shall spring forth from this maniacal being, so as to deceive the very elect. Large portions of mankind will follow him, and worship him. Matt 24:23-27 C Then if any one says to you, Lo, here is the Christ! or There he is! do not believe it. For false Christs and false prophets will arise and show great signs and wonders, so as to lead astray, if possible, even the elect. Lo, I have told you beforehand. So, if they say to you, Lo, he is in the wilderness, do not go out; if they say, Lo, he is in the inner rooms,
~54~

do not believe it. For as the lightning comes from the east and shines as far as the west, so will be the coming of the Son of man.
We need not worry about the coming of Jesus. When He comes there will be no doubt. But he will not come to rescue us from Tribulation. He will come as Judge of this World. Meanwhile this defamer, this blasphemer, this deceiver, comes, pretending to be Christ. Don=t go after him. He truly will bring open warfare on Gods people, all those who commit themselves to their Creator in this most extreme of all world conditions. He especially will focus his slaughter on those dedicated individuals, the saints, who dare bring revelations to their fellow man. The authority this being possesses over every tribe, and people, and nation, and tongue is not political. If he controls the minds of vast masses he need not gain direct bureaucratic control. On the other hand, if he controls individuals in high political positions, either through philosophical persuasion, or directly through mind manipulation, he could control the direction of political events. We cannot rule out the coming nuclear devastation as the result of his direct control of human mortals. Those who kill with the sword shall die with the sword. This truly is a call for the endurance and faith of Gods dedicated people.
6 - The Judy Tuttle Message
~55~
CHAPTER SIX The Judy Tuttle Message

Strangely, many individuals today receive spiritual messages which are not from the rebel Prince. They are private revelations, intended to reassure individuals as they face the great deception of our time. Judy Tuttle was one of those. Judy posted an Internet message to me and a few others which I ignored for nearly eighteen months, not out of some disbelief, but because I simply did not recognize the relevance of that which she had been given. Later I puzzled over the fact of my delay in coming to recognition of that important revelation. This is the message Judy was given, as she reposted it to nudge my attention. Congregavit nos in unum Christi amor. Date: Sat, 14 Nov 1998 11:49 FWIW, I found the original message dated Sunday, June 29, 1997. Looking at it now, the time frame seems out of whack. But, what do I know. I awakened at 4:44 A.M. from what seemed to be a restful sleep. All of a sudden I experienced gripping pains in my chest and thought I possibly was having a heart attack. I lay there wondering if I should call the paramedics or just wait and see. I didnt want to be embarrassed if it was a false alarm, yet waiting too long would render me incapable of calling. I opted to wait. The pain subsided, yet I was left in a state of extreme agitation, pacing back in forth like a caged animal. I decided to go outside and then kept pacing some more. Finally, a message came to me after which I experienced a serene calm and tranquility. If you recall, I have been given the one quote twice, now. For FWIW, here it is: The veil has been torn aside. It is no longer the advent of the Antichrist. He is here, now, amongst you, sitting gleefully upon his throne. It is time for the Sons of God to come together. This period will be very intense , but short, ending in the year 2000. You will witness *evil* the
~56~
likes of which your mind could never possibly conceive. It is not necessary to make physical preparation. You will be surrounded by a cloak of spiritual tranquility and love. Fear not! This has been your purpose. You have our love and protection. We will foster and conserve the higher spiritual types. Congregavit nos in unum Christi amor. P.S. I have proceeded to make physical preparation, providing me with what is perhaps a false sense of control over my life. (My note: FWIW means AFor What Its Worth.@) I shall now discuss the elements of this private revelation which are important to our understanding.
The Veil has been torn aside.

The veil is that lack of perception in which God held his people for 2,000 years. It was necessary to unfolding planetary destiny that man not jeopardize Gods plan. Therefore, although he made these events known to us in various revelations, he did not make them discernible to us. Only within the past few years has revelation been opened to us. Personally, I did not begin to understand these episodes until around 1990. Although I was aware of the dangers of the Devil from my fundamentalist Christian childhood, until then I did not perceive how he would come into power. The several revelations in the Bible were an uncoordinated mixture of elements which I could not properly put together. Then it began to slowly dawn on me how this was going to unfold. Members of a local religious group in the Baltimore-Washington area watched my awareness develop and eventually concluded I had been carried away with my intensity. Persons such as Preston Thomas, Stevie Shafer, Buddy Roogow, Ellen Walker and others can testify to this personal development. Hence, I can witness to the manner in which the veil has been torn aside. The key is captured in one simple phrase, Spirit Entry Into Human Mind. Until I had clarified this concept I do not believe another human mortal had grasped the consequence of such spiritual transactions. Two thousand years of Christianity failed to understand the mechanism by which the Devil can wreak his havoc. This means that although the apostles may have discussed these matters in their various epistles and letters, they did not offer understanding to the generations. God kept understanding from us.
~57~
Numerous varied and assorted interpretations of the biblical material were offered over the centuries. Christians still struggle, assigning the revelation episodes to a malevolent personality who takes on mortal form, who sits on a throne in the Temple bringing world dictatorship, who uses the number 666 for his identification, and so on, and so on. Most conspiracy theories are woven around such concept, including the use of the United Nations to rule the world. These interpretations are all political in that they assume this evil personality will take up an earthly throne, and assume world political, as well as evil spiritual rule. The coming terror will not be political. It will be spiritual. Before continuing discussion I should point out some of the elements which affect our assessments. As far as we can determine, the coming persecutions will take place under a functional social environment. The social circumstances will not deteriorate to rampant police or military slaughter. The slaughter will come from Devil=s agents, operating under his spirit control. Society continues, and most citizens learn to deal with the extreme circumstances. How these operations will take place within a functional society is unknown to me. Why would society tolerate such activities? Does a new-age President also become part of that cadre, issuing decrees which permit them to go about their deadly work? I do not know. These details are unrevealed. We also do not know if economic circumstances may deteriorate to the point that dictatorial imposition will be necessary by national governments to maintain social order. Such imposition is suggested by Johns Revelation, Chapter 13, and the description of a small beast with gentle appearance but which wields great power. The corrupt description suggests an image of computers. The number 666 already is used universally as the UPC, the Universal Product Code, and we all are subject to that computer tool when we buy and sell. The other feature of computer social control is the Social Security, or Coded Card identification now used well nigh universally around the world to coordinate and centralize information for governments and institutions. We cannot buy or sell without such number. Other than this short piece in Johns Revelation we have no evidence for dictatorial social control. John may not have intended more than to describe the secular and godless economic and government control through computers under which we all now operate, even though his images carry sinister portent.
It is no longer the advent of the Antichrist. He is here, now, amongst you, sitting gleefully upon his throne.
~58~
He has now been released to do his deadly diabolical work. The throne is his position in God=s sanctuary, providing him with the power to prosecute his nefarious designs. While the word Agleefully@ may not capture the sentiments of this wicked being he certainly takes advantage of the position our Creator has now afforded him. Use of the word antichrist takes advantage of the image of someone opposed to our Creator. Although the Antichrist will not truly come until the end of the millennium, the same personality now parades in open contempt of creation.
It is time for the Sons of God to come together.

The reference is not to Divine Sons of God, but to mortal Sons of God, those sons and daughters of God who are willing to give their lives in service to their fellow mortals. 1Thes 5:2-5 C For you yourselves know well that the day of the Lord will come like a thief in the night. When people say, There is peace and security, then sudden destruction will come upon them as travail comes upon a woman with child, and there will be no escape. But you are not in darkness, brethren, for that day to surprise you like a thief. For you are all sons of light and sons of the day; we are not of the night or of darkness.
This period will be very intense , but short, ending in the year 2000.
As I pointed out to Judy in our late 1998 correspondence, this time frame is not realistic. Some short period of time is demanded, perhaps two years, and since we are now in the year 2000 it cannot end before 2002. Why she was given this date in uncertain. Perhaps it was done to bring more alert attention by those who would carefully study Judy=s message, but if so, it singularly failed. Few paid attention to the message.
You will witness *evil* the likes of which your mind could never possibly conceive.
None of us today are prepared for the terror which is about to come down upon us. We simply cannot conceive that horror. We can only wait, as God permits the unfolding, and then respond according to our hearts.
~59~
It is not necessary to make physical preparation. You will be surrounded by a cloak of spiritual tranquility and love. Fear not!
We don=t know how to prepare physically. There is nothing we can do. Judy showed her desire to somehow prepare, but such efforts are fruitless.
~60~
CHAPTER SEVEN Demons

We cannot obtain an understanding of the spiritual processes unfolding today unless we come to recognition of the mechanisms by which the Devil will prosecute his terror. He will do it by operating through the human mind. He will persuade, and control, human mind to do his bidding. In order to properly understand these mechanism I shall use the next few chapters to discuss the elements which enter into this power. However, to properly do so, I must resort to other Revelations. I must use the most efficient means at my disposal to show the nature of these transactions. I shall examine biblical teachings on demons and their entry into the human mind. I shall also examine passages from The Urantia Papers which help our understanding of these crucially important spiritual matters. We must carefully distinguish between the two levels of brain and mind. Human brain is not human mind. The brain is an organism, a material vehicle which permits the operation of the mind. The brain comes with birth; it is genetic. The mind is a gift from God imposed upon the brain, and using the brain as the vehicle of its expression. (In following discussions page numbers refer to The Urantia Papers, unless other wise indicated.) P.564 - Mind is the bestowal of the Infinite Spirit and functions quite the same in diverse environments. P.670 - The physiologic equipment and the anatomic structure of all new orders of life are in response to the action of physical law, but the subsequent endowment of mind is a bestowal of the adjutant mind-spirits in accordance with innate brain capacity. Mind, while not a physical evolution, is wholly dependent on the brain capacity afforded by purely physical and evolutionary developments. When the demons of old possessed human beings they did so through the brain, through the physical organism.
P.863 - This was accomplished in much the same way as the loyal midway creatures function when they serve as efficient contact guardians of the human minds of the Urantia reserve corps of destiny at
7- Demons
~61~
those times when the Adjuster is, in effect, detached from the personality during a season of contact with superhuman intelligences. However, we should understand that when demoniacal spirits possessed human brain they also controlled the mind, since the mind is resident in the brain. But their entry into the brain was not via the mind. P.863 - On no world can evil spirits possess any mortal mind subsequent to the life of a Paradise bestowal Son. But before the days of Christ Michael on Urantia C before the universal coming of the Thought Adjusters and the pouring out of the Masters spirit upon all flesh C these rebel midwayers were actually able to influence the minds of certain inferior mortals and somewhat to control their actions. When the Devil enters today he enters the mind, at the mind level, and not through the brain. Thus there is a crucial difference between demonic possession, and Spirit entry into mind. The first was by involuntary control of the brain; the second is by voluntary invitation of the Spirit into the mind by conscious free-will decision. The first was eliminated when Jesus imprisoned all the rebel demons at the time of Pentecost. The second still operates through God=s permission. P.864 - The entire group of rebel midwayers is at present held prisoner by order of the Most Highs of Edentia. No more do they roam this world on mischief bent. Regardless of the presence of the Thought Adjusters, the pouring out of the Spirit of Truth upon all flesh forever made it impossible for disloyal spirits of any sort or description ever again to invade even the most feeble of human minds. Since the day of Pentecost there never again can be such a thing as demoniacal possession. But this removal of demoniacal possession did not alter the dangers of diabolical possession. The Devil still functions, and can come into human mind if invited to do so. P.863 - It is no mere figure of speech when the record states: And they brought to Him all sorts of sick people, those who were possessed by devils and those who were lunatics. Jesus knew and recognized the difference between insanity and demoniacal possession, although these states were greatly confused in the minds of those who lived in his day and generation. The biblical reference is to Matt 8:16.
~62~

P.863 - Even prior to Pentecost no rebel spirit could dominate a normal human mind, and since that day even the weak minds of inferior mortals are free from such possibilities. The supposed casting out of devils since the arrival of the Spirit of Truth has been a matter of confounding a belief in demoniacal possession with hysteria, insanity, and feeble-mindedness. But just because Michaels bestowal has forever liberated all human minds on Urantia from the possibility of demoniacal possession, do not imagine that such was not a reality in former ages.
To better understand the processes of spirit entry into human mind we should heed the fact that higher Spirit entities can directly enter human mind. Whether they do so or not depends upon our spiritual status and relationship with God, and their function in universe affairs. I shall first illustrate with the Spirit of the Father.
THE SPIRIT OF THE FATHER

Consider statements by the New Testament writers. Rom 8:11 - If the Spirit of him who raised Jesus from the dead dwells in you, he who raised Christ Jesus from the dead will give life to your mortal bodies also through his Spirit which dwells in you. The one who raised Jesus from the dead was the Father. His Spirit dwells in us. Is this the Holy Spirit, recognized as a separate personality, a person of the Trinity, whom the Father sends? Or is this a spirit unique to the Father, his Spirit? Few Christians have made this distinction because spirit entities and beings are lumped together indistinguishably. 1 Cor 3:16 - Do you not know that you are Gods sanctuary and that Gods Spirit dwells in you? Pauls remark shows that God, the Father, has a distinct Spirit which actually dwells within us. It is not a force that imposes a spirit attitude or feeling upon us, nor merely a spiritual influence. It is a spirit entity, a gift portion from the Father. He comes to live with us, and be with us. He actually dwells within us. 1 Cor 6:19 - Do you not know that your body is a sanctuary of the Holy Spirit within you, which you have from God? You are not your own. This verse illustrates the confusion in our historic record. Here we could believe that the Holy Spirit, with personality distinct from the Father, but ultimately originating within the Father, comes to dwell within us.
7- Demons
~63~
I do not wish to engage in debate of this possible difference, something we can never ultimately prove or disprove. Here I wish to develop thoughts which can lead us into better understanding of the actual entry of spirit entities into human brain and mind. If the Spirit of the Father actually dwells within us does he dwell in our kidneys, liver, stomach or physical heart? 1 Cor 6:19 states that he dwells within our bodies. Paul did not intend that the Spirit dwells within the physical mechanism. He meant that Gods Spirit dwells within our minds. He lives where we have cognitive ability. This is really where the heart is, but heart means purpose and will according to Gods purpose and will. It means a desire to know more of what God wants of us. It means a love for God. God=s gift provides for us to become devout men and women centered around that Spirit which dwells within us. Did God ask our permission to come into us? Would he ask an immature and primitive creature? His Spirit is a free gift, bestowed upon us for the mere fact that we exist, that he created us. That is his way of drawing near to the lowly material beings of time and space. The Father is not a respecter of persons. Acts 10:34-35 - Then Peter opened his mouth, and said, Of a truth I perceive that God is no respecter of persons but in every nation he that fears him, and works righteousness, is accepted by him. Would God deny us his spirit merely because we are less intelligent than another person? Or that we were born into one family and not another? Or that we are of a different race? Therefore, we can conclude that he invaded us; he did not ask our permission. He came in without us knowing it. He did not invade to take advantage of us, but that he might help in our earthly struggles. If he speaks to us, and we obey, we draw closer to him and to his purpose. He does not violate our will, nor our thoughts. He is resident quiescently, fully compliant to our choices. His gift of life includes the privilege to do our own choosing. He respects our choices because his Spirit is a gift. And then, when we become more fully attuned to his presence, as we learn to adjust our thoughts to his thoughts, we begin to develop a closer relationship with God. P.24 - Those who know God have experienced the fact of his presence; such God-knowing mortals hold in their personal experience the only positive proof of the existence of the living God which one human being can offer to another. The existence of God is utterly beyond all possibility of demonstration except for the contact between the God-consciousness of the human mind and the God-presence of the Thought Adjuster that indwells the mortal intellect and is bestowed upon man as the free gift of the Universal Father.
~64~

P.1193 - The Mystery Monitors are undoubtedly the bestowal of the Universal Father, the reflection of the image of God abroad in the universe. A great teacher once admonished men that they should be renewed in the spirit of their minds; that they become new men who, like God, are created in righteousness and in the completion of truth. The Adjuster is the mark of divinity, the presence of God. The image of God does not refer to physical likeness nor to the circumscribed limitations of material creature endowment but rather to the gift of the spirit presence of the Universal Father in the supernal bestowal of the Thought Adjusters upon the humble creatures of the universes.
The great teacher, of course, was Paul and his statement is in Ephesians 4:23. 1 Jn 3:24 - All who keep his commandments abide in him, and he in them. And by this we know that he abides in us, by the Spirit which he has given us. When we keep God=s commandments we bring our hearts and our minds in line with his will and his purpose. We want to do what God wants. It is our will to do his will. If we have this purpose he works with us to bring our thinking around to his thinking. We can oppose or we can attune. That is our choice. Eph 3:14-17 - For this reason I bow my knees before the Father, from whom every family in heaven and on earth is named, that according to the riches of his glory he may grant you to be strengthened with might through his Spirit in the inner man, and that Christ may dwell in your hearts through faith; that you, being rooted and grounded in love . . . Here Paul distinguishes between the Spirit of the Father who dwells within us, and that spirit of Jesus, one mind and one purpose with him, through an attitude of faith in our hearts, which gives us love for him and for our fellows. The difference between the Spirit of the Father, and the Spirit of Jesus is indicated elsewhere. P.1103 - Jesus was the perfectly unified human personality. And today, as in Galilee, he continues to unify mortal experience and to co-ordinate human endeavors. He unifies life, ennobles character, and simplifies experience. He enters the human mind to elevate, transform, and transfigure it. It is literally true: If any man has Christ Jesus withinhim, he is a new creature; old things are passing away; behold, all things are becoming new. The biblical reference is to 2 Cor 5:17.
7- Demons
~65~
The evidence from the Bible and from Revelation demonstrates that the Spirit of the Father invades the human mind, a Spirit entity of high holy origin, the highest possible in existence. The evidence shows that Jesus also enters our minds to unify mortal experience, and to uplift us. But neither the Father nor Jesus take possession of us, nor do they violate our free-will decisions. They created us as true Sons of God, that we might grow to be more mature creatures. Their Spirits work with us to accomplish that superb goal.
THE SPIRIT OF DEMONS

Demon possession has a specific mechanism. The New Testament record testifies to that phenomenon. ! Demons recognized Jesus as a divine Son of God, Luke 4:33-35. In one case he rebuked them; he did not want them to reveal who he was, Luke 4:41. He did not broadcast to the world what they understood: his status as Creator. He forbid them to do so. And they obeyed. They respected him as their Creator. They acknowledged his power and authority, James 2:19. ! They knew he could judge them, and asked why he was here now, ahead of the time, i.e., ahead of the judgment, Matt 8:29. ! They did not want Jesus to send them out of the country, meaning to celestial internment, Mark 5:10. ! Jesus had the power to order them about, Matt 8:16, 9:32, Mark 1:27. ! The New Testament writers believed they had degrees of wickedness, Matt 12:45. ! Demons could control all mechanisms of the human body, via the mind, including hearing and vision, Matt 12:22. In another case, after the demon had been cast out, a person who was held dumb could speak, Matt 9:32-33. Sometimes they were fierce in their possession, Matt 8:28, Mark 5:2-10. ! An explicit remark shows that demons possessed the human mind, Mark 5:15, but we should understand that they did so through the brain. The human mortals who were subject to them expressed the mind and thought of the demon, Luke 8:28. The demon took over the brain of the human. From this evidence we can deduce several important characteristics of the rebel spirits: ! They had personality, cognitive thought, purpose, objectives, and ability to exercise their power, even if evil. ! They seized control of human mortals; they used methods which permitted them to usurp the personal volition of their human victims. ! The New Testament reports show the demons actually took up residence within the brains, to influence the minds of their human victims.
~66~
! Their possession of human beings was sordid. They violated human integrity and will. They did not respect human kind. They fell prey to a depraved temptation to subvert the minds and bodies of those persons. (This behavior can be brought into better grasp by imagining human power to enter into animals, and to control their behavior. If we had such power, what human mortal would engage in such activities, except the most debased?) ! The demons were limited in the type of human mortals they could possess. Since they were not inhibited in behavior they would have randomly entered all persons if everyone had been subject to their entry. ! They entered only mortals who had weak minds. This weakness was not physical; it was mental. Either the persons were mentally retarded, or had weak wills. The persons were not strong enough to keep control of their own minds. ! If demonic control was strictly over the physical body they could have controlled all humans, since that control would have bypassed human mind. This shows they entered human mortals through the brain. They possessed the body by control of mental currents. ! They could not possess nomal persons because those persons were strong enough in their personal will and volition to inhibit the demons from taking control of the mental currents. Thus the biblical evidence suggests the demons possessed human mortals through entry into the brain. They controlled the mind through the brain to engage in their sordid activities. An important question before us is the functional status of these rebel demon spirits. What role did they serve in creation? ! The evidence shows that they did not travel to and fro between the celestial realms and this world, as do the angels. One of those rebels specifically asked Jesus not to be taken out of this country. They were bound to this planet. (The word translated as country is from Greek chora with the idea of empty expanse or large open region. The word is a feminine derivative of Greek chasma, from whence English chasm. Chasma in Greek meant a vacancy, gulf, or impassable interval, hence space in modern terminology. The Greeks used chora to denote the world, or the planet. This word is contrasted with Greek topos which we know in English topography.) ! If the demons did not travel to and fro between heaven and earth, and if they did not wish to be taken out of this earth, at the time, i.e. the Judgment, the implication is that they were permanent residents of this world. If so, they had origin on this world. They did not have origin in the celestial realms. But the transactions giving birth to the demon personalities are lost to our planetary record. We have hints of such transactions when the Sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, Gen 6:1-4, but the significance of those transactions is now viewed only in mythological terms.
7- Demons
~67~
! They were not confused with angels by the ancients; those olden people recognized them as different. Neither did the ancients describe those episodes as angelic possession. ! If the demons were from this world, not the celestial realms, and if the ancients recognized them as less than angels, we could say they were designed by God for service in creation somewhere between human mortals and angels. We might designate them as midway creatures. P.286 - The Ministering Spirits of the Local Universes embrace the seraphim and their assistants, the cherubim. With these offspring of a Universe Mother Spirit mortal ascenders have initial contact. The midway creatures, of nativity on the inhabited worlds, are not really of the angelic orders proper, though often functionally grouped with the ministering spirits. P.415 - In the early days of most inhabited worlds, certain superhuman but materialized beings are of assignment, but they usually retire upon the arrival of the Planetary Adams. The transactions of such beings and the efforts of the Material Sons to improve the evolutionary races often result in the appearance of a limited number of creatures who are difficult to classify. These unique beings are often midway between the Material Sons and the evolutionary creatures; hence their designation, midway creatures. In a comparative sense these midwayers are the permanent citizens of the evolutionary worlds. From the early days of the arrival of a Planetary Prince to the far-distant time of the settling of the planet in light and life, they are the only group of intelligent beings to remain continuously on the sphere. On Urantia the midway ministers are in reality the actual custodians of the planet; they are, practically speaking, the citizens of Urantia. Mortals are indeed the physical and material inhabitants of an evolutionary world, but you are all so short-lived; you tarry on your nativity planet such a short time. You are born, live, die, and pass on to other worlds of evolutionary progression. Even the superhuman beings who serve on the planets as celestial ministers are of transient assignment; few of them are long attached to a given sphere. The midway creatures, however, provide continuity of planetary administration in the face of ever-changing celestial ministries and constantly shifting mortal inhabitants. Throughout all of this never-ceasing changing and shifting, the midway creatures remain on the planet uninterruptedly carrying on their work. We should remember that at one time they were respected beings; before the rebellion they were assigned responsible tasks on this world. These revelations have several crucial components.
~68~
! Demons no longer are on our world. Activities of fallen spirits is now limited to the Devil C our fallen Prince. He is still free on our world to prosecute his nefarious designs. ! Disloyal spirits could and did invade human mind by taking over the brains of some mortals prior to the pouring out of the Spirit of Truth upon all flesh at the time of Pentecost. ! The pouring out of the Spirit of Truth upon all flesh made it forever impossible for disloyal spirits to invade even the most feeble of human minds. ! This is the definition of demoniacal possession: invasion of human mind through the brain without permission of the human host. No longer can any fallen spirit take involuntary possession of human mind. All spirit entry into human mind can now be done only through invitation and permission of the human mortal. If all demons have been interred, and only the fallen Prince remains, his entry into human mind is now only through conscious invitation, not through involuntary possession. ! The life of Jesus upon this world altered the conditions of spirit operation. When he poured out his Spirit of Truth he made it impossible for a true faith son or daughter to ever again be invaded involuntarily by rebel spirit beings. The instructions we have received from Revelation are greatly helpful to understand that rebel demons no longer are a threat to us, nor have they been since the days of Pentecost. From page 863- 864: The majority of the primary midwayers went into sin at the time of the Lucifer rebellion. When the devastation of the planetary rebellion was reckoned up, among other losses it was discovered that of the original 50,000, 40,119 had joined the Caligastia secession. The original number of secondary midwayers was 1,984, and of these 873 failed to align themselves with the rule of Michael and were duly interned in connection with the planetary adjudication of Urantia on the day of Pentecost. No one can forecast the future of these fallen creatures. Both groups of rebel midwayers are now held in custody awaiting the final adjudication of the affairs of the system rebellion. But they did many strange things on earth prior to the inauguration of the present planetary dispensation. These disloyal midwayers were able to reveal themselves to mortal eyes under certain circumstances, and especially was this true of the associates of Beelzebub, the leader of the apostate secondary midwayers. But these unique creatures must not be confused with certain of the rebel cherubim and seraphim who also were on earth up to the time of Christs
7- Demons
~69~
death and resurrection. Some of the older writers designated these rebellious midway creatures as evil spirits and demons, and the apostate seraphim as evil angels. I have now offered discussion on two types of spirit beings or entities: the Spirit of the Father, and midwayers, known in our historic record as demons. The Spirit of the Father is the highest form of spirit entity in creation. The midwayers are the lowest, since they are next to human mortals in status. Both could invade the human mind. Therefore, it seems natural to infer that all other intervening orders of spirit beings or entities could also invade the human mind. This was illustrated by the revelation which stated that Jesus enters our mind. Remember that Jesus is God, and can enter our minds without altering our will and our choices. But no loyal spirit being less than our Creator comes into our minds, whether invited to do so or not. Only debased rebel spirits would invade the sanctity of human mind.
~70~
CHAPTER EIGHT Spirit Entry

P.610 - Caligastia, your apostate Planetary Prince, is still free on Urantia to prosecute his nefarious designs, but he has absolutely no power to enter the minds of men, neither can he draw near to their souls to tempt or corrupt them unless they really desire to be cursed with his wicked presence. I know a man who did not like the heavy portent of this statement. It truly disturbed him that spirits might enter the human mind. He solved his perplexity by interpreting the text differently. He stated that there was no comma after the phrase corrupt them. Thus the last phrases were isolated from the former. He separated the thoughts. He then had two absolute statements: a) the Devil has absolutely no power to enter the minds of men and, b) he cannot draw near our souls to tempt and corrupt unless we really desire to be cursed with his wicked presence. Thus he reverted to the traditional and time-honored view of the actions of this apostate Prince. The Devil was now relatively harmless. I had developed a close personal relationship with this man, or thought I had. But my insistence on the literal significance of the statement caused him to deny that relationship. He drew cool and distant. Often since, I have wanted to ask if he ever heard of jots and tittles. He followed that old worn path of refusing truth by the smallest graphical notation, a habit practiced from long before Jesus. Another man asked if I could draw out biblical parallels for this statement. I replied that I could not do it with any one passage, but that several biblical passages showed the same revelation, as in John 14:30. Historically, we do not have a similar revelation stated so clearly and succinctly. Our ability to recognize truth is not dependent on the source of the revelation. It matters not how we may hang clauses and phrases, dependent or independent, associated or unassociated. What we recognize as truth depends on that Spirit which dwells within us, the Spirit of the Father, and on our response to his Spirit. And it depends on the Spirit of Truth working with us. Throughout our lives we may have learned to listen or we may have learned to reject. Or we may have learned to twist recognition into intellectually convenient forms. The difficulty for that first man was his dilemma between the recognition of truth and his fleshly fears. He was an intelligent man. He understood fully what the statement meant. He felt within himself the significance of the revelation. But he could not deal with the possibility that a spirit personality C a real, living being
8 - Spirit Entry
~71~
C might be able to enter our minds to tempt and corrupt. It scared him. He knew if such entry were taking place on a wide scale we were destined for true tribulation. He was intelligent but he lacked courage. It was easier to reject the truth. I know many other individuals who deny the revelation by skirting around literal views of its meaning. They say that human beings would never desire to be cursed with the wicked presence of the Devil. Of course not. Who would want to be cursed with the Devil? The difficulty with the channelers (spiritists) is that they do not ask to be cursed with the wicked presence of Caligastia. They ask Spirits to come and visit with them C in their minds. They sit in their living room chairs, close their eyes, and say, ASpirit, come visit me.@ It is as simple as that. Unfortunately, they cannot specify which Spirit will come. They have no method or power to define which Spirit will visit. When they let go of their minds they voluntarily give over control of their wills to whichever Spirit may come. But there is only one iniquitous Spirit C Caligastia C pretending to all manner of spirits. I know individuals who are disappointed that they cannot get a Spirit to come visit with them. They would love to have a personal Teacher. I discovered that all those who wish for a private Spirit but cannot receive one are strong minded. They have goals they aggressively pursue. They are not people who would give over their will to someone else=s manipulation. They cannot receive a Teacher because they will not submit their will to his will. Furthermore, those who seek the Spirits believe many spirits are available for communication. They do not believe only one Spirit is active today. They cannot conceive that he can come into as many minds as he wants. They do not believe one rebel could impersonate thousands of spirits. In their gullibility they accept whatever the Spirit says to them. P.753 - The doctrine of a personal devil on Urantia, though it had some foundation in the planetary presence of the traitorous and iniquitous Caligastia, was nevertheless wholly fictitious in its teachings that such a devil could influence the normal human mind against its free and natural choosing. Even before Michaels bestowal on Urantia, neither Caligastia nor Daligastia was ever able to oppress mortals or to coerce any normal individual into doing anything against the human will. The free will of man is supreme in moral affairs; even the indwelling Thought Adjuster refuses to compel man to think a single thought or to perform a single act against the choosing of mans own will. Thus it is plainly stated. Human will has supreme control. The Devil cannot influence the normal mind against its free and natural choosing. But if that mind says Aplease come@ it then subjects itself to that evil Spirit.
~72~

P.610 - Before the bestowal of Michael these rulers of darkness sought to maintain their authority on Urantia, and they persistently withstood the minor and subordinate celestial personalities. But since the day of Pentecost this traitorous Caligastia and his equally contemptible associate, Daligastia, are servile before the divine majesty of the Paradise Thought Adjusters and the protective Spirit of Truth, the spirit of Michael, which has been poured out upon all flesh.
Time and again we are reassured about our spiritual and mind integrity. That Devil cannot enter our minds unless we really desire to be cursed with his wicked presence. This does not mean that there is an automatic protection against him. The Spirit of Truth does not prevent us from making free-will decision, contrary to God=s will C if that is our choice. Nor does the Spirit of the Father prevent us from jumping into the arms of iniquity. P.610 - But even so, no fallen spirit ever did have the power to invade the minds or to harass the souls of the children of God. Neither Satan nor Caligastia could ever touch or approach the faith sons of God; faith is an effective armor against sin and iniquity. It is true: He who is born of God keeps himself, and the wicked one touches him not. Clearly the Devil is all around us. But if we are true children of God he cannot touch us. Those who are born of God do not go seeking the Spirits as a marvelous new vehicle for revelation or for Aspiritual renewal.@ P.610 - In general, when weak and dissolute mortals are supposed to be under the influence of devils and demons, they are merely being dominated by their own inherent and debased tendencies, being led away by their own natural propensities. The devil has been given a great deal of credit for evil which does not belong to him. Caligastia has been comparatively impotent since the cross of Christ. This passage also has been taken by the spiritists as an excuse to show that the Devil has no power of any kind. They cannot see the word AcomparativelyA which conditions the statement.
8 - Spirit Entry
~73~
SANCTITY OF THE HUMAN MIND

Angels do not invade the sanctity of the human mind; they do not manipulate the will of mortals; neither do they directly contact with the indwelling Spirit of the Father. The guardian of destiny influences you in every possible manner consistent with the dignity of your personality; under no circumstances do these angels interfere with the free action of the human will. Neither angels nor any other order of universe personality have power or authority to curtail or abridge the prerogatives of human choosing. The Urantia Papers, Page 756. The human mind has sanctity to all orders of loyal celestial personalities. It is respected. Only disloyal spirit beings would invade the sanctity of human mind. And only disloyal spirit beings would enter human mind at invitation. Angels would not engage in such sordid performances. However, angels influence us in every possible manner consistent with the dignity of our personality. They are subject to the free action of human will. Nevertheless, The urge to pray so often experienced by God-conscious mortals very often arises as a result of seraphic influence. Another crucial question now looms before us. If angels would invade our minds, or enter with our invitation, would there be a conflict between the personality-will of the mortal and the personality-will of the angel? The same question applies to any other celestial personality who might come into human mind. When the fallen Prince enters does his personality-will interfere with the personality-will of the human mortal? The personality-will of the human mortal gives sanctity to the human mind, and dignity to the human mortal. God gave us personality as distinct beings in his vast creation, and he gave us will. That is what we are. That is the way God made us. That is what he wants us to be. Our personality molds our will. Thus we determine for ourselves our future eternal potentials. That is the dignity the Father gave us as a free gift. Therefore, neither the Father, nor our Creator, nor any other loyal celestial being would violate that gift. The technical question is this: Can spirit entities enter human mind without interfering with the personality-will of the human mortal? In order to enter human mind they must, in some manner, exercise power which makes their presence known. If they would come in and not act it would not be entry into human mind. They do not merely come in to passively page through the book of mind. The Devil wants to go beyond that; he wants to control our minds. He wants to manipulate. He wants to use human mind for his evil purposes.
~74~
The many spirit communications going on about our world today depend upon channeling through human mind. The Devil can offer those communications only by manipulating the neural currents of the human mortal. Thus he takes over the tongue and the expression of that person. The content of the human mind becomes subject to his control. When he produces changes within the human mind he violates their created dignity. He imposes his personality-will over theirs. Scott Foerster, one of those individuals I personally know, postulated that the phenomena he experienced in his mind were projections from the Spirit who was his personal guide, and not direct entry into his mind. He recognized that if the Spirit were manipulating his mental currents he had submitted himself to the personality-will of that Spirit. He fully understood that condition and did not want to admit that he might have submitted himself to it. But this explanation is not adequate to avoid the fact that the human mind is being manipulated from the spirit realms. Whether we view it as a projection of the spirit, or as an actual spirit presence, the effect is the same. Furthermore, for the Spirit, it may be merely a projection of his mind into the human mind. But he can do so only if human beings stand aside, if they make their personality-will subservient to his. Note the remarks by Mark Farley that he had to resign his will in order to let the spirit produce effects through him C to let the spirit through. I personally know many persons who subjected themselves to this spirit entry. At the time of this writing they would deny that the Devil has assumed control in their minds, just as Scott Foerster devised an explanation to remove the sting of the reality. They believe they have full control. They would vigorously deny it is the Devil. The phenomena they experience in their minds is viewed as strictly benevolent. They believe the phenomena come from benign spirit beings who have only their interests at heart. The Devil has conditioned them to believe they are the pioneers of a new world era, and that they serve important roles in the accomplishment of that new world. The week of January 23, 2000 I engaged in an Internet discussion with several individuals concerning these Aspirit@ transactions. Saskia Raevouri was highly active in the Urantia community. She thought the Spirit communications were the greatest thing since Revelation. She repeatedly attempted to contact a Spirit, deeply longing for a personal Spirit Guide. But she was unable to do so. I stated that Saskia could not contact the Spirits because she had such a strong personal will. She was unwilling to let go of her will. I raised the issue that spiritists showed weak wills. They were willing to give over their wills to the Spirit. Consider the statements of Jim Cleveland, who responded to an Internet post from Nancy Bigelow:
8 - Spirit Entry
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ From Nancy:
~75~
I feel like Alice in you-know-where. This is more and more curious. In my mind, you two dont appear to be contradicting one another. Ernest is saying (essentially) that a SELF-directed human cannot channel because his or her person will not permit the mind to do this. We each and all are essentially a small, personal piece of Father self itself! The UB (Urantia Book) quote he provides also says essentially the same thing. Spirits cannot & therefore do NOT dominate a normal human mind UNLESS the self allows access. Our mortal selfhood is a relative individuation (UB p.1232) of the Father himSELF. A WHOLLY Father-directed mind MUST - by default - never, ever, deviate from the *foreordained* cycle of personality *unification*. The supreme ideal within this concept, is that a mortal man or woman transfer the seat of identity [of the mortal personality bestowal] from the passing material-intellect system to the higher morontia-soul system; (1233). In other words, the mortal is asked to conduct ALL spiritualization (i.e., soul-growth), wholly on a superconscious level of mind. What you (Jim) are saying is that it is indeed possible to mediate the soul-growth process within the confines of the material intellect system if one chooses to do this. Many consider that this is self-assertive manipulation which can potentially be detrimental to *actual* soul growth, and it is not really the preferred Father-pattern for our soul growth if we are to believe the Revelators. The Revelators indicate that we are to be faith sons of God at this point in the ascension process. Nancy B. (This was Jim=s reply. I show my Internet interspersed comments, which were my response to Jims reply.) Hi Nancy, good to hear your views and I really guess I owe you a reply but .... I have no understanding of any of these processes that you discuss, not being a real scholar of the UPs. (Urantia Papers). After reading hundreds of pages of TeaM (Teaching Mission) transcripts, I just wanted to make a celestial connection of my own. I saw other people transmitting way beyond their knowledge with lessons that formed a pure, whole and loving cosmology. I finally quit trying to do it, released to faith and it came easy. Note that Jim says he released to faith. This release is the element I emphasized in letting go. One must let go of ones personal will for the Spirits to come in. This Saskia and other strong minds cannot do.
~76~
It will for you. I just go into the Stillness with deep breathing exercises for relaxation and a mental focus on my desire for Truth, Beauty and Goodness. The Stillness is where the spiritists abandon their will. They become quiescent to the personality of the Spirit who then communes with them. (All channeling involves communication with another invisible personality.) I devote some minutes to worship, appreciations; to prayer for someone in particular; to forgiveness in case I am holding some alienation or anger, and then to the exercise of seeing Christ in every face that we see, and in effecting that face of service in all that we do minute by minute through the day. The Christ is the one who now parades as Jesus, although you will find that he rarely uses the name Jesus. He detests that name. But because of Christian corruption of the Messiah image, and use of the TITLE Christ as a name for Jesus, Caligastia now uses that NAME as an impersonation device. Jim borrows this from A Course In Miracles, although the same use shows up in many other channeled sources. Our sincere desires for grace and service can bring a closeness and embrace with the Universal Father that cannot be described. Once the bond is made you will get a continuing flow of insights, inspirations and understandings in the areas where you have the questions. Teachers are everywhere, anxious to come online for friendly conversation and the sharing of their vast knowledge. You will note the closeness and embrace cannot adequately be described by the channelers. They are giving us truthful testimony. When once Caligastia takes possession of their minds, when once the bond is made, he can manipulate any feeling, emotion, or religious impulse he desires. There is another literal truth in what Jim says. This Spirit has vast knowledge, accumulated over millions of years. And he is literally everywhere, acutely anxious to be friendly, and to share with human mortals. While in this relaxed alpha state, type or write the words that come to your mind gently without analysis and let them flow. Or speak them into a recorder. Read back later, and again and again, for greater clarity. You should again note that Jim is advising to let these other thoughts gently flow without analysis. In other words, do not interfere in the process of communication as the Spirit goes about his business in your mind.
8 - Spirit Entry
~77~
How this all happens and how we do it would fill a book that no one can write yet. Spiritual energy circuitry is a book-length, maybe encyclopedic length study of which I am in the primer. I dont believe any of us are competent to adequately describe the process going on the minds of the channelers. These are cosmic transactions beyond human understanding. But we can put some boundaries on it, as I have attempted to do. I have just been blessed to be a vessel, conduit, secretary . . . albeit not the best one around. It is true that those who can maintain a more placid and peaceful lifestyle are more attuned to be fluid and deeply insightful transmitters. Again, you can see how Jim is describing the difference among human beings. Some can come into tune with the Spirit better than others. Jane Roberts (Seth) was one of the best. Saskia, bless her heart, cant come in tune at all. But everything about this process is speculation, it seems, until some scholar pulls the facts from the Urantia cosmology and relates them logically to the transmissions that are really and truly happening across the world. Well, I have been trying, but the contempt for analysis of the actual source of this phenomena is beyond the fear barrier of virtually all Urantians, and all Christians. The bottom line truth is: We have been blessed in recent years with enhanced energy circuits. With Faith, we can use them. With fear, we can just keep reading fearful books. Each one of us can transmit higher spiritual insights than we know at the time. Why not do it? Thanks anyway for your ideas. Those are a few of mine. jim I am now in the throws of preparing a book for publication in which I discuss these matters. As I show, we were told that Caligastia would be given a release. This is his time. Jim refers to those enhanced energy circuits in recent years. I also believe that quite literally. Ernest
~78~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ In the present form of the phenomenon the fallen Prince is exceedingly subtle. He does not forcibly push his way around; he is much too careful for that. If he did he would lose the voluntary contribution of the human subject; he would then enter upon the level of spirit possession. Many of the individuals who have invited him in today are highly intelligent, well educated, middle class professionals. They are much too smart to be forced into actions. If he tried to force them they would reject him. Therefore, he deceives them. He gives them attractive reasons why they should continue to accept his presence within their minds. He shows them great beauty; he gives them deep feelings of love. Only after he has well established himself, and knows their minds thoroughly, does he assert such control that they become totally subservient to his master commands. He then will truly take possession of them. He will engage such power when his hour comes. For the moment, at the writing of this paper, he is preparing his cadre. But we should keep ever hold on a great truth. No true child of God was ever subject to fallen spirits. There is no danger even today of such invasion of human mind for those who are truly dedicated to God, and born of the Father. Only those who are not born of the Father stand in such danger. This was the heart of the dire warning given by Jesus, John 16:2. Indeed, the hour would come when those who did not know him or the Father would offer a service to God by killing his people C a service to their God. In order to permit the reader to obtain a better understanding of the operations of this evil spirit I shall offer detailed examples gathered from spiritualist performances. I shall then go on to an examination of the more recent techniques he employs to accomplish his truly diabolical, and devastating scheme.
9- Sordid Spiritualism
~79~
CHAPTER NINE Sordid Spiritualism

P.865 - But it should be made clear that the midway creatures are not involved in the sordid performances taking place under the general designation of spiritualism. The midwayers at present on Urantia, all of whom are of honorable standing, are not connected with the phenomena of so-called mediumship; and they do not, ordinarily, permit humans to witness their sometimes necessary physical activities or other contacts with the material world, as they are perceived by human senses. The word Asordid@ has been understood at two levels: a) the performances of spiritualism which produce ectoplasm, and other assorted disgusting phenomena, and b) the fact that spirits invade the mind to corrupt it. Any invasion of the human mind by spirit beings is truly sordid, for the human mind is the seat of will and of choice. When the spirits enter they effectively deprive that human mortal of those God-given prerogatives. Furthermore, the Ageneral designation of spiritualism@ is not restricted to spiritualist performances, but includes all those psychic phenomena under the more general designation of Aspiritism.@ Therefore, all psychic phenomena involving Spirits can be included under those general classifications. Loyal spirit beings do not engage in those performances. On the evening of October 19, 1994, PBS, the Public Broadcasting System, ran a television program on Spiritualism. The program reviewed the history of spiritualism in the nineteenth century, noting the sudden rise in popular interest after the phenomenon of the Fox sisters in Hydesville, NY in 1848. Public interest became avid. Abraham Lincoln did not practice a formal religion nor attend church. His wife, Mary Todd Lincoln, after the loss of three sons, sought out mediums in attempt to communicate with those sons. Other outstanding individuals who became deeply interested, and believers, included Sir Oliver Lodge, English physicist and author, Dr. Ozora S. Davis, president of Chicago Theological Seminary, A. Conan Doyle, famous for his Sherlock Holmes stories, and Sir William Crooks, inventor of the Crooks tube and discoverer of thallium. Others famous believers included James Fenimore Cooper, William Cullen Bryant, Daniel Webster, Harriet Beecher Stowe, Elizabeth Barrett Browning, and Horace Greeley. The intellectual world of those days was rapt with attention to spirit communications and psychic performances.
~80~
Unfortunately, the television program was self-serving. It presented Margaret Fox as fraudulent, recanting her psychic performances after converting to Roman Catholicism and publishing an expose in New York World. The program did not say that before Margaret died she reversed herself and insisted that undefiled communication with the spirits was and would ever be the only explanation for what she, her sister Katie, and other mediums demonstrated. In spite of the witness of many scientific minds and objective investigators, the program concentrated on the fraudulent without considering the evidence which indicated a real phenomenon. Many outstanding personalities gave testimony to a vivid reality. Obviously motivated to debunk spiritist phenomena, the program was not designed to present the truth about spiritism. It failed to discuss the continuation of spiritualism to the present day, as well as the general phenomena of Spirit communications, and the widespread activities which now absorb the interest of so many people. In order to show the deadly nature of spiritist phenomena, and the impact upon our decisions, I shall illustrate several case histories. These will run the gamut from pure spiritualism to the more recent spirit communications which have now become the basis of religious belief for so many people. I shall begin with Marcus Bach and his investigations into the cults.
CASE HISTORY, #1 MARCUS BACH AND THEY HAVE FOUND A FAITH

Bach was born in 1906 and raised in a mildly divided, but religious, Wisconsin family. His father was a member of the Presbyterian church; his mother of the Reformed faith, (now United Church of Christ). Bachs father had an interest in fundamental religionists and their soul-filled worship practices. He would take young Bach with him to holy-roller tent revivals and camp meetings in the years following World War I. With the strong interest of his parents in religious life Bach was initially persuaded to attend Mission House College and Seminary near Sheboygan, Wisconsin. At the end of his third year he moved on to the secular environment of a state university. He obtained a graduate fellowship which took him to various parts of the country and encounters with a wide spectrum of religious faiths. Bach received a PhD degree and went on to make a study, not, as he said, in the theological or doctrinal sense, but what religion is and what it does in the lives of people. He later wrote a number of books on the religious practices of people, including They Have Found A Faith, Bobbs-Merrill Company, New York, 1946, Major Religions of the World, 1959, Strange Sects and Cults, 1961, and Spiritual Breakthroughs For Our Time, 1965. I use Bach as a source because of his clear objectivity, his fine sense of balance in treating religious issues, and his plain honesty. Furthermore, he was an excellent writer; it is a pleasure to read his materials. By the time of World War II he had experience with many different religions and contacts with widely assorted
~81~
cults and sects. Those contacts led him to Ralph G. Pressing, then editor of the Psychic Observer. After attending a sance and mind-reading session in Hollywood, which was obviously fraudulent, he expressed a strong desire to learn more about true spiritualist performances. Pressing suggested they travel to Chesterfield, Indiana and the spiritualist center located in that town. The center is still operating today. Bach found a bucolic vacation land, with two large hotels and cottages looking out on a grass-carpeted amphitheater and a grotto in a garden of prayer. After registering at the Sunflower Hotel Bach found himself surrounded by an astonishing assortment of about two hundred students of spiritualist science. They were a mixture of young and old, with qualities distinctively different from the shifty, evasive types he had found behind curtained rooms in office buildings and in metropolitan areas. They did not have the gleam of the cults in their eyes which he had experienced in so many different religious settings. The hefty double-cheeked medium with bulging bosom and a dab of rouge on her cheeks was conspicuously absent. The students at Camp Chesterfield could have passed as delegates of any professional convention. In conversation with one woman, a school superintendent from suburban Milwaukee, he found the religious justifications which spiritualists placed on their practices. She was a medium who received messages through spirit voices, but her chief interest was in the theology of spiritualism. She felt that people were losing the deeper meaning and truths of the science because of the spectacular aspects of the phenomena. It was the relation of spiritualism to Christianity which seemed so wonderful to her. She went on to a long list of quotations from Genesis to Revelation which she felt proved her views. The voice from heaven in Matt 3:16-17 was a Spirit voice. Daniel was a medium. Of course, Jesus was the greatest medium of all. He was clairvoyant and clairaudient. From John 4:17-19 she demonstrated that Jesus was telepathic. From Luke 9:28-30 she was convinced that Jesus materialized Moses and Elijah. In the following days Bach attended three different performances at the Chesterfield center. The first was a private session which only he and Pressing had with a trumpet medium, a slightly built young man about thirty years of age. The second was a meeting with a male mind-reader attended by a large audience. The third was with a materializing medium, a small older woman, and a circle of seven observers. I quote in full from Bach for the first and last performances. The first session was in a bare room in a small cottage, containing only a desk and chair for the medium, two chairs for Bach and Pressing, and two aluminum tubes, one about four feet in length made up of sections, and the other about two feet in length made up of a single piece. The tubes were flared slightly at one end to form the trumpet shape. Both were standing upright on the flared end and placed between the medium and the observers. A door leading elsewhere to the cottage was locked. Two windows in the room were shaded with blinds.
~82~
The third session was in a basement room surrounded by cement block walls. Again, a door led to another part of the basement but Bach requested that it be locked during the performance. Other than the circle of chairs for the observers, there was a spotlight and a small curtained section against one wall, about three by four feet, containing only a chair for the medium. Overhead lights were turned off during the performance, while a red spotlight was turned on. It was dim but bright enough to see the room, objects and people. The medium sat behind the curtain. The following accounts are repeated from the words by Bach. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Sance #1
The moments passed. My eyes became accustomed to the dark and I could make out the vague outline of Pressing next to me. He leaned over and whispered somberly, Well, whens something going to happen? Before I could answer C How do you do, Dr. Bach! How do you do, Mr. Pressing! came to us out of the darkness. It was a tantalizing, childish voice with a slightly roguish touch. It might have been a winsome little prodigy stepping out in debut. It might have been a tiny actress in a puppet show. Good afternoon, responded Mr. Pressing. Who are you? I asked. With a friendly lilt the answer came. Im Sylvia. . . . We are glad you are here, Dr. Bach, she said with a neat curtsy in her voice. This is going to be a good sance. There are good vibrations. Look! The small trumpet was slowly rising from the floor. It stopped slightly above the larger one and hovered uncertainly . . . But who are you? I insisted. Sylvia! said the voice emphatically. Didnt I tell you? I am Sylvia? . . . I can get other spirits for you, if you want me to. How? I demanded. With millions of spirits in the spirit world, how do you get them? Call Bob Whitehand for me. Bob Whitehand? The voice seemed to drift from us for a moment. Bob Whitehand? it returned reflectively. Ill try. It is done by vibrations . . . Ill try to get Bob Whitehand after while. But look at the trumpet now, Dr. Bach! It had risen to five or six feet above the floor and was slowly floating in space ... Where would you like the trumpet to go? asked Sylvia Bring it close to me, I told her. Outlined by the luminous bands, the trumpet floated toward me. It stopped close to my right ear. Put it in my hands, Sylvia, I said.
~83~
Hold them out! I extended my hands and the trumpet came to rest in them. Now, I thought, heres my chance to find those strings. Balancing the feather-like tube in my left hand, I passed my right hand completely around it. No strings. Put your hands on each end of the trumpet, Sylvia directed. I did, holding the trumpet about elbows length from my body. Now Ill talk to you from inside the trumpet. A whispered voice C Sylvias C came from within the trumpet. I put it to my right ear C the voice was there; to my left ear C Sylvia speaking. Well, I admitted, thats interesting. Then I withdrew both hands quickly. Unaided, the trumpet remained fixed in space. A conversation between Sylvia and Pressing was lost in my amazement upon seeing the other trumpet begin a slow take-off. Without stopping, it ascended to a point near the ceiling. It hung there, then started a slow swinging motion, round and round, like the retarded movement of a helicopter. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Bach goes on to describe a fifteen or twenty-minute conversation with Dr. William James, famous philosopher and scholar, then deceased, who had been conjured up by the medium. At the end of the conversation the large trumpet crashed into the wall behind him. Then C ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ I think I have Bob Whitehand for you. Good! I said, in a tone of co-operation. Bob? Bob? Can you hear me? A luminous head appeared levitated about four feet from the floor. It was not materialized in the way that materializations are usually described. It simply appeared out of nothingness. It was like a blurred flashlight reflected on a human face. I made out the unmistakable features of my friend who had been killed in France. This apparition hovered in the room for only a few seconds and then blacked out. How should I explain it? If it were actually a human face illuminated by a flashlight, it must have been shrouded in a curtain in the center of the room. But I knew there had been no curtain. Besides, why would the flashlight diffuse over no other single part of the room, curtain or apparatus C if apparatus were used? And if it were someone impersonating Bob Whitehand, how could he make up such a marked resemblance to Bob, inasmuch as no one knew that I would request Bobs appearance? It was an inexplicable happening and remained the most vivid of the afternoons demonstration. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Before going on to Bachs report of the third performance (2nd sance) it may be helpful to consider aspects of the one just described.
~84~
! The voice has the timbre and tone of a young girl which leaves a distinct impression of the actual presence of the girl within the room, although no form is visible. ! The voice reflects a personality. It had a roguish touch. It was given with a neat curtsy. The implication is that the personality behind the performance recognizes Bachs personality and is responding to it in playful interchange. ! The voice relocates within the room. It could emanate from the trumpet or any other location. Important to our understanding is the fact that, for Bach to hear a voice, modulation of the air must take place. Physical control of a gaseous substance is required. ! The source of the voice takes a momentary pause, while it apparently searches memory for Bob Whitehand. It returns reflectively. ! The voice states that the presentation of an image of the dead friend is done through vibrations. The source of the voice then produces a visual image, apparently out of nothing. In order for Bach to perceive that image optical vibrations had to be created. Even more significantly, the image was manipulated as though it were an actual face. The source was able to create an incorporeal image that resembled Bachs dead friend. ! The mechanical movement of the trumpets was levitation, manipulation of physical matter against gravity, and with control of physical position. Bach could detect no mechanical connections to the trumpets. These elements summarize to highly significant information. If we were to propose that the voice came from the medium, however skillfully modulated to imitate that of a young girl, and however adroitly projected around the room, even to location within the trumpet, two other phenomena go far beyond proposed origin within the medium. How were the two aluminum tubes manipulated to defy gravity and with no visible propulsive mechanism? How was the image of a dead friend conjured into a visible display? By someone who never heard of him, never had seen him, and did not know that Bach would request him? No ordinary, familiar, or scientific explanations exist. We naturally seek scientific answers because we have become accustomed to recourse in methods which can provide reliable answers. We feel safe in an environment which can be trusted to repeat time after time, ad infinitum. But these phenomena are beyond the pale of scientific investigative techniques. ! They cannot be repeated through laboratory control. Objective science does not know the parameters necessary to establish such control. ! An objective environment would destroy the conditions necessary for their existence. Their production is conditioned by the friendly environment of those who believe.
~85~
! They depend upon personality interaction, not upon the reaction of inanimate physical objects subject to clinical conditions. The personality on one side is human; on the other it is Spirit. Therefore, objective science is not adequate to an evaluation. These phenomena are beyond the realm of safe and trustworthy human affairs; they deserve extraordinary explanations. However, if we assume origin in a spirit personality who is invisible we arrive at unnerving dimensions to the query. It would mean that C ! Some invisible source of power is responsible for the production of spiritualist phenomena. ! That invisible source exhibits personality. It reacts with human beings in personality interplay. It expresses personal will and choice in the conduct and exhibition of the performances. ! It can fully interact with and produce results in the physical world. ! The invisible personality knows each and everyone of us intimately. A roguish touch and neat curtsy indicated reaction to the presence and personality of Bach. ! The Spirit has tremendous memory, of the kind which knows every moment of every human life which ever existed C within the purview of ITS existence. If it was able to reproduce an image of Bachs friend, from a distant moment familiar to Bach, it had to retain the memory of that human being and know the relationship between the two. Bachs random request had to be a surprise to even that personality. The delay in bringing the memory into focus, displayed by drifting for a moment shows a search within its memory files. Then, again, a moments hesitation of reflection in bringing the image into play shows an effort at assembling the elements of the image necessary to impress Bach. Both personalities were able to remember the friend, in intimate detail, one human and one Spirit. ! The range of physical control appears to be limited to the sance. There must be a condition imposed on the performance which prevents such phenomena from occurring randomly or unexpectedly in our everyday lives. This means that the spirit personality cannot arbitrarily manipulate the physical world. The spirit personality is under undefined constraint. ! The required condition is that the Spirit must work through a human medium, through human mind. ! Although this sance was with a trumpet medium the performance included a materialization. The next sance will show this phenomenon in greater detail.
~86~
Sance #2
Bach inquired as to the reason for the placement of the medium behind a curtain. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ The reason for concealing the medium, I was informed, is because a red light is used during a materialization sance. Even a dim light interferes with the generation of the ectoplasm necessary in building spirit forms. The cabinet shields the medium during the time this force is being assembled and then, when complete, the form can stand the light rays long enough to be seen outside the cabinet by the sitters C from thirty seconds to three or four minutes. The medium entranced is also sometimes disturbing to the spectators. It is not a pleasingly aesthetic sight C especially during the materialization, for ectoplasm exudes from her mouth and body in the nature of a gauzy, foggy, smoke like substance from which figures are formed by the spirit chemists. Since there was no way for anyone to enter or leave the cabinet without coming through the room, I accepted it as part of the required setting. But what about the light? I inquired. The bright lights will be turned off, we were told. Ectoplasm, with its quality of luminosity, shows up best in dark or semidarkness. The sance will take place in a red light, which will not detract from the materialized forms. It will be bright enough for you to discern one another all the while and to see me standing near the cabinet. About this time Mrs. Harwood rapped at the inside door and was admitted. The door was relocked. Mrs. Harwood was diminutive, gentle, and refined. She greeted us in a cordial, forthright manner. But as she stepped inside the cabinet, I reminded myself that true art is the ability to conceal art. The assistant took her place beside the cabinet. Let us enter the sance reverently, she instructed, and there followed a brief word of prayer. Then she continued: I have these requests to make. Be sincere. You can assist very much in the success of the sance. Please do not speak among yourselves. If however, a spirit appears and indicates he wants to speak to you, if he calls you by name or motions to you to come, get up and speak to him. I only ask that you will please not touch the spirits. Are there any questions. Why shouldnt we touch the spirits? I asked. There is a connection between the spirits and the medium, the assistant explained. When you touch the spirit you are really touching the medium and disturbing the conditions of the trance. Do you remember the words of Jesus when He said to Mary in the garden after His resurrection, Touch me not, for I am not yet ascended to my Father?
~87~
I had further questions but, convinced that the success of the sance depended as much on us who sat in the circle as upon the medium, I put myself in a receptive though not credulous state of mind. I was determined today to fight against hallucinations or hypnotism or whatever might intrude under the guise of psychical demonstration. When the assistant turned out the bright lights, the room was illuminated with a deep red glow which came from a spot light directly over my shoulder. I turned to examine it. It was a theatrical spotlight covered by a thickness of gelatin (plastic). In its light I could easily see Pressing at my left and the doctor from Texas at my right. The others in the group, sitting in a half circle on folding chairs, were also always discernible. After perhaps five minutes of silent waiting, the assistant suggested we sing a song. Someone started, I Heard the Voice of Jesus Say. We sang one verse and were about to begin another when a voice spoke. How are you, everyone? It sounded like Sylvia. But I knew that Clifford Bias was at this same hour giving his demonstration of trumpet mediumship. I am Twilight, said the voice. At this everyone responded, Hello, Twilight. How are you? Im just fine, said Twilight, and how are you Dr. Bach? Im fine, too, I replied, piqued at having been singled out just because I hadnt chimed in with the others. It struck me that a spirit should think of something more profound in the way of getting attention than the old earth-worn phrases. Twilight was chatty. Everybody happy? You happy, Mr. Pressing? You happy, Mrs. Daiches? I think this will be a good sance. Oh, a very good sance, I think for sure. It is a good circle. Oh, its a good day for a sance. Nice and sunny. Atmospheric conditions have a lot to do with sances. When the atmosphere is heavy, it is hard for the spirits to manifest. Materialization is hard then. Oh, yes it is. And we must have materializations! We just must have! This last was said with an ironic twist. All religions must have phenomenB, how do you say it C phenomena C or phenomenon C or phenomenons! I never can pronounce it. Twilight laughed. A good sance? I wondered. A light flickered near the floor, close to where the assistant stood. It was a luminous glow, like the quick beam of a flashlight shining up through a cloth. It came suddenly, tarried a moment, and faded reluctantly. Twilights disconnected talk persisted as the mirage of light loomed again. This time it mounted higher like silver smoke curling around a light bulb. Then the light went out, but the silver smoke continued to hover. I can describe it best as a bright, shimmering vapor, struggling for expression. Slowly it began to take form. Something like shoulders C then a face appeared. It developed into a bodily form and spoke. It called for Mrs. Daiches. She got up, took a few steps, and said, Yes, Mother? How are you? the figure asked in a low, hushed whisper. Im fine, Mother. Why didnt you bring Father with you?
~88~
Immediately a mans voice spoke. She did. And hovering beside the figure of a little woman was a somewhat larger figure of a man. They had form and mask like features. For a moment I thought they might be two actors dressed in luminescent costumes and wearing paper-mch masks. Where had they come from? How had they entered the room? I felt sure I would know before the sance was over. Houdini once said that he could duplicate any such manifestation. Then a third figure appeared. Let us say, materialized, for it is the best description. It seemed to come out of the floor C an inchoate mass of ectoplasmic stuff C growing, taking form, speaking. I made out the semblance of a young boy. Mother, he said, do you remember the walks we used to take? I sure do, said the mother. He took his mothers arm and they moved back and forth across the room, coming so close to where I sat that I pulled back my feet. Throughout these doings the whisperings continued C sometimes simultaneously. Twilight was still chatting. And there was spirit laughter, low and pleased. I was seeing the raison dtre of spiritualism: demonstration and proof of the continuity of life, coupled with the comforting assurance that that life is good. Here was the reunion of a family C a son telling his mother that life over there was just a continuation of life on earth. There were not two worlds at all; there was but one interblended world closely interwoven by memory and the love of life. Consciousness could not die. Personality could not be destroyed. The spirit of man was, indeed, eternal. I drew my attention from the Daiches reunion and touched Pressings arm. What do you think? I asked. I have been to many sances, he replied. This promises to be one of the very best. I analyzed the possibilities of fraud and deception. The room was sufficiently illuminated that I would have seen holes in the floor, or shifting walls. And if it were done with mirrors how would one explain three figures speaking at once, gliding across the room, touching arms, brushing past my feet? This was the sance. The implausibility injected into the first ten minutes carried through the entire demonstration. For an hour new figures materialized and disappeared. Once Twilight cautioned, It is getting very bright. Too bright to see. Fix the red light. I will, Twilight, said the assistant, coming over to put another thin sheet of gelatin over the spotlight. I was making minute mental notations of all that was happening C hovering, swaying motion of the spirits, the rhythm of life, like the rise and fall of a tide, as many as four speaking simultaneously in whispered voices, excited, hurried, persuasive. Suddenly the galaxy of spirits melted away. For a long still moment nothing happened. Then the swirling ectoplasmic effluvia glowed from the floor and quickly took on the form of a girl. Before the figure was complete, it spoke. Marc, dear C Marc, dear C Marc, dear.
~89~
Those who know me well call me Marc; those who know me better call me Marc, dear, so I knew this must be a familiar spirit. I got up and walked over until there was a space of less than four feet between us. Yes? I said, Who are you The answer was fraught with disappointment. Dont you know me? I did not. I had no idea who this might be. I had really been too absorbed to think very much about personal contact with the spirits. . . . Nor did I propose to offer any hint of whom I thought she might represent. No leads, I determined. I do not know you. Who are you? Paula, came the answer. The name and soft manner in which it was uttered brought the sudden unfolding of a forgotten drama. Twenty years ago my sister Paula had died at the age of twenty-three. Her child Janette had died shortly before. These deaths had been among the deep sorrows of our family, but time and travel reduce the past into forgetfulness. No medium or spirit had plucked this name out of my mind because I wasnt thinking of Paula. I had not thought of her even once during the sance. I looked at the presence before me closely. How do I look? she asked. You look fine, I replied. The right height? she whispered. Do you think I should be taller? No. You are about the height I remember. I wanted to do a good job, she told me earnestly. Do I look all right? Yes, I assured her, recalling that one theory of materialization is that the spirit takes the ectoplasm and fashions according to its memory the human form which clothed it on earth. . . . Did this form and these features resemble Paula? I must admit they did. Very much. The outline of the figure was recognizable and convincing. It was like a false front, a flat, two-dimensional body with the semblance of arms clothed in a shadowy gray-white film. The face, though typically mask like, was strikingly reminiscent. There was an illusion of long blond hair. I cannot say whether the voice was Paulas or not. After twenty years I would not remember. Just now, however, it was Paula returned. But why shouldnt it be? I asked myself as I stood there. The spiritualists at Chesterfield knew I was coming. If, as some people say, they have a well-laid system of espionage they could easily have traced my family and got Paulas description. If this was someone dressed up, play-acting, if this was a marionette using the voice of ventriloquist, naturally it would be constructed as to represent Paula. This thought haunted me more than the presence. I wished I could convince myself some way. The impulse to reach out and touch the figure became stronger. I moved closer, I moved slightly to one side so that the red light would strike the spirits face more directly. We were about three feet apart now. Paula was talking about life in the spirit world. I was asking hasty questions: Have you seen Jesus? What is heaven like? What about the element of time? Can you be everywhere at once? Are terms like Methodist, Reformed, Presbyterian, Catholic ever used where you are?
~90~
Her voice seemed to laugh. She answered, No, no, to all questions save the one about heaven. It was like speaking to a living person secretly, clandestinely, knowing that time was running out. Her features seemed to become clearer. Perhaps it was my mind playing tricks. And then the thought came to me. Paula, I said, do you remember the catechism we learned at home? Of course. Paula, do you remember the first question in that catechism? I remember. What was it, I asked almost fearfully. The answer came at once. AWhat is your chief comfort in life and in death?@ Go on, I urged. That I, with body and soul, both in life and in death am not my own C A She interrupted herself. Here where we are the words have a greater meaning! Then quickly, breathlessly, she told me that serving God meant personal development. Life on the spirit plane is an evolvement. Like the breaking of a chrysalis. Like the ascent in a spiral. Like the growth of moral affection to higher and higher heavens. Several times she interrupted herself with Do you understand? Is that clear? as if she felt her message was vital, all-absorbing. Death, she insisted, was not a violent result of sin. It has no sting. It was neither friend nor enemy. It was part of the divine purpose, a purpose without beginning or end. The whisper grew fainter. I can stay no longer, I must go now. Paula, one more thing. Can you put your arms around me? Ill give you a kiss, she said. Come closer. You come closer to me. I wanted her to come nearer the red light. She did. There was now scarcely a foot between us. The face was luminous, seemingly transparent, and without depth. I leaned forward and lowered my head. The weblike texture of ectoplasmic arms encircled my neck. Something soft and flaxen brushed my forehead. Then Paula vanished C into the floor, it seemed. I walked back to my chair and sat down. Was that all right, Twilight was asking. What do you think. I did not reply. What did I think? A few minutes later the lights were turned on. The cabinet assistant called to Mrs. Harwood, Are you alright? From within the curtain the medium announced that she was. The sance was ended.
~91~
DISCUSSION
This sance offers greater insights into the performances of the Spirit, and the limitations he certainly must feel. ! The gauze-like, foggy substance called ectoplasm has no specific definition. No human mortal knows exactly what composes ectoplasm. ! It has similarity to the substance which formed the head of Bob Whitehand. However, the full deployment demonstrated in this sance indicates attachment to the medium as a necessary condition for formulation. The creation of Bob Whitehand without connection to a medium was momentary. Or the connection was not visible to Bach. ! A phenomenon of light is associated with the formation of the ectoplasm. ! The formation of ectoplasm from the body of the medium is repulsive to most people. It is truly sordid. ! Again we find the playfulness demonstrated at the first seance. Here Twilight will not let Bach remain silent; she pulls him into the activity. The Spirit knows Bachs skeptical reluctance to greet a spirit entity, or a possible stage personality. ! The Spirit turns a point of sarcasm, in derision of human kind who must have materializations. It fully recognizes that many human minds do not have true spiritual faith; they must have phenomena which convince them of the validity of their faith. This is the identical need of the spiritists. They must have phenomena to convince them of the reality of God. That phenomena is in their heads. They are not faith Sons of God. This point was emphasized in the Internet exchange among Jim Cleveland, Nancy Bigelow, and myself. ! The Spirit could produce sound vibrations which imitated multiple voices, as many as four speaking simultaneously C whispering, excited, hurried, persuasive. ! The Spirit was able to form multiple figures. Mrs. Daiches saw both her father and mother, and a dead son. She had no trouble believing they were those specific dead relatives. ! For those who believe, the performances are convincing evidence that the dead are not dead, that they can return to demonstrate their life on the other side. But since the images, the voices, and the behavior are nothing more than reproductions from this Spirits memory the deception is exceedingly cruel. It shows a complete disregard for what it is doing to human emotions. It also shows the extreme depth to which the Spirit is reduced to gain attention. The Spirit will resort to any device. How very debased, indeed!
~92~
! In conversing with human beings he must resort to familiar human personality traits to communicate his own feelings or emotions. He is reduced to the human level to carry on this cross-personality interchange. His response is fraught with disappointment, or he wanted to do a good job. He was concerned that he make a favorable impression. ! How degrading it must truly be to such Spirit to be conditioned by the limitations of human perception, or belief, in order to carry on such intercourse. This is vividly illustrated when Paula quickly and breathlessly goes into a discourse of the other side, and the purpose of life. Not only does the spirit introduce an urgency in the message; he is also frustrated by these techniques. ! The Spirit knew the importance of making an impression upon Bach; he singles him out in both sessions. Bach would record the sessions and publish them to the world. ! Note how the Spirit is concerned that its reproduction of Paula be faithful to the original. It expressed a strong desire, not only to win acceptance from Bach, but that its performance be authentic. ! The technical human explanation of such close resemblance to the long-dead sister is given as the ectoplasmic memory from the dead sister. Apparently no one, in all the millennia of apparitions, recognized that the visible faithfulness to reproduction of the dead person came out of the memory banks of that despicable Spirit. ! Could Bach have been more convinced when he was able to devise a memory incident in the catechism that only he and his dead sister knew? An essential argument is the ability of the Spirit to remember all persons who ever lived on this planet in intimate detail. Would the Prince of this World have such powers? Not only form and appearance at different, and all stages of life, but also in personality, experience, and expression. Even more, if there are many sance sessions going on all around our planet simultaneously, at any odd hour of the day and night, how could he create such performances simultaneously? It boggles the mind. It also offers some estimate of what is meant in the Bible about the power of God. We have used the phrases in mystical attitude without delineating what that power might mean. We are about to find out. God certainly has tremendous power; that loathsome Prince does also.
10 - Devil Possession
~93~
CHAPTER TEN Devil Possession Jane Roberts And Seth

The devil is none other than Caligastia, the deposed Planetary Prince of Urantia. The Urantia Papers, page 602. The doctrine of a personal devil on Urantia, though it had some foundation in the planetary presence of the traitorous and iniquitous Caligastia, was nevertheless wholly fictitious in its teachings that such a devil could influence the normal human mind against its free and natural choosing. The Urantia Papers, Page 753. The key words are free and natural choosing. The Devil cannot enter any human mind against its will. Jane Roberts and her husband, Robert Butts, lived in an apartment in Endicott, New York. They were both free thinkers, espousing current new age trends, engaging in mind explorations through ESP, (extra-sensory perception), and occupying themselves with other trendy intellectual or spiritist activities. By their own free will they chose to actively explore contact with the Devil. Little did they know what they were doing. Janes unique abilities as a psychic communicator provided a vehicle for exceptional insight into the techniques employed by the Devil. In the course of her voluminous channelings he explained many aspects of his activity. Hardly anyone recognizes the explicit nature, and value, of the information he offered. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ My psychic initiation really began one evening in September, 1963, however, as I sat writing poetry. Suddenly my consciousness left my body, and my mind was barraged by ideas that were astonishing and new to me at the time. On return to my body, I discovered that my hands had produced an automatic script, explaining many of the concepts that Id been given. The notes were even titled C The Physical Universe as Idea Construction.
~94~
Because of that experience, I began doing research into psychic activity, and planned a book on the project. In line with this, my husband Rob, and I experimented with a Ouija board late in 1963. After the first few sessions, the pointer spelled out messages that claimed to come from a personality called Seth. Neither Rob nor I had any psychic background, and when I began to anticipate the boards replies, I took it for granted that they were coming from my subconscious. Not long after, however, I felt impelled to say the words aloud, and within a month I was speaking for Seth while in a trance state. AThe messages seemed to begin where Idea Construction left off, and later Seth said that my expansion-of-consciousness experience had represented his first attempt at contact . . . ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ By September 27, 1971, the date which Jane assigned to this statement, Seth had produced more than 6,000 typed pages of manuscript from more than 600 psychic transmissions. These usually took place in the well-lighted living room of the couple, mostly evening sessions. Rob took shorthand notes as Jane spoke the words of Seth. He later transcribed to typewritten form. Rob reported on the descriptions of inner experience given him by Jane: I knew that subjectively Jane was experiencing the feeling of a cone or pyramid coming down over the top of her head. Jane often told me that whereas she feels Seth come to her in a very warm and alive and friendly manner, she feels her consciousness going out of herself to meet Seth C up the invisible pyramid like a draft up a flue. She doesnt know where she goes or how she gets back. Her body seems to be left behind. In the many details of their spiritist explorations, Robert Butts noted the behavior of Jane while under spirit control. For example, while voicing the thoughts of Seth she would feel a need to smoke a cigarette. She would arise from her chair, go into the kitchen to retrieve a cigarette lighter, light the cigarette, return to her chair, and smoke C all the while continuing the transmission. Was she unconscious of her body during such actions? Did she move instinctively, not consciously thinking about her actions? Or was she in a half-conscious state? We cannot answer the questions precisely. If she was not aware of what was happening to herself when her consciousness went like a draft up the flue, should she have been immune to physical desires? On the other hand we can compare her experience with demon possession in some of the biblical reports. The human victim cried for help, conscious of his condition.
~95~
In any case, this was Devil possession. Her body movements and features are illustrated by the photographs published by her and her husband in the many printings of Seth Speaks. Rob described her features and body changes during these episodes as angular. They were far more than angular; because of the delusion about the source of this possession Rob could not see its true condition C as hideous. If Caligastia can possess one person he can possess another. The deep question before us is the depth of that possession C can he use the body to perform his wishes contrary to the conscious choices of his human subject? As part of his control Caligastia employs another technique. He renames his human subjects. Jane and Robert were renamed to Ruburt and Joseph. All those human mortals who have given themselves to him receive new names. The name changes are important. They help the human mortal to reassign his psychological loyalties. As a new spiritual being with a new name he reassigns his loyalties to that being who gives him the new name. The name changes will be used for another deadly purpose. When the Devil brings them into action they will need psychological reasons why it is not the persons themselves who are performing his deadly work, but rather their true spiritual selves. If it is their spiritual selves the other selves, the earthly selves, can continue in their daily routines with some balming of consciousness. In attempt to describe her inner experience Jane made other remarks. I have certain unique experiences during sessions that seem to compensate for my lack of conscious creative involvement. Often I participate in Seths great energy and humor, for example, enjoying a sense of emotional richness and encountering Seths personality on a very strange level. I feel his mood and vitality clearly, though they are not directed at me, but to whomever Seth is addressing at the moment. I feel them as they pass through me. As Robs notes show, I often have other kinds of experiences, also, while speaking for Seth. Sometimes, for instance, I see inner visions. These may illustrate what Seth is saying, so that I am receiving information in two ways, or they may be completely separate from the script. Ive had several out-of-body experiences also during sessions, when I saw events actually happening some thousands of miles away. These remarks show that Jane retained memory of the trance sessions, or was partially conscious during those possessions. She felt she was participating in the Devils personality expression, with emotional richness, but, as she admits, on a very strange level.
~96~
Experiences of inner visions have been reported on a wide scale in recent years by those who engage in spirit communications, or who have received Teachers. If this is a recent phenomenon it would mean an increase in Spirit ability to more intimately enter human mind. He has now been released and is exercising his new power. When the Devil, through Edgar Cayce, prescribed cures for others at geographical distances he needed a name and address to locate them. Given that information he could prescribe those cures. Since he is totally aware of all activities currently transpiring on a planet, or at any past time, it is simple for him to flash that knowledge through a human mind that comes under his control. This was the phenomenon Jane Roberts reported when she saw distant contemporary scenes. His projections may vary, from scenes of the contemporary world, or from a world which he fabricates. If he invents pictorial scenes through pictures or visions, how can his subjects distinguish the difference? In either case they are projections from his mind. Even more, how can they deny the reality of that which they see? When he leads his cadre on their death marches he can carry them with any picture of beauty he desires, appropriately formed to their individual needs. Jane understood that her unique frame of mind, and mental abilities were crucial to Seths production. . . . I am aware of the fact that I was necessary to the production of Seths book. He needs my ability with words; even, I think my turn of mind. Certainly, my writing training aids in the translation of his material and helps give it form, no matter how unconsciously this is done. Certain personality characteristics are important too, I imagine C the agility with which I can switch the focus of my consciousness, for example. Vitally important to the Devils purpose is the creation of a group of mortals who would communicate with him. Jane was a willing agent for such recruitment. She taught methods for others to open themselves to Seth, and to permit him to come in. One technique was class dream time in which they would fall into a sleep while concentrating on him. Its not unusual that students should dream of Seth, of course, or that they should dream of me. But certainly Seth has achieved independent status in their eyes and has become a vehicle of instruction even in the dream state. In other words, besides producing the continuing Seth Material and this book, Seth has entered the minds and consciousness of many people. How truly diabolical he is, in recruitment of those who do not have their hearts centered on God.
~97~
He has never relaxed his efforts to build a cadre of people he can bring under his control. He continues with increasing intensity. In Session #511, the beginning of the Seth book, Seth makes remarks which show his true colors. Little do his followers recognize the significance of those statements, or how he makes fools of them. The remarks are so literally true. I have donned and discarded more bodies than I care to tell. Well, of course. He has entered the mind of untold millions of human beings. I can say this to each of my readers honestly; I am older than you are, at least in terms of age as you think of it. Well, of course. He is being perfectly honest. He is older than us by many hundreds of thousands, if not millions of years. I have been conscious before your earth was formed. To write this book C and in most of my communications with Ruburt (Jane) C I adopt from my own bank of past personalities those characteristics that seem appropriate. He surely does. He has the entire history of the earth on which to draw, and untold billions of human personalities. In another session he said: Your earth was very dear to me. I am very sure this is a precise statement, containing remorse. But he is insane. He has long since lost his mental equilibrium. Through Jane he told us much about his personal functioning, and the limitations which bind him. Language as you know it is a slow affair: letter by letter strung out to make a word, and words to make a sentence, the result of a linear thought pattern. Language, as you know it, is partially and grammatically the end product of your physical time sequences. You can only focus upon so many things at one time, and your language structure is not given to the communication of intricate, simultaneous experiences. I am aware of a different kind of experience, not linear, and can focus upon and react to an infinite variety of simultaneous events. Ruburt could not express them, and so they must be leveled out into linear expression if they are to be communicated. This ability to perceive
~98~
and react to unlimited simultaneous events is a basic characteristic of each whole self or entity. Therefore, I do not claim it as some feat that is exclusively my own. A recurrent question is how one personality, spirit or otherwise, can enter so many human minds simultaneously. This is a natural question for human mortals who think in linear, sequential fashion. We cannot help but think linearly, since we are sequential beings. We go from moment to moment; our minds go from point to point. But spirit beings are not bound by such time sequential limitations. This remark is uniquely interesting; he has ability to gather information simultaneously from many sensory sources, such as human mind, and to react to multiples of human contact points. Caligastia can perceive simultaneous earthly events, recall all events of all earth history, enter many minds at one time, converse with them, and direct them. Certainly, as a limited being within a limited space realm he has limits C he is not an infinite being. But for human mortals his abilities are stupendous, truly beyond our conceptual imagination. These remarks clearly and distinctly describe his abilities and the gamut of his functional capacities. In the days of classical spiritualist phenomena such frank confessions did not occur. Now he has minds who have been educated technically, who are conversant with higher conceptual levels, and who have new-age orientations C minds which did not exist commonly prior to World War II. Furthermore, he no longer has a fear of being found out. The days to his strike are now too short for any social influence to retard his plans. He also spoke of his ability to communicate with one human mortal, and not another, due to their psychological or spiritual limitations. This relates directly to Jesus remarks about those who know him and the Father. The latter are not susceptible to the entry of the Prince into their minds because of their love for the Father. But even so, no fallen spirit ever did have the power to invade the minds or to harass the souls of the children of God. Neither Satan nor Caligastia could ever touch or approach the faith sons of God; faith is an effective armor against sin and iniquity. It is true: He who is born of God keeps himself, and the wicked one touches him not. The Urantia Papers, Page 610. There is within (Janes) personality a rather unique facility that makes our communications possible. I will try to put this as simply as possible: there is within his psyche what amounts to a transparent dimensional warp that serves almost like an open window through which other realities can be perceived, a multidimensional opening that has to some extent escaped being clouded over by the shade of physical form. . . . I enter your reality through a psychological warp in your
~99~
space and time. In a manner of speaking, such an open channel serves much as a pathway between Ruburts personality and my own, so that communication is possible. He shows that each mortal is different in their limitations of psychic reception. Indeed, Jane was an exceptional recipient to his entry and use. Again, he indicates how he uses various mortal aliases for his nefarious purposes. He frankly admits that he assumes many different personalities; they are known to us as Lazaris, or Michael, or Ashtar, or innumerable others. I may teach the same lesson in many different ways, according to the abilities and assumptions that are inherent in any given (human) system in which I must operate. I use one portion of myself from many personalities that are available to my identity in these communications, as in this book. In other systems of reality, this particular Seth personality that I, the larger Seth identity adopt here, would not be understood. The emphasis is mine. In a session on March 18, 1970 he again referred to his using multiple human personalities: We are aware of what you would call our past selves, those personalities we have adopted in various other existences. He describes in some detail the limitations of his subjects, the processes he uses in establishing contact, how he reduces barriers for easy entry into their minds, and the methods he uses to obtain control. These are the techniques he now employs so extensively around the world to accomplish his deadly purpose. . . . before I can begin to work I must set up preliminary psychological structures and learn to know my pupils before teaching can even begin. I must have a thorough knowledge of the particular system of reality in which my pupil operates, of his or her system of thought, of the symbols that are meaningful. The stability of the pupils personality must be correctly gauged by me. The needs of the personality cannot be ignored but must be taken into consideration. The pupil must be encouraged but not overly extended while development continues. My material must be presented in such a way that it makes sense in the context in which the pupil understands reality, particularly in early stages. Great care must be utilized, even before serious learning can begin, that all levels of the personality develop at a more or less constant pace.
~100~
Each of these individual statements is incredibly important to our understanding of what he is doing. I must set up preliminary psychological structures and learn to know my pupils before teaching can even begin. When he first peruses his human subjects he determines the elements which constitute that individuals psychological profile. He can then adapt his relationship with them to set up the psychological structure he needs for his purpose. Note that this is a teaching process. He requires time to accomplish his purpose, not because of his limitations, but because of the linear time frame of the human mortal. Great care must be utilized, even before serious learning can begin, that all levels of the personality develop at a more or less constant pace. He must bring them along, cause them to grow, according to his purpose. They are tender shoots which require careful watering and nurturing. Importantly, he would not be able to use unstable personalities. The pupil must be encouraged but not overly extended while development continues. He uses those mental and psychological frameworks which are familiar and attractive to the individual. He will use their social, economic, political, ideational and religious contexts as suitable. Thus he can get his foot into their mental and psychological doors, in order that they not thrust him away. He will be warm and friendly to them. Often the material I present will initially be given without any sign of my presence, seemingly as a startling revelation. For no matter how carefully I present the material, it is still bound to change past ideas that are strongly a part of the pupils personality. What I say is one thing, but the pupil of course is thrust into psychological and psychic behavior and experience that may seem quite alien to him on a conscious level. Here again he is explicit. He knows that his purpose is alien to our social and psychological frameworks. Therefore, he must train his subjects to new attitudes and psychological reference that will permit him to control their behavior. They must be conditioned to rationales which they will then accept for the projects he has organized. What better rationale than a great religious cleansing of mankind,
~101~
aimed at a new world order? His absolutely necessity is that the thorns of the world be removed in order to achieve that new order. And what better vehicle for such cleansing than those who are dedicated to God C his definition of God? When I contact your reality, therefore, it is as if I were entering one of your dreams. I can be aware of myself as I dictate this book through Jane Roberts, and yet also be aware of myself in my own environment; for I send only a portion of myself here, as you perhaps send out a portion of your consciousness as you write a letter to a friend, and yet aware of the room in which you sit. I send out much more than you do in a letter, for a portion of my consciousness is now within the entranced woman as I dictate, but the analogy is close enough. Once again he is explicit in his description of possession; his consciousness is now within the mind of Jane. He can teach all the elements of his contact and control, but he cannot hint at his ultimate purpose. That would ruin his plan. And eventually, after working with his subjects for sufficient length of time, and with sufficient psychological justification, he can assume control. He can take over direct control of their bodies; he can Devil-possess.
~102~
~103~
~102~
CHAPTER ELEVEN An Angel of Light

2 Cor 11:14-15 And no wonder, for even Satan disguises himself as an angel of light. So it is not strange if his servants also disguise themselves as servants of righteousness. Their end will correspond to their deeds.
ILLUSTRATION #1 EDGAR CAYCE

Edgar Cayce was born on a farm near Hopkinsville, Kentucky on March 18, 1877. He died in Virginia Beach, Virginia on January 3, 1945. In between he was an agent for Caligastia. When a young boy, not more than seven or eight years of age, he came home from a walk one day to report that he had seen a vision. It was his habit to take his Bible with him on walks in the fields and woods. This day he was reading the vision of Manoah, Judges 13, in a secluded nook when the experience took place. Suddenly there was a humming sound, and a bright light filled the glade where he usually hid to read the wonderful stories. As he looked up, he saw a figure in white, bright as the noonday light, and heard a voice: Your prayers have been heard. What would you ask of me, that I can give it to you? The boy was not startled. Even then it seemed natural to see visions. Just that I may be helpful to others, he replied, especially to children who are ill, and that I may love my fellow man. It seemed almost as if somebody besides himself were speaking. The figure silently disappeared. His parents received the report with extreme skepticism; they assigned it to the influence of strong revivalist fervor then going on around the countryside. The next day his extraordinary experience prevented him from attending to his class work. He bungled his spelling lesson and was ordered to write the word cabin five hundred times on the blackboard. That evening he was so distracted he could not concentrate on his lessons. There seemed to be an invisible barrier between his eyes and the book. His father told him he would have to stay up until he had his lessons completed. As the evening wore on, long past his bedtime, he
11- An Angel of Light
~103~
began to nod over his books. He heard a voice, the same one he had heard in the woods, say Sleep, and we may help you. He fell asleep for a few minutes and awoke to discover that he knew every word in his spelling book by rote. Soon thereafter, when struck by a baseball, he suffered a bad head injury. In a semi-stupor he told his parents to prepare a poultice which, when applied to the base of his brain, astonishingly cured him by the next morning. That was the beginning of a life career of devising psychic cures for people. As an adult his technique was to loosen his tie and collar, lie down on a couch, fold his hands across his stomach, and prepare to go into a trance. At a certain point a bright light would flash across his closed eyes, and his eye lids would flutter. If, at that point, someone asked him a question about the health problem of another person, regardless of geographical distance, he would pronounce cures. He could often describe their personal circumstances and private affairs. He had amazing success with this technique. During his life he gave over 14,000 readings for more than 6,000 people. If no questions or problems were posed when he saw the light he would fall into a natural sleep state, and would not awaken until he was ready. Later, curious individuals posed many other kinds of questions to him, about ancient history, about their concerns for the future, about Jesus, and about an afterlife. This led to his prediction of great geophysical events, and his nickname of the Sleeping Prophet. But his psychic powers were not limited to the sleep state. Hugh Lynn Cayce, his son, reported that one time he named correctly the sequence of a deck of fifty-two playing cards, sight unseen. He continued to have visions at various periods in his life. One bright summer day in June, 1936 he was hoeing in his garden, when he heard a noise like a swarming of bees. He looked up, startled, and there in the sky saw a chariot, drawn by four white horses. He heard a voice saying, Look behind you. He turned and saw a man, with a shield and helmet, knee-guards and a cape, but no weapon of any kind. His countenance was like the light, his armor of burnished silver. He raised his hand in salute, and said, The Chariot of the Lord and thy horsemen thereof. Then he disappeared. Many of us might take these reports and conclude that Cayce was a true prophet, that his experiences were from God. And, indeed, they were from AGod,@ the god of this age. That AGod@ can appear as an angel of light. He can present himself in many different forms. But only to those who are open to him. The psychic constitution of Cayce made it possible for this god to appear to Cayce. His is not an isolated case. Part of Cayces many readings dwelt on the theme of reincarnation. Those remarks denigrated Jesus. Cayce might have been a Bible-totin man, but his trance statements were blasphemous.
~104~

He, our Lord, was the first of those who put on mortality that there might be the opportunity for those forces that had erred in spiritual things . . . He came, this soul we know as Jesus, in many different ages, as a spokesman to manifest the first idea. These incarnations (or those of the incarnations mentioned in the Bible) were given as Melchizedek, Joseph, Joshua, Jeshua, and finally Jesus.
Consider the blasphemy. Jesus was the first to reincarnate. He came in many previous ages, because of those forces that had erred in spiritual things. In other words Jesus had erred spiritually. To provide Jesus an opportunity to correct his errors he lived other lives. Thus in previous lives he was Melchizedek, Joseph, etc. Another phase of Cayces pronouncements which enchanted many people were his predictions of great earth changes. He stated that California would slide into the ocean in 68. If this was meant to be 1968 his prediction was a glaring failure. In a reading dated 1932 he stated that world political turmoil would result . . . from the shifting of the equilibrium of the earth itself in space, with those consequential effects on various portions of the world. The wars, the upheavals in the interior of the earth, and the shifting of the earth by the change in the axis as respecting the portions from the polaris center. In addition to his other powers Cayce sometimes spoke in foreign languages while in trance. How did Cayce possess such powers? The powers displayed by Cayce did not originate in his unaided mind. They came from another mind which entered his mind. Thus he knew the circumstances and conditions of distant persons. Through merging his own subconscious, his followers felt, with that of a Universal Consciousness that had existed since the beginning of time, recording everything that had ever happened. And he remembered so well, his followers insisted, because he had lived in all these ages, his soul ever recurring in a new body. The Universal Consciousness was none other than the Devils consciousness, a mind that has meticulous memory of every human mortal, of every moment, of all planetary time since he arrived here to rule this world. He could easily describe other people in other places, either living at the moment, or at any time or place in the past. He could diagnose their condition, and prescribe cures because he is so thoroughly familiar with human ailments and their causes. He knows all world languages inside out and could speak them through Cayces body when he usurped mind control. He could estimate great earth changes because he is intimately familiar with the past cataclysmic upheavals of the earth; he knows the weak points of the earths crust. Furthermore, he has a sickness
~105~
about past lives. He greatly desires to capture a time when he was still loyal to God. He would love to return to that time. But he made an irrevocable decision. He brought trouble and woe to untold millennia of time. And he cannot forgive his Creator for the sentence pronounced upon him. He has vengeance in his heart. He will do anything, regardless of cost, and with the utmost cost he can devise, to ruin the plans of his Creator. Contrary to the common notion of a mild-mannered Bible-totin Christian, Cayce was a chain smoker, with a volatile temperament. In many fits of rage he fired his personal secretary, only to reinstate her hours later. He also was unable to maintain himself financially throughout his life. When his boys were small the family had no income. In one case they had no wood to heat their home; electric lines-men sawed up a line pole and gave it to them. Around that time they had accumulated an $86 bill at the local grocer, who stopped supplying them. Someone gave them the money, but Cayce went out and bought fishing gear. At another time Cayce was arrested in New York for fortune telling. At one period in his life he received considerable attention. A New York financier gave him the funds to build a hospital in Virginian Beach. But the man lost his wealth in the 1929 stock market crash, and Cayce had to close the hospital. During World War II, fueled by the fervor of national crisis, Cayce intensified his efforts to help others. He would give several readings a day, thus exhausting his personal reserves. During this period he often entered into a state of involuntary trance; the Spirit would take over without Cayces conscious permission. With faith in such a man, and with such performances, many foolish and ignorant individuals committed their eternal careers.
ILLUSTRATION #2 SUN MYUNG MOON

On Easter morning in 1936, Sun Myung Moon was deep in prayer on a Korean mountainside when Jesus Christ appeared to him and told him that he had an important mission to accomplish in the fulfillment of Gods providence. He was then sixteen years old . . . The Holy Spirit Association of the Unification of World Christianity, (HSA-UWC), has produced several books showing the teachings of Sun Myung Moon. Moon does no writing of his own; his spoken words are recorded by his disciples and then put into printed form. Moon was converted to Christianity as a youth and studied the Bible intensively until Korea was liberated from the Japanese at the end of World War II. At that time he began a public ministry, teaching those principles he had gleaned from his deep study, and as revealed to him from his psychic and visionary experiences. Korea was soon partitioned into north and south, with the Communists
~106~
taking over in the north where Moon was then ministering. The Communists were determined to stamp out the opium of the people. Because of Moons aggressive evangelism and his large following he came to the attention of the Communist authorities. He was arrested and thrown into jail, where he was beaten and left for dead. He survived but was soon placed into a forced labor camp at Hung-nam, of such strenuous physical labor and with little food, that most inmates died. He again survived, bolstered by his belief that he was a special emissary to the world, and, after two years and ten months, was even give an award for his outstanding work record. When the Korean war began Moon survived bombardment of Hung-nam and was freed by United Nations forces on October 14, 1950. He became part of a large exodus over mountain trails to South Korea where he formally began the Unification Church in 1954. He engaged in many preaching tours, and was soon traveling around the world. The church grew by leaps and bounds until, in 1975, there were headquarters in more than forty countries, and centers in more than 120 cities in the United States. His fame was sufficient, and his public statements on morality and the values of family life of such merit, that he came to the attention of many world leaders and was given audience by President Eisenhower. His more notable public events were mass marriages. In 1968 he married 430 couples in one ceremony in Seoul. In 1970 he married 777 couples from ten different countries. Recently he married 10,000 couples in Seoul in one ceremony, testimony to his continuing influence. He emphasized the value of the present industrial age, and the physical aspects of the coming Kingdom of God. He believed the United States was Gods instrument to save the world, and that Communism was the true Antichrist of this age. Meanwhile Moon accumulated considerable personal wealth. His church engaged in massive financial and real estate investments, including such enterprises as the Washington Times newspaper and Insight magazine. After great controversy over his recruiting techniques in the late 1970s, and his arrest for income tax evasion in the early 1980s, the church experienced a steady decline. Moons teachings show the origin of his psychic and visionary experiences. Moses performed even greater miracles than Jesus did. If God had wanted His son to be crucified, He did not need 4,000 years to prepare the chosen people. He could have sent Jesus to a tribe of barbarians, where he could have been killed even faster. John the Baptist unconsciously witnessed to Jesus when he was moved by the spirit, but he did not dream of Jesus really becoming the Lord or savior.
~107~
Jesus was less than John in many ways. John was highly educated. Jesus was a carpenters assistant. John was highly esteemed, and was recognized as a great prophet. Jesus was ignorant of academic knowledge. Moon believed himself as the Lord of the Second Advent because Jesus failed his mission. Moon was to be the physical Messiah while Jesus, because of his failure, was the spiritual Messiah. Jesus came to establish a perfect world in his lifetime, not over a period of centuries. The Second Coming was made necessary only by lack of fulfillment at the time of the first coming. Moon believed he held a status equal to that of Jesus. Just as Jesus revealed himself with the new truth, the Lord of the Second Advent will reveal himself with Gods new truth in our time. He also believed he might suffer crucifixion as did Jesus. At the same time they may be in the process of trying to crucify the Lord of the Second Advent himself if he appears in a manner different from their own experiences. Then, may I ask, what would you do if the Lord returned to earth as a man of the flesh? What would you do? I am telling you, the Lord of the Second Advent will in fact appear as a son of man with flesh and bones. Thus we see the high status he held for himself. I learned them from Jesus. Yes, I learned them from God. I am going to speak about some new revelations from God which are very vital to the understanding of all Christians . . . I am only bearing witness to the truth. Sometimes testimony to the truth is a painful task. Yet it is my duty to fulfill. You may ask again, With what authority do you say these things? I spoke with Jesus Christ in the spirit world. And I spoke also with John the Baptist. This is my authority. The mission of the Messiah is a physical, realistic one. As a man he must come up from the bottom of human misery. He must come from the most miserable nation and lift the human status from the slave
~108~

position, to the servant position, to the adopted child position and to the direct child position by physically putting together the Kingdom of Heaven here on earth. That is the mission of the Messiah.
Moons perversions were a blend of his visionary experiences, and their driving influence upon him, his handicapped recognition of New Testament teaching, his lack of perception of Old Testament prophecy, and his concentration on the physical rather than the spiritual. That lack of perception was rooted in his experience of Caligastia as an angel of light. Jesus warned us that many would come in his name, claiming to be the Messiah. Moon is only one of many who make such claims today. But how are we to judge between visions provided by the rebel Prince, and those which come from God? What is the essential difference between Pauls experience on the road to Damascus, and those of Cayce or Moon? We are now in a position to answer those questions more precisely. The difference lies between those phenomena which are not produced within human mind, and those which are. When Jesus appeared to Paul he came external to Paul, presenting himself to Pauls exterior senses. The appearance of Caligastia depends on the manipulation of neural currents, invading the mind of his human targets. Without question those experiences had profound effects on those men. Both Cayce and Moon were driven to extraordinary lengths by their psychic experiences. And both fell prey to the diabolical enticements of a spirit entity who was unconcerned about their well being. These are examples of the types of phenomena which will shortly break out upon our world in more amazing display. For references see: 1. Edgar Cayce, The Sleeping Prophet, Jess Stearn, Doubleday and Company, New York, 1967 2. Edgar Cayce on Jesus and His Church, Anne Read, under the editorship of Hugh Lynn Cayce, Coronet Communications, Paperback edition, New York, 1970. The following are on Sun Myung Moon: 3. A Prophet Speaks Today, W. Farley Jones, Ed., HSA-UWC Publications, New York, 1975. 4. Crazy For God, Christopher Edwards, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1979 5. Gods Warning To The World, Moons message from prison, edited by Chung Hwan Kwak, HSA-UWC, New York, 1985.
12 - Oahspe
~109~
CHAPTERTWELVE John Ballou Newbrough And OAHSPE

The first edition of Oahspe, an immense Revelation, was printed in 1882 in New York City. It had 856 pages, on 7 X 9 inch page, double column, with approximately 730 words per page, for nearly 625,000 words. My copy is a photo reprint of the first 1882 edition published by Ray Palmer in Amherst, Wisconsin in 1960. The Book of Oahspe had a singular purpose: to preempt and pervert the impending Urantia Revelation. Caligastia knew of the imminent gift to mankind. He attempted to distract and deny the true Revelation. The title page of Oahspe is styled thus:
OAHSPE
A NEW BIBLE
IN THE
WORDS OF JEHOVIH
AND HIS
ANGEL AMBASSADORS
The title page continues with: A Sacred History of the Dominions of the Higher and Lower Heavens on the Earth for the past TWENTY FOUR THOUSAND YEARS, together with a synopsis of the cosmogony of the universe; the creation of the planets; the creation of man; the unseen worlds; the labor and glory of gods and goddesses in the etherean heaven C with new commandments of Jehovih to man of the present day. With revelations from the second resurrection, formed in words in the thirty-third year of the Kosmon Era. The date of publication is given as Anno Kosmon 34 for 1882.
~110~
The book had no table of contents but carried a publishers synopsis which listed the sections: ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Book of Jehovih Book of Sethantes, Son of Jehovih First Book of the First Lords Book of Ahshong, Son of Jehovih Second Book of Lords Synopsis of Sixteen Cycles Book of Aph, Son of Jehovih The Five Lords First Book Book of Sue, Son of Jehovih Book of Appollo, Son of Jehovih The Lords Third Book Book of Thor, Son of Jehovih The Lords Fourth Book The Lords Fifth Book Book of Osiris, Son of Jehovih Book of Gods Word Book of Fragapati, Son of Jehovih
And so on. Note that this list contains a mixture of names C from the Bible, from pagan mythology, and invented (neologisms): Jehovih, Ben, Osiris, Thor, Appollo, Aph, Fragapati, and Es. Each book is divided into verses with an obvious attempt to imitate the Bible. The first verse reads: After the creation of man, the Creator, Jehovih, said unto him: That thou shalt know thou art the works of My hands, I have given thee capacity for knowledge, power and dominion. This was the first era. The book is filled with dark and morbid illustrations. It contains numerous strange symbols in scripts which are a blend of Chinese, Egyptian hieratic, ancient Semitic, and fanciful. There appears to be no sensible thread behind these various symbolic presentations, except to influence ignorant minds with seeming erudition. All illustrations could have come directly out of the unassisted mind of Newbrough. Throughout the book insidious statements are made to denigrate God, pervert religious teaching, or otherwise misguide the reader. For example, on page 8 the chief of angels is named God. Sethantes is the first God of the earth and her heavens. These are revelations from the second resurrection. And so on.
12 - Oahspe
~111~
The most notable attribute of this grotesque work is its attempt to preempt the revelation of the Urantia Papers. From the many inhabited planets in the universe, to a universe administration, to the intimate relationship of divine beings with this world, the parallels are strong. But the motive of Caligastia was more. He used Oahspe as a vehicle to degrade that future presentation. He conditioned minds to macabre pictures of the heavenly realms, thus setting the stage for rejection of the true Revelation. For example, as can be seen from the above list, the book contains sections which denote Sons of Jehovih, implying the concept of divine Sons of God. The fact of multiple Sons of God is plainly indicated in the Bible but is not part of Jewish or Christian theology. Such presentation on the heavenly realms is one of the most noble and most informative revelations of the Urantia Papers. Fortunately, by the time of the true Revelation, general social awareness of Oahspe had faded. Another perversion is in time perspectives covering many thousands of years, again an attempt to anticipate exposition and revelation on long evolutionary human history. Yet again, Oahspe attempts to anticipate exposition of divine judgments. Although not explicitly or clearly discussed, it carries ideas of destiny in its presentations of Prophecy, of Judgment, and of Gods Kingdom on Earth. It is not my purpose here to discuss these teachings from Oahspe. I merely provide examples to indicate how the Dark One has been at work. Different Section Synopses provide examples of the Oahspe teachings, a reflection of the darkness of the origins. Following are two examples.
Book of Cosmogony and Prophecy

The plans of the corporeal worlds; overthrow of the doctrine of attraction of gravitation; no force existing from one planet to another; neither light nor heat comes from the sun to the earth; the atmospherean vortices; the solar vortex; the great serpent (phalanx); defection of mans measurements of heavenly bodies; defections of the observations; magnifying power of vortices; cause of the photosphere, polar lights, velocities, magnetism, life, growth; meteors, nebula, clouds, wind and wind currents; ocean currents; how to regulate the temperature of the earth by man; how to bring rain showers; cause of tornadoes, waterspouts, famines, epidemics, and how to prophesy by astronomical knowledge.
~112~
Book of Judgment
Gods judgment upon the Brahmins, Buddhists, Christians, Mohammedans, Confucians and Jews; the numbers of judgment, in the words of God; of the Jews; of resurrections; a day of judgment; God decreeth against infidelity; of the Fathers kingdom on earth; God showeth how to judge the angels that minister to mortals; of the second resurrection; of ascetics; God judgeth charities; God showeth how to do charity; God judgeth the missionaries; God judgeth dominions; judgment against the man of promise; against war; God judgeth of exclusiveness; China and Japan thrown open; God declares against the government of man.
PERSONAL HISTORY
John Ballou Newbrough was born June 5, 1828, on a Springfield, Ohio farm. He grew up to be a big man, powerful, vigorous and adventurous. After college he went to the goldfields of California and Australia. He settled in New York City where he became a dentist. He married and became the father of a son and a daughter. A second marriage gave him another daughter. He had an interest in spiritualism from early manhood. Together with a friend, Edwin Augustus Davis, he interviewed many mediums, even entertaining them in his home in an effort to learn all he could of the occult. Davis was a photographer and cooperated with Newbrough in taking pictures of spiritual phenomena. However both men were dissatisfied with the calibre of spirit communications being received and Newbrough particularly felt that there must be something more interesting and practical. He earnestly desired to know how the angels lived, the plan of the universe, and the true facts of spiritual existence. He believed that if he purified himself he might establish higher contacts. Two different accounts exist of the origins of Oahspe. I offer both to provide a more thorough examination of the performances of Caligastia. In addition, I offer a description of another sordid spiritualist event to obtain a broader view of how the Devil operated a century ago. The first account came from a diary of the grandson of Edwin Augustus Davis. Following is that account. It has obviously been edited to reflect good literary style. Ray Palmer included this account as an ADDENDUM in his photo reprint of Oahspe.
12 - Oahspe
~113~
THE ORIGIN OF OAHSPE, VERSION #1

One morning in 1870, Newbrough went to the home of his friend Davis who lived on Sixth Avenue, near the old Hay Market, and said: Ive come for your advice. I had quite an experience about 4 a.m. this morning. I was sleeping nicely when I felt a hand on my shoulder. A voice said, Wake up doctor. Everything is all right. I only want to ask you a question and we will go. I sat up and answered, Yes, if I can. The voice said, Would you like to perform a mission for Jehovih? I rubbed my eyes and saw that the room was lit up with pillars of a soft light so pleasing to the eyes that it was indescribable. I saw great numbers of beautiful spirits, or angels. They did not have wings. I spoke, What is the mission, so that I may know whether to say yes or no. The answer came back, Jehovih would like you to live spiritually for ten years and at the end of that time we will come back and tell you what it is that we desire, for your body and mind are not sufficiently perceptible now. You must be pure. What do you mean by living spiritually? We want you never to kill anything, or eat anything that breathes; meat, fish, birds, reptiles, etcetera. Live on nuts, fruit, vegetables. You dont need so much food, as you are too heavy now; you need to lose weight. One other thing is very important: you must help people; give your services to people who need dental help, without pay, if they cannot pay. Do charity work; by individual charity you change the persons thoughts. They will think of you as a good man, and will send out good thoughts to you. You will need all the good will you can get. I answered, This will be quite a change of living for me. I will let you know. We already know your answer; it will be yes! the voice said, and then the lights dimmed and went out, and the atmosphere changed back to its normal darkness. I got up and wrote down everything that had happened, then I drank a glass of milk and came over to talk to you. Davis and Newbrough discussed the matter for hours. During the conversation Newbrough revealed that he thought he had recognized three of the spirits, although he had not had a good look at them. He asked Davis if he thought the adventure was real, or only a dream. John, said Davis I dont believe it was a dream. Id say, go ahead. I myself dont like meat or fish and would have no objection to going on the same diet so that you will have assistance in keeping to it, as it will certainly be hard on you to be so different in public eating habits. Perhaps the ten year wait will be worth it when you find out what it is that you are to do.
~114~
At 4 a.m. one morning late in 1880, Newbrough was awakened from his slumber to find the same mysterious and beautiful lights filling his room. He sat up and demanded: Am I worthy? The same voice spoke, You have done well. You have passed our test. We know that you feel more healthy. Now we want you to buy a typewriter and place it on this table. We will thereafter awaken you one hour before dawn each morning and you will sit in this chair before the typewriter and put your hands on the keys. You will buy plenty of paper and keep it always ready to use I dont know how to use a typewriter. We will control your hands and arms, and perform the task for you, so dont worry. You must not look at what is written until it is finished. There was further discussion and instruction, then the pillars of light dimmed and went out. On the morning of January 1, 1881, having followed all instructions, the first writing session began at 4 a.m. As Newbrough later told it to his friend, Davis: To my amazement as I sat in the chair, my hands went up and started to pound at the keys. It seemed to me that I was half asleep but I saw everything I was doing. I saw no spirits but I knew they were using my body and thought. I looked at my hands and fingers; they were going like mad. Then it occurred to me that it was fantastic. The papers seemed to pile up fast on the right side of the typewriter. As the days went by, I was doing more and more. At first I was thinking what am I writing about? My mind seemed blank, but I had never felt better in my life. I always locked my door after me and it was locked when I came back. I noticed, though, that there was a blank paper over the pile I had finished and a paperweight on top. It was oblong in shape. As I left my room the next morning I took particular notice of how the paperweight lay on the stack of finished work. When I returned that evening I wanted to see if it had been moved but it had not. But to my surprise my bed had been made. Everything had been dusted and cleaned. I said to myself: The spirits are certainly working hard around here. I heard a loud laugh and the voice said, We are. We dont want you to worry about a thing. We are taking care of you, and no harm can come to you. Remember this! Every morning, before sunrise, until December 15, 1881, Newbrough wrote at his Sholes typewriter, at a speed physically almost impossible, considering the crudity of this first typewriter. Finally the manuscript was complete. In 1882 the book was published. Newbrough kept the very first copy off the press and presented the second copy to his friend Edwin Augustus Davis in appreciation for his assistance over the years.
12 - Oahspe
~115~
HOW OAHSPE WAS WRITTEN, VERSION #2

The following account was addressed as a personal letter from John Newbrough to the editor of The Banner of Light in Boston Massachusetts. It was placed as a detached insert within the pages of the photocopy version of the 1882 edition printed by Ray Palmer, Amherst, Wisconsin, 1960. Some two years ago, Oahspe was mechanically written through my hands by some intelligence other than my own. Many Spiritualists are acquainted with this automatic movement of the hands, independent of ones own volition. There are thousands and thousands of persons who have this quality. It can also be educated, or rather, the susceptibility to external power can be increased. In my own case I discovered, many years ago, in sitting in circles to obtain spiritual manifestations, that my hands could not lie on the table without flying off into these tantrums. Often they would write messages, left or right, backward or forward; nor could I control them any other way than by withdrawing from the table. Sometimes the power thus baffled would attack my tongue, or my eyes, or my ears, and I talked and saw and heard differently from my normal state. Then I went to work in earnest to investigate spiritualism and I investigated over 200 mediums, traveling hundreds of miles for this purpose. Often I took them to my own house and experimented with them to my hearts content. I found that nearly all of them were subject to this involuntary movement of the hands, or to entrancement. They told me it was angels controlling them. In the course of time, about ten or fifteen years, I began to believe in spiritualism. But I was not satisfied with the communications; I was craving for the light of heaven. I did not desire communications from friends or relatives, or information about earthly things; I wished to learn something about the spirit world; what the angels did, how they traveled, and the general plan of the universe. So after a while I took it into my head that wise and exalted angels would commune better with us if we purified ourselves physically and spiritually. Then I gave up eating flesh and fish, milk and butter, and took to rising before day, bathing twice a day, and occupying a small room alone, where I sat every morning half an hour before sunrise, recounting daily to my Creator my short comings in governing myself in thought and deed. In six years training I reduced myself from two hundred and fifty pounds down to one hundred and eighty; my rheumatism was all gone and I had no more headaches. I became limber and sprightly. A new lease on life came over me. Then a new condition of control came upon my hands; instead of the angels holding my hands as formerly, they held their hands over my head, (and they were enclothed with sufficient materiality for me to see them), and a light fell upon my own hands as they lay on the table. In the mean time, I had attained to hear audible angel voices near me. I was directed to get a type-
~116~
writer which writes by keys like a piano. This I did, and applied myself vigorously to learn it, but with only indifferent success. For two years more the angels propounded to me questions relative to heaven and earth, which no mortal could answer very intelligently. I always look back on these two years as an enigma. Perhaps it was to show me that man is but an ignoramus at best; perhaps I was waiting for constitutional growth to be good. Well, one morning the light struck both hands on the back and they went for the typewriter, for some fifteen minutes, very vigorously. I was told not to read what was printed, and I had worked myself into such a religious fear of losing this new power that I obeyed reverently. The next morning, also before sunrise, the same power came and wrote (or printed rather) again. Again I laid the matter away very religiously, saying little about it to anybody. One morning I accidentally (seemed accidental to me) looked out of the window and beheld the line of light that rested on my hands extending heavenward like a telegraph wire toward the sky. Over my head were three pairs of hands fully materialized; behind me stood another angel with her hand on my shoulders. My looking did not disturb the scene; my hands kept right on, printing C printing. For fifty weeks this continued every morning, half an hour or so before sunrise, and then it ceased, and I was told to read and publish the book Oahspe. The peculiar drawings in Oahspe were made with pencil in the same way. A few of the drawings I was told to copy from other books, such as Saturn, the Egyptian ceremonies, etc. Now during all the while I have pursued my vocation (dentistry), nor has this matter nor my diet (vegetables, fruits, and farinaceous food), detracted any from my health or strength, although I have continued this discipline for upward of ten or more years. I am firmly convinced that there are numberless persons who might attain to marvelous development if they would thus train themselves. A strict integrity to ones highest light is essential to development. Self-abnegation and purity should be the motto and discipline of every one capable of angel communion. J. B. NEWBROUGH New York, January 21, 1883 The differences between the two accounts are obvious. Either the grandson of Davis did not have a good record of the conversation between Newbrough and his grandfather, or Newbrough is styling his report to condition the response of his audience. These descriptions broaden our view of spirit performances. He not only comes as an angel of light, he can come as multiple angels. He can create beams of light and, seemingly, mechanical effects, although the making of a bed and cleaning of a bedroom does not seem the kind of task in which a spirit being
12 - Oahspe
~117~
would engage himself. These, and the placing of a paper weight upon a stack of papers, may have been from Newbroughs imagination, given his intense concentration, or later faulty memory. The intensity of Newbrough is obvious. He was dedicated. How truly unfortunate he did not understand the source of these miracles.
A SORDID SPIRITUALIST ACCOUNT

The following account was presented by Newbrough as part of the Commentary at the end of Oahspe. The first introductory statement is his. The remaining paragraphs are those of the reporter. I have myself seen angels take on corporeal forms, to all appearance, by the side of mortals. But, rather than boast of my own experience, I here introduce two well-known men of indisputable integrity, Rev. Francis Monck, a natural sargis, and the Rev. Archbishop Thomas Colley, M. A, (formerly of the Royal Navy, England). Mr. Colley says: Standing forth thus plainly before us, the psychic or spirit-form was seen to grow out of his left side. First, several faces, one after another, of great beauty appeared, and in amazement we saw, and as I was suffered to stand close up to the medium, even touching him, I saw most plainly, several times, a perfect face and form of exquisite womanhood partially issue from Dr. Monck about the region of the heart. Then, after several attempts, a full-formed figure C in a nebulous condition at first, but growing solider as it issued from the medium C left Dr. Monck and stood, a separate individuality, two or three feet off, bound to him by a slender attachment as of gossamer, which at my request, Samuel, in control, severed with the mediums left hand; and there stood embodied a spirit-form of unutterable loveliness, robed in attire, spirit-spun, a meshy web-work from no mortal loom, of a fleeciness inimitable, and of transfiguration whiteness, truly glistening. But Dr. Kennedy was now invited to draw equally near and realize more closely with me the marvel of the separate identity of the spirit-form from the medium, and as we stood, looking with all our soul upon the mighty fact of spirit-birth from mortal man, Dr. Monck, still entranced, placed the lovely visitant from the inner world between us, and affording it the support, each of an arm, we advanced with our sweet spirit-companion some steps further into the room. Meanwhile, holding the hand of the spirit-arm that rested on mine, I felt the wrist, palm, fingers and finger nails; it was in every respect a living hand, answering to my touch, yielding to pressure, having nature, weight and substance, and all things pertaining to humanity, but it was damp and stone-cold; and the thought passed through my mind, how, like steam, first invisible, congealed, is then seen as cloudy vapor, which precipitated, may finally take solid form in ice, this figure at my side and, by a somewhat analogous process, been rendered visible and tangible from the vital force, viewless and imponderable
~118~
of the medium, being, under the chemistry, not yet understood of the higher life, congealed into the nebulous condition instanced of the forms first appearance, further to solidify into the lovely creature we supported and wistfully beheld. Then, after a few minutes further stay, sliding back into the medium, the angel gradually disappeared. The next form was none other than Dr. Moncks old earth-friend, fellow-student, brother minister and chief spirit-control, Samuel Wheeler. When he, in like manner issuing forth, first stepped from the medium into separate being, Dr. Monck was unconscious, under control of Lily, and her voice through him contrasted very markedly with the voice of the materialized form C it, to the very syllable, being the voice of Samuel as when speaking through the medium. But this did not satisfy our spirit friend, for the marvel of the nights effort had yet to culminate. Conditions being so good, Samuel thought he might dematerialize and awake Dr. Monck, and then be able to rematerialize with the medium in his normal state, fully alive to all that transpired, and conscious of the astounding fact we were to witness; and successful, beyond all conception of the mystery, was this most unique experiment, for, after the first alarm, Dr. Monck had passed away, and after the pain and nervous snatchings he felt in the process of his friends evolution from himself had subsided, medium and spirit-form conversed naturally together, and the astonishment and glee of the former was only equaled by our profound sense of inability adequately to grasp at first the vast significance of this amazing demonstration of occult power. Equally with the child-form did Samuel Wheeler show all the attributes of humanity; and, in his case, reason and ripe manhood, as in hers, girlishness and simplicity. He was not unlike the medium in stature, form and bearing; and one of our company having intimately known Samuel in the earth-life (being frequently one of his congregation when our spirit-friend was, as our medium also was, a Baptist minister), unhesitatingly declared that this Samuel Wheeler was that Samuel Wheeler, and none other . And now a new sensation was in store for us. A spirit-form, eight inches taller than Dr. Monck, grew from him by degrees, and building itself up into giant proportions, with muscular limbs developed like statuary of bronze, and of the color, there came into disconnected, independent, vigorous life, apart from the medium, an ancient Egyptian. From its general aspect, dress and manner, I addressed it as such at once without a moments doubt or hesitation. For Ancient Egypt has been a favorite study with me, and in modern Egyptians I have, when in the East, endeavored to trace the ancient masters of Israel and the sciences, and have dreamed amid the ruins of the Temple of Isis, and sketched the blue tuniced and turbined descendant of the Pharaohs, and have pleasant recollections of an Egyptian Fellah, Zozab, who used to accompany me through the bazaars, and pioneer me through the intricacies of the Suez;
12 - Oahspe
~119~
and, if ever Bulwers Arbaces the Egyptian, in the Last Days of Pompeii, had existence other that in the mind of the author, it was here embodied in the materialized form I handled and closely scrutinized last night. The vitality and power of the spirit were remarkable; it walked with manly step and dignified carriage round and about the room, before and behind us, without fear or hesitation; appeared curious about, and leisurely inspected, the furniture and ornaments of the room; took up a chair and placed it on the table; brought us books and other things, and then, taking the chair from the table, placed it close to mine and sat down at my side. Meanwhile, I closely introspected it, and felt its anatomy, the medium standing at my left side while Mahedi (the Egyptian) was seated at my right. I now got the spirit to measure hands, placing its palm on mine. The hand (stone-cold, while the mediums was burning hot) was small, like all Easterns, and the wrist was also small, but the arm was massive, muscular, bronzed and hairy. Its eyes were black and piercing, but not unkindly; its hair lank and jet, and moustaches and beard long and drooping; its features full of life and expression, yet Sphinx-like. Its head-dress was very peculiar, a sort of metal skullcap with an emblem in front, overhanging the brow, which trembled and quivered and glistened. I was suffered to feel it, but, as I did so, it seemed to melt away like a snow-flake under my touch, to grow solid again the moment after. This report adds to our catalog of spirit performances. Here the apparitions are in more intimate physical contact. They also are in finer definition. Was this the result of a more experienced medium? Was it due to greater belief on the part of the audience? The contradictions encountered in this report show a lack of reliable witness on important details. However, those contradictions do not deny the validity of the phenomena. Several questions arise about these sordid performances. ! The spirit voice of a young woman was used in all three spiritualist sessions: Sylvia, Twilight, and Lily. The purpose of this practice by Caligastia is to set a friendly tone for the meeting. Most individuals in our social order do not perceive a threat from a playful, roguish young woman, or one who exhibits girlish simplicity. ! There is an obvious concern about severing the ectoplasmic connection to the medium. When Mrs. Daiches walked up and down the room with her ectoplasmic mother, father, and son, did the connection trail behind them? Did Mr. Colley provide a true report of such severing, or did he falsely attempt to confirm the reality of ectoplasmic forms? ! If strict instructions are given to not touch the ectoplasmic forms, since they emanate from the body (mind) of the medium, and touching will disturb the medium, did those spirit forms lay their hands upon Mrs. Daiches arms without her touching them? If so, did Mr. Colley once again distort his report
~120~
to demonstrate the reality of those forms? If he reached for the emblem on the skullcap of the Egyptian to find it fade beneath his touch, why would the hands of the spirit forms possess such solidity? Were the fingers and nails, cold to the touch, mere elaboration to once again support the phenomenon he witnessed? Is the ectoplasmic substance part of the mental substance of the medium? Did Marcus Bach really feel the wispy enfoldment and kiss from his Asister?@ ! The condition of the spiritualist performance depends upon the trance state of the medium. The medium must release control of his mind to be possessed by the spirits. Therefore, it is not probable that Dr. Monck was able to produce Samuel Wheeler in a fully conscious state and to converse freely with his own mental production. Many puzzles confront us in our attempts to obtain a tighter grip on the power of this fallen Prince.
13 - The Devils Bible
~121~
CHAPTER THIRTEEN The Devils Bible A Course in Miracles

The most insidious deception ever to circulate on this world is A Course In Miracles (ACIM). It was received through the mind of Helen Schucman. It is a work of total spiritual insanity, intended to completely disrupt reality in the minds of its students, and to bring them to absolute servitude to the Inner Voice, the Light, and the God who comes to dwell within their minds. That is its only purpose. Any other assumed purpose is peripheral to the attainment of that end. Helen described her circumstances and herself: Psychologist, educator, conservative in theory and atheistic in belief, I was working in a prestigious and highly academic setting. And then something happened that triggered a chain of events I could never have predicted. . . . The head of my department . . . unexpectedly announced that he was tired of the angry and aggressive feelings our attitudes reflected, and concluded that, there had to be another way. As if on cue I agreed to help him find it. Apparently the Course was the other way. In such environment Helen went seeking a way to help. The result was Devil entry into her mind. Three startling months preceded the actual writing, during which time Bill suggested that I write down the highly symbolic dreams and descriptions of the strange images that were coming to me. Although I had grown more accustomed to the unexpected by that time, I was still very surprised when I wrote, This is a course in miracles . . . That was my introduction to the Voice. It made no sound, but seemed to be giving me a kind of rapid, inner dictation which I took down in a shorthand notebook. The writing was never automatic. It could be interrupted at any time and later picked up again. It made me very uncomfortable, but it never seriously occurred to me to stop. It seemed to be a special assignment I had somehow, somewhere agreed to complete. It represented a truly collaborative venture between Bill and myself, and much of its significance, I am sure, lies in that. I would take down what the Voice said and read it to him the next day, and he typed it from my dictation. I expect he had his special assignment, too. Without his encouragement and support I would never have been able to
~122~

fulfill mine. The whole process took about seven years. The Text came first, then the Workbook for Students, and finally the Manual for Teachers. Only a few minor changes have been inserted in the Text, and some of those more personal references that occurred at the beginning have been omitted. Otherwise the material is substantially unchanged.
Caligastia is now presenting himself as Christ to his subjects. Not Jesus C but Christ. There is a profound reason why he comes as Christ, and not as Jesus. According to apostolic views Jesus was the Christ because he was the Messiah, the one promised in the Old Testament for future rulership of this world. This view was then applied to Jesus by making the title Christ into another name for Jesus C Jesus Christ. Over the centuries the term Christ lost its original meaning. It became symbolic of Jesus, and different notions about love, about service, about God, and so on. The image of Jesus as the Messiah, Jesus as God, Jesus as Creator, and Jesus as Savior all became blended into a blurry and ill defined figure. Thus its specific application to a Messiah who would rule this world in righteousness, and care for his people in his shepherd arms, lost definitive content. The author of ACIM then uses that blurry image to corrupt and deceive. The Christ image used in ACIM is raw perversion. ACIM does not contain the word Messiah. Its image of Christ has nothing to do with the Messiah, or future rulership of this world. The image of Christ used in ACIM is intended to delude all those minds who have little or no idea of the Messiah. They carry around false images of AChrist,@ even though many of those people look to Jesus for salvation. They believe the Christ of ACIM is Jesus. ACIM is addressed to that ignorance. Then the word Christ falsifies the true Jesus. The First Coming of Christ is merely another name for the creation, for Christ is the Son of God. The Second Coming of Christ means nothing more than the end of the egos rule and the healing of the mind, Text, page 58. The alteration of definitions in ACIM is pervasive, subtle, and blasphemous. Note that the First Coming of Christ was not the visit of Jesus, born as the babe of Bethlehem, and God incarnate. According to the author of ACIM it was something dramatically different: another name for the creation. Thus he completely denigrates the significance of Jesus birth. When he says that Christ is the Son of God he does not mean Jesus. He means himself as this Christ C as a Son of God. He truly was a Son of God, a divinely created Son. He has right to make such claim. But then he perverts by making himself this false Christ. Thus he can say that the Second Coming of Christ is the end of the egos rule and the healing of the mind, not the return of
~123~
Jesus from his heavenly throne. This is his coming, as this false Christ. He not only removes the significance of Jesus birth; he removes the significance of Jesus heavenly rulership. The one ego he does not expose is his. The ego he is talking about is that of human beings. He wants to bring an end to their ego. As long as they express themselves, as personalities, he cannot control their minds. He must demolish them as free-will agents. He does so by attacking their independence of mind and spirit, i.e., their egos. He continues: I was created like you in the first, and I have called you to join me in the second. I am in charge of the Second Coming . . . Clearly, The personality behind these remarks is not Jesus. This personality was created. He was a created divine Son of God, one of those heavenly Sons. Jesus was his Creator. While he attempts to throw a cloud over his remarks he cannot help but proclaim who he really is. His purpose is to frame the mind of his students to new concepts of the Second Coming. He is in charge of that Coming, the coming of the rebel Prince. Jesus said he was would return; therefore he can use that promise for this perversion. He is this Coming, as he openly states. He calls it the Second Coming, a usurpation of Jesus true return, in order to betray the loyalties of those who follow him. He urges his students to join him in this Coming. Little do they know what they are joining. On Text page 152, italicized and set apart in a single sentence, intended to emphasize, is this remark: Christ is in me, and where He is God must be, for Christ is part of Him. Note the convoluted logic of this remark: 1. By stating that Christ is in me, the author shows that he is not Christ. 2. But this is his deceptive image of Christ, not Jesus. 3. He then states that where this deceptive image of Christ is, God must be. This states that God is within him. Or carried to the further implication, he is God. But he is not God with Jesus; he is God with this false Christ. 4. If we follow the personal pronouns with their capitalization, this Christ, this false image of Jesus, is part of Christ. Clearly the logic is circular. The statement is intended to obfuscate and confuse, implying that the remarks pertain to Jesus, and Jesus being within the author. To his agents, confused by this convoluted logic, he thus becomes God, for where this Christ is, God is. A few pages later, 187, occurs the following:
~124~

Christ is at Gods altar, waiting to welcome His Son. But come wholly without condemnation, for otherwise you will believe that the door is barred and you cannot enter. The door is not barred, and it is impossible that you cannot enter the place where God would have you be. But love yourself with the love of Christ, for so does your Father love you. You can refuse to enter, but you cannot bar the door that Christ holds open. Come unto me who holds it open for you, for while I live it cannot be shut, and I live forever. God is my life and yours, and nothing is denied by God to His Son.
Here the Son is the human mortal. This Christ is waiting for him at Gods altar. This human is asked to enter the door which this Christ holds open for him. While this Christ lives this door cannot be shut. The human being is invited to enter the door of the mind of this devious being. When the human enters the door, Christs life, and hence, by assumption, Gods life, becomes the life of the Son. This Christ, this God, will not deny him the same mind, the mind of the Devil Prince. The human being must enter without condemnation, meaning he must make no evaluation and no judgments concerning the author and source of this invitation. He pretends he will live forever, when we know his time is short. But that pretense is merely the bait to get the human mortal to enter his mind.
Mind Control
I was appalled when I read ACIM. It teaches you to relinquish your mind, and your choosings, and give them to that Superior Mind. (Bold emphasis is mine.) This is a course in mind training, Text pg 13. What you do comes from what you think. You cannot separate yourself from the truth by >giving= autonomy to behavior. This is controlled by me automatically as soon as you place what you think under my guidance. Whenever you are afraid, it is a sure sign that you have allowed your mind to miscreate and have not allowed me to guide it, Text pg 25. My control can take over everything that does not matter, while my guidance can direct everything that does, if you so choose. Fear cannot be controlled by me, but it can be self-controlled. Fear prevents me from giving you my control. The presence of fear shows that you have raised body thoughts to the level of the mind. This removes them from my control, and makes you feel personally responsible for them. This is an obvious confusion of levels, Text pgs 24-25. Numerous occasions within the text repeat, over and over again, this request to turn the mortal mind over to that Superior Mind.
~125~
You must change your mind, not your behavior, and this IS a matter of willingness. You do not need guidance except at the mind level. Text pg 25. . . . the mind can elect what it chooses to serve. The only limit put on its choice is that it cannot serve two masters. If it elects to do so, the mind can become the medium by which spirit creates along the line of its own creation. If it does not freely elect to do so, it retains its creative potential but places itself under tyrannous rather than Authoritative control. As a result it imprisons, because such are the dictates of tyrants. To change your mind means to place it at the disposal of TRUE Authority, Text pg 10. If one assumes the Superior Mind is Jesus note what Jesus is demanding of you. He is asking you to turn your mind literally over to his control. Jesus never, in the flesh, taught such practices or philosophy. Jesus always taught the dignity of self, and the gift of choosing given us by the Father. Jesus would never usurp such gift. By giving your mind over to control by this Superior Mind you fall into the very trap it teaches you are not falling into, that of slavery to another mind. And this is the real test of this insidious teaching. How can one distinguish between liberty of sonship with God by giving oneself to the will of God through open and voluntary dedication, and slavery sonship by giving over personal mind control? As he plainly states, you cannot serve two masters. If you do not completely give your mind to him, you are still clinging to your own mind control. Paul wrote about the spirit of sonship. Rom 8:14-15: For all who are led by the Spirit of God are sons of God. For you did not receive the spirit of slavery to fall back into fear, but you have received the spirit of sonship. When we cry, >Abba! Father!= it is the Spirit himself bearing witness with our spirit that we are the children of God . . . ACIM relies on our inability to distinguish between these two forms of sonship, and of spirit. We do so only because we live in a state of great spiritual confusion. If one assumes the Superior Mind was other than Jesus, these demands take on deeply insidious and deceptive forms. Now the request becomes highly dangerous. If the Voice is not that of Jesus it would make such demands only to gain control of your thinking, and of your mind, in order to convert you to his purposes. This Superior Mind is asking you to take your choices away from yourself by giving those choices and your mind over to him. Then you are no longer burdened with choice. This relinquishment is highly appealing because you then give
~126~
that burdensome responsibility to his mind. In the days when churches could define and frame our choices, in a world of relative simplicity, moral and spiritual choices were black and white. But the present world of spiritual tolerance and moral relativity now makes our choices uncertain, and fraught with personal dilemmas. We ache for clarification and for means of removing such burdens from ourselves. If a Voice or Superior Mind comes along offering to make those choices we are receptive to his offer. The possible depth of deception is easily recognized by the fact that we have no means to test the actual source. The SPIRIT is not discernible to our senses; he appears only by the mechanism of entry into human mind. You can now better appreciate use of the word Christ. If this Voice is not Jesus, then this Superior Mind is using the word Christ as part of his deception. He does not use the name Jesus because he is not Jesus. He uses the title Christ because it misrepresents who he actually is.
World As Illusion
Consider how the Manual describes Jesus: The name of Jesus is the name of one who was a man but saw the face of Christ in all his brothers and remembered God. So he became identified with Christ, a man no longer, but one with God. The man was an illusion, for he seemed to be a separate being, walking by himself, within a body that appeared to hold his self from Self, as illusions do. Yet who can save unless he sees illusions and then identifies them as what they are? Jesus remains a Savior because he saw the false without accepting it as true. And Christ needed his form that He might appear to men and save them from their own illusions. Manual pg 83. The presentation clearly makes Jesus different from Christ. Jesus saw the face of Christ in all his brothers. This reaffirms our conclusion that this Christ is being redefined as a nebulous conceptual notion to show that Jesus was not Christ. According to this teaching Jesus was an illusion. He became this perverted Christ when he recognized the illusion. Thus Jesus was not a perfected being, living upon earth in human form, but merely another human mortal, an illusion, who needed this perverted Christ to save himself and others from their own illusions. The mechanism of Jesus salvation is his recognition of the illusion (the false) without accepting the illusion as true. In other words, Jesus needed salvation because of his own twisted mind! What blasphemy! And then, so insidiously, he switches the identity of the subject of presentation. Now it is no longer Jesus, but this horrible Christ who becomes the subject of action. This Christ needed the form of Jesus that he might appear to men to save them from their own illusions. Stated otherwise, this Superior Mind, taking
~127~
on the guise of Christ, uses the form of Jesus to obtain a foothold in our thinking. Frankly and openly, he states that he needed the form of Jesus in order to accomplish his purpose. But the fools who accept these teachings do not recognize the significance of the remark. This lack of perception shows how deeply they carry those very illusions they think they will now remove. Only deluded minds would fail to recognize the illusions created by these teachings. The words illusion and illusions are used 340 and 462 times respectively in ACIM. This high count denotes the dependency of ACIM on this concept. The Superior Mind teaches that all reality is an illusion. Typical is the following: Illusions are investments. They will last as long as you value them. Values are relative, but they are powerful because they are mental judgments. The only way to dispel illusions is to withdraw all investment from them, and they will have no life for you because you will have put them out of your mind. While you include them in it, you are giving life to them. Except there is nothing there to receive your gift. Text pg 118. Throughout ACIM one encounters this switching of subjects from sentence to sentence in a paragraph, and confusion in concepts. The first and second sentences here are about illusions. The third sentence is about values. Then back to illusions. Them in it means illusions in your mind. Nothing there means no content in your mind to receive the gift of illusions. From beginning to end in ACIM the Superior Mind redefines reality to alter our perceptions of the world as we actually experience it, and the way we react to it. What do your scripts reflect except your plans for what the day SHOULD be? And thus you judge disaster and success, advance, retreat, and gain and loss. These judgments all are made according to the roles the script assigns. The fact they have no meaning in themselves is demonstrated by the ease with which these labels change with other judgments, made on different aspects of experience. And then, in looking back, you think you see another meaning in what went before. What have you really done, except to show there was no meaning there? But you assigned a meaning in the light of goals that change, with every meaning shifting as they change. Only a constant purpose can endow events with stable meaning. But it must accord ONE meaning to them all. If they are given different meanings, it must be that they reflect but different purposes. And this is all the meaning that they have. Can this be meaning? Can confusion be what meaning means? Perception cannot be in constant flux, and make allowance for stability of meaning anywhere. Fear is a judgment never justified. Its pres-
~128~

ence has no meaning but to show you wrote a fearful script, and are afraid accordingly. But not because the thing you fear has fearful meaning in itself. Text pg 596.
Here the Superior Mind uses our natural instinct for planning our daily lives to alter what we should expect from life. Disaster and success in our material activities, advance and retreat from our goals, gain and loss in our relationships C all have no meaning. Note that to maintain conceptual confusion the disaster and success, advance and retreat, gain and loss are not given content. They are offered with conceptual vacuity in order to perpetrate the confusion which the Superior Mind pretends to clarify. A student can fill the vacuous concepts with any content he wishes. This seductive inducement to uncertainty is used throughout the paragraph, and throughout the text of ACIM. Any person who accepts the text seriously cannot help but end in confusion C part of a scheme to alter perceptions of reality. It cannot be emphasized too often that correcting perception is merely a temporary expedient. It is necessary only because misperception is a block to knowledge, while accurate perception is a stepping-stone towards it. The whole value of right perception lies in the inevitable realization that all perception is unnecessary. This removes the block entirely. You may ask how this is possible as long as you appear to be living in this world. That is a reasonable question. You must be careful, however, that you really understand it. Who is the >you= who are living in this world? Spirit is immortal, and immortality is a constant state. It is as true now as it ever was or ever will be, because it implies no change at all. It is not a continuum, nor is it understood by being compared to an opposite. Knowledge never involves comparisons. That is its main difference from everything else the mind can grasp. Text pg 54. Can any rational mind believe that all perception is unnecessary? The mind which created this material is truly insane. There is one goal: to alter human perception of reality. The purpose of the workbook is to train your mind in a systematic way to a different perception of everyone and everything in the world. The exercises are planned to help you generalize the lessons, so that you will understand that each of them is equally applicable to everyone and everything you see. The only general rules to be observed throughout, then, are: First, that the exercises be practiced with great specificity, as well be indicated. This will help you to generalize the ideas involved to every situation in which you find yourself, and to everyone and everything in it. Second, be sure that you do
~129~
not decide for yourself that there are some people, situations or things to which the ideas are inapplicable. This will interfere with transfer of training. The very nature of true perception is that it has no limits. It is the opposite of the way you see now. The overall aim of the exercises is to increase your ability to extend the ideas you will be practicing to include everything. This will require no effort on your part. The exercises themselves meet the conditions necessary for this kind of transfer. Some of the ideas the workbook presents you will find hard to believe, and others may seem to be quite startling. This does not matter. You are merely asked to apply the ideas as you are directed to do. You are not asked to judge them at all. You are asked only to use them. It is their use that will give them meaning to you, and will show you that they are true. Remember only this; you need not believe the ideas, you need not accept them, and you need not even welcome them. Some of them you may actively resist. None of this will matter, or decrease their efficiency. But do not allow yourself to make exceptions in applying the ideas the workbook contains, and whatever your reactions to the ideas may be, use them. Nothing more than that is required, Workbook pgs 1-2. Here the blatant grasping of human mind by this Superior Mind is so clearly described I am astounded that any human being would submit to such insane requests. He states unequivocally that he will introduce concepts into their minds which they will not welcome and will actively resist, but this does not matter. He is after one thing: control of their minds for a purpose which they would, as normal human beings, actively resist. He has a purpose for them which is beyond the bounds of natural human behavior. They should not decide for themselves.
The Sanctity of Human Mind

On all the evolutionary worlds of space nothing is more sacrosanct than human mind. Human mind is the arena in which mortal beings evaluate their problems, resolve their dilemmas, and make their decisions. Human mind is the realm in which personal choice and personal growth takes place. These elements of human action are the bedrock of human worth. The purpose of the evolutionary worlds is to create human mortals and to give them opportunity to make their own decisions. In such manner they experience personal growth. This vital necessity is the criteria for opportunity to advance to more cosmic undertakings in the heavenly realms. Without decisions and without growth they could not prepare for those more demanding careers. In order to preserve that context of growth it becomes crucially important that no spirit being interfere with free-will exercise. Human mortals must be left without interference by higher-order beings in that process.
~130~
And here lies the crux of the choice which faces us today. A rebellious spirit being has been left free on this planet to bring such interference C if human mortals so choose. When a spiritist, a person seeking a spirit guide, or someone desiring to channel information from the spirit world, sits down and says, Spirit, please talk with me, then a spirit surely will do so. This irrevocable act opens that human mind to Spirit Entry. The devastating difficulty is that the human mortal cannot specify which spirit will enter because he does not know. He has opened his mind indiscriminately to all spirits. The partner devastation is that only rebel spirits will enter human mind. Such spirits do not respect human mortals. Those spirits will employ any human mortal who makes himself available to them. Furthermore, those spirits have no other means to now exercise their power. We have been positively informed of such matters. I repeat the quotation here because I feel it is so important. Angels do not invade the sanctity of the human mind; they do not manipulate the will of mortals; neither do they directly contact with the indwelling Spirit of the Father. The guardian of destiny influences you in every possible manner consistent with the dignity of your personality; under no circumstances do these angels interfere with the free action of the human will. Neither angels nor any other order of universe personality have power or authority to curtail or abridge the prerogatives of human choosing. The Urantia Papers, Page 756. The single most important attribute God gave us is our own choosing. Neither angels nor any other order of universe personality have power or authority to curtail or abridge the prerogatives of human choosing. Only through relinquishing of those prerogatives can that Superior Mind assume your choosings for you. If you give yourself to him he will enter your mind to take control of your choices. And he will use you for his insidious and deadly purposes. All those human mortals who permitted spirit minds to enter their minds, all those spiritists and channelers, have sold themselves, truly, to the Devil. Helen Schucman was one of those. Wayne Dyer, a noted psychologist, supports such sordid and treacherous practices. By such process untold millions of human mortals will be lost to eternity. What a deadly cost for those human beings who advocate such philosophies and practices but who truly do not know what they are doing.
Are You Ego?

In ACIM the Superior Mind does not endow you with personality; he endows you with ego. The word personality occurs one time in ACIM. The word ego occurs 922 times.
~131~
Why does this Superior Mind call you an ego? As we all know ego is a bad thing. We commonly believe it is that part of us which is selfish. By identifying you as an ego the Superior Mind can denigrate your intrinsic worth as a divinely endowed personality. After he has you thinking you are worthless he can transform you into a being subject to his definition and his manipulation. Consciousness, the level of perception, was the first split introduced into the mind after the separation, making the mind a perceiver rather than a creator. Consciousness is correctly identified as the domain of the ego. The ego is a wrong-minded attempt to perceive yourself as you wish to be, rather than as you are. Yet you can know yourself only as you are, because that is all you can be sure of. Everything else IS open to question. Text pg 37 The separation, of course, was the rebellion. But this Superior Mind cannot afford to identify it as the rebellion. He must transform history into delusion. Incredibly, according to this Superior Mind, consciousness was introduced at the time of the rebellion. Prior to that time human mortals did not have consciousness; they were creators, not perceivers. Can any sane mind believe such insanity? I certainly and deeply desire to be a maturing son of my heavenly Father. That is what I wish to be. According to this teaching, when I mold my life to that goal, I engage myself in an ego exercise. Consider the twisted concepts. The ego is the questioning aspect of the post-separation self, which is made rather than created. It is capable of asking questions but not of perceiving meaningful answers, because these would involve knowledge and cannot be perceived. The mind is therefore confused, because only One-mindedness can be without confusion. A separated or divided mind MUST be confused. It is necessarily uncertain about what it is. It has to be in conflict because it is out of accord with itself. This makes its aspects strangers to each other, and this is the essence of the fear-prone condition, in which attack is always possible. You have every reason to feel afraid as you perceive yourself. This is why you cannot escape from fear until you realize that you did not and could not create yourself. You can never make your misperceptions true, and your creation is beyond your own error. That is why you must eventually choose to heal the separation. Do you really believe that you are incapable of perceiving meaningful answers? Is you mind confused because you have not given over your mind to that Superior Mind? Will you come into accord with yourself when you join that Mind? You can speak from the spirit or from the ego, as you choose. If you speak from spirit you have chosen to >Be still and know that I am God.= These words are inspired because they reflect knowledge. If you speak from the ego you are disclaiming knowledge instead of affirming it, and are thus dis-spiriting yourself. Do not embark on useless journeys,
~132~

because they are indeed in vain. The ego may desire them, but spirit cannot embark on them because it is forever unwilling to depart from its Foundation. Text pg 47.
What is this spirit? It is his spirit, the spirit of the Superior Mind. When you acquire his spirit, when >you are still and know that he is God,= you become his. In his eyes, and for his purpose, any other journey is useless. This AHoly Spirit@ is the mechanism of miracles. He recognizes both Gods creations and your illusions. He separates the true from the false by His ability to perceive totally rather than selectively. Text pg 3. Thus the Superior Mind becomes the Holy Spirit and usurps your right of choice. He looks beyond your ego, to the center of your mind, where he enters when you give yourself to him. The Superior Mind cannot give you human respect or dignity. The word respect, with that meaning, occurs six times in ACIM. The word dignity occurs one time. He regards you as, and teaches that your are, insane. The word insane occurs 195 times in ACIM; the word insanity 65 times. Consider how much vigilance you have been willing to exert to protect your ego, and how little to protect your right mind. Who but the insane would undertake to believe what is not true, and then protect this belief at the cost of truth? Text pg 56.
The Atonement
What is the purpose of this Superior Mind? He has a plan; he is going to create Miracles; he is going to bring the Atonement. He will employ all his human servants to the most devastating personal actions this world has ever seen. The forgiven are the means of the Atonement. Being filled with spirit, they forgive in return. Those who are released must join in releasing their brothers, for this is the plan of the Atonement. Miracles are the way in which minds that serve the Holy Spirit unite with me for the salvation or release of all of Gods creations. Text pg 7. The forgiven here are his human agents. They have been released by this Superior Mind from their illusions; now they must release in turn. They must release their brothers and sisters. This is the plan of the Atonement. He will do this through Miracles. But what is the plan? How will the release be wrought? Atonement is for all, because it is the way to undo the belief that anything is for you alone. To forgive is to overlook. Look, then, beyond error and do not let your perception rest upon it, for you will believe what your perception holds. Accept as true only what your brother is, if you would know yourself. Perceive what he is not and you cannot know
~133~
what you are, because you see him falsely. Remember always that your Identity is shared, and that Its sharing is Its reality. You have a part to play in the Atonement, but the plan of the Atonement is beyond you. You do not understand how to overlook errors, or you would not make them. It would merely be further error to believe either that you do not make them, or that you can correct them without a Guide to correction. And if you do not follow this Guide, your errors will not be corrected. The plan is not yours because of your limited ideas about what you are. This sense of limitation is where all errors arise. The way to undo them, therefore, is not OF you but FOR you. Text pgs 156-157. Here the Superior Mind states explicitly that the plan is beyond those who give themselves to him. Therefore, he does not reveal that plan. Contrast such teaching with Jesus plan of personal salvation, and the criteria explicitly described for our entry into the kingdom of heaven. Because his followers are not adequate to knowledge of the plan, they cannot voluntarily execute the steps of such plan, nor arrange their lives to help fulfill that plan. They must become robotic slaves to execution of his plan. Miracles are habits, and should be involuntary. They should not be under conscious control. Consciously selected miracles can be misguided, Text pg 1. And what will he do with these miracles? He will bring the Atonement, the mechanism by which he will get even with God. He will make God atone for the judgment brought against him. He will bring release of Gods people by murdering them. They then will go directly to heaven, and no longer be a burden on this world. I am the only one who can perform miracles indiscriminately, because I am the Atonement. You have a role in the Atonement which I will dictate to you. Ask me which miracles you should perform. This spares you needless effort, because you will be acting under direct communication. The impersonal nature of the miracle is an essential ingredient, because it enables me to direct its application, and under my guidance miracles lead to the highly personal experience of revelation. A guide does not control but he does direct, leaving it up to you to follow. >Lead us not into temptation= means >Recognize your errors and choose to abandon them by following my guidance,= Text pg 7. Miracles are part of an interlocking chain of forgiveness which, when completed, is the Atonement. Text, pg 1.
~134~
As I studied the Text it becomes glaringly obvious that the Superior Mind is after one goal and one goal only: execution of his plan through control of human mind.
His Purpose Is Murder

Incredible as it may seem the purpose of the Superior Mind is murder. He stated so explicitly. How many times does that word occur in ACIM? Thirty-nine. Accept the dream He gave instead of yours. It is not difficult to change a dream when once the dreamer has been recognized. Rest in the Holy Spirit, and allow His gentle dreams to take the place of those you dreamed in terror and in fear of death. He brings forgiving dreams, in which the choice is not who is the murderer and who shall be the victim. In the dreams He brings there is no murder and there is no death. The dream of guilt is fading from your sight, although your eyes are closed. A smile has come to lighten up your sleeping face. The sleep is peaceful now, for these are happy dreams. Text 542. If reality is a dream, an illusion, he can substitute his dream. If you rest in his Spirit he will bring you gentle dreams to take the place of those you thought you saw in the world as you perceived it. Then there is no choice as to the murderer and the victim; they do not exist. Now there is no murder and there is no death. He has taken you out of the world of true reality to place you in his world of true illusion. In this manner the dream of guilt fades from the sight of the murderers. How will he do it? First, by preparing you psychologically, by altering your perception of reality. Then he will strip your mind by giving you his SPIRIT, and his light. Miracles enable you to heal the sick and raise the dead because you made sickness and death yourself, and can therefore abolish both. You are a miracle, capable of creating in the likeness of your Creator. Everything else is your own nightmare, and does not exist. Only the creations of light are real. Text pg 2. Would you like to create in the likeness of this Creator? Anything else is your own nightmare. Your life of world reality does not exist when you give yourself to him. He takes you into his reality, into the greatest nightmare of all time. And your deluded mind will stumble over it. Do you have a twinge of fear that everything is not right? Never mind, he has a fix for that also. All fear is ultimately reducible to the basic misperception that you have the ability to usurp the power of God. Of course, you neither can nor have been able to do this. Here is the real basis for your escape from
~135~
fear. The escape is brought about by your acceptance of the Atonement, which enables you to realize that your errors never really occurred. Only after the deep sleep fell upon Adam could he experience nightmares. If a light is suddenly turned on while someone is dreaming a fearful dream, he may initially interpret the light itself as part of his dream and be afraid of it. However, when he awakens, the light is correctly perceived as the release from the dream, which is then no longer accorded reality. This release does not depend on illusions. The knowledge that illuminates not only sets you free, but also shows you clearly that you ARE free. Text pg 15. He will direct his people to reach right into the Altar, the literal heart of his victims who no longer are victims. The Atonement can be accepted within you only by the releasing of the inner light. Since the separation, defenses have been used almost entirely to defend AGAINST the Atonement, and thus maintain the separation. This is generally seen as a need to protect the body. The many body fantasies in which minds engage arise from the distorted belief that the body can be used as a means for attaining >atonement.= Perceiving the body as a temple is only the first step in correcting this distortion, because it alters only part of it. It DOES recognize that Atonement in physical terms is impossible. The next step, however, is to realize that a temple is not a structure at all. Its true holiness lies at the inner altar around which the structure is built. The emphasis on beautiful structures is a sign of the fear of Atonement, and an unwillingness to reach the altar itself. The real beauty of the temple cannot be seen with the physical eye. Spiritual sight, on the other hand, cannot see the structure at all because it is perfect vision. It can, however, see the altar with perfect clarity. Text pgs 17-18.
The Devils Bible

The devastating impact of the acts of the Devils agents upon their personal psychology is impossible to estimate. It may run the gamut from suicide to bliss. In order to salvage a semblance of psychological order out of his murderous rampages he needs a vehicle to offer succor to those agents. He also needs a theology by which they can justify their acts. ACIM is designed to do that. When they return to their homes from their errands, as they clean their weapons, as they wash their clothes, and as they take their showers, they will have reminders of their acts. If he is to preserve them for another errand he needs some means to hold them until his deadly service is done. I offer selections from ACIM to demonstrate the truly insidious nature of this deadly work C when viewed from the perspective of its true purpose.
~136~

The communication link that God Himself placed within you, joining your mind with His, cannot be broken. You may believe you want it broken, and this belief does interfere with the deep peace in which the sweet and constant communication God would share with you is known. Yet His channels of reaching out cannot be wholly closed and separated from Him. Peace will be yours because His peace still flows to you from Him Whose Will is peace. You have it now. The Holy Spirit will teach you how to use it, and by extending it, to learn that it is in you. God willed you Heaven, and will always will you nothing else. The Holy Spirit knows only of His Will. There is no chance that Heaven will not be yours, for God is sure, and what He wills is as sure as He is. You will learn salvation because you will learn how to save. It will not be possible to exempt yourself from what the Holy Spirit wants to teach you. Salvation is as sure as God. His certainty suffices. Learn that even the darkest nightmare that disturbs the mind of Gods sleeping Son holds no power over him. He will learn the lesson of awaking. For God watches over him and light surrounds him. Can Gods Son lose himself in dreams, when God has placed within him the glad call to waken and be glad? He cannot separate himself from what is in him. His sleep will not withstand the call to wake. The mission of redemption will be fulfilled as surely as the creation will remain unchanged throughout eternity. You do not have to know that Heaven is yours to make it so. It IS so. Yet to know it, the Will of God must be accepted as your will. Text pg 250. My mind will always be like yours, because we were created as equals. It was only my decision that gave me all power in Heaven and earth. My only gift to you is to help you make the same decision. This decision is the choice to share it, because the decision itself is the decision to share. It is made by giving, and is therefore the one choice that resembles true creation. I am your model for decision. By deciding for God I showed you that the decision can be made, and that you can make it. Text 70-71. O my child, if you know what God wills for you, your joy would be complete! And what He wills has happened, for it was always true. When the light comes and you have said, Gods Will is mine, you will see such beauty that you will know it is not of you. Out of your joy you will create beauty in His Name, for your joy could not more be contained than His. The bleak little world will vanish into nothingness, and your heart will be so filled with joy that it will leap into Heaven, and into the Presence of God. I cannot tell you what this will be like, for your heart is not ready. Yet I can tell you, and remind you often, that what God wills for Himself He wills for you, and what He wills for you is yours. Text 184-185.
~137~
This is a very simple course. Perhaps you do not feel you need a course which, in the end, teaches that only reality is true. But do you believe it? When you perceive the real world, you will recognize that you did not believe it. Yet the swiftness with which your new and only real perception will be translated into knowledge will leave you but an instant to realize that this alone is true. And then everything you made will be forgotten; the good and the bad, the false and the true. For as Heaven and earth become one, even the real world will vanish from your sight. The end of the world is not its destruction, but its translation into Heaven. The reinterpretation of the world is the transfer of all perception to knowledge. Text 195-196. The Atonement has always been interpreted as the release from guilt, and this is correct if it is understood. Yet even when I interpret it for you, you may reject it and do not accept it for yourself. You have perhaps recognized the futility of the ego and its offerings, but though you do not want them, you may not yet look upon the alternative with gladness. In the extreme, you are afraid of redemption and you believe it will kill you. Make no mistake about the depth of this fear. For you believe that, in the presence of truth, you might turn on yourself and destroy yourself. Little child, this is not so. Your >guilty secret= is nothing, and if you will but bring it to the light, the Light will dispel it. And then no dark cloud will remain between you and the remembrance of your Father, for you will remember His guiltless Son, who did not die because he is immortal. And you will see that you were redeemed with him, and have never been separated from him. In this understanding lies your remembering, for it is the recognition of love without fear. There will be great joy in Heaven on your homecoming, and the joy will be yours. For the redeemed son of man is the guiltless Son of God, and to recognize him IS your redemption. Text 224-225. This is the miracle of creation; THAT IT IS ONE FOREVER. Every miracle you offer to the Son of God is but the true perception of one aspect of the whole. Though every aspect is the whole, you cannot know this until you see that every aspect is the same, perceived in the light and therefore one. Everyone seen without the past thus brings you nearer to the end of time by bringing healed and healing sight into the darkness, and enabling the world to see. For light must come into the darkened world to make Christs vision possible even here. Help Him to give His gift of light to all who think they wander in the darkness, and let Him gather them into His quiet sight that makes them one. Text 241.
~138~

As miracles in this world join you to your brothers, so do your creations establish your fatherhood in Heaven. You are the witnesses to the Fatherhood of God, and He has given you the power to create the witnesses to your fatherhood in Heaven. The miracle that God created is perfect, as are the miracles that you establish in His Name. They need no healing, nor do you, when you accept them. Yet in this world your perfection is unwitnessed. God knows it, but you do not, and so you do not share His witness to it. Nor do you witness unto Him, for reality is witnessed to as one. God waits your witness to His Son and to Himself. The miracles you do on earth are lifted up to Heaven and to Him. They witness to what you do not know, and as they reach the gates of Heaven, God will open them. For never would He leave His Own beloved Son outside them, and beyond Himself. Text 242. Before a holy relationship there is no sin. The form of error is no longer seen, and reason, joined with love, looks quietly on all confusion, observing merely, >This was a mistake.= And then the same Atonement you accepted in your relationship corrects the error, and lays a part of Heaven in its place. How blessed are you who let this gift be given! Each part of Heaven that you bring is given you. And every place in Heaven that you will fill again with the Eternal Light you bring, shines now on you. The means of sinlessness can know no fear because they carry only love with them. Child of peace, the light HAS come to you. The light you bring you do not recognize, and yet you will remember. Who can deny himself the vision that be brings to others? And who would fail to recognize a gift he let be laid in Heaven through himself? The gentle service that you give the Holy Spirit is service to yourself. You who are now His means must love all that He loves. And what you bring is your remembrance of everything that is eternal. No trace of anything in time can long remain in minds that serve the timeless. And no illusion can disturb the peace of a relationship that has become the means of peace. Text 448.
And that is what the coming great spiritual struggle is all about. God is going to find out who are his true children. What a terrible price we all shall pay.
14 - ACIM - An Examination
~139~
CHAPTER FOURTEEN A Course in Miracles An Examination

A Internet letter to Steve Zebielski, dated November 5, 1997. (Although this letter repeats much that I discussed in the preceding chapter, I offer it here as elucidation on many of the arguments of those who accept and believe in ACIM as a revelation from Jesus.) Dear Steve: This is a response on your recent assertions about A Course In Miracles. You stated: Being a reader of the UB since 1977 and the Course since 1984 I have never been ashamed of or embarrassed by any matter related to the UB with the one exception of this that Matt states above, that some UB readers think the Course is written by the devil. I have stated many times on urantial (Internet discussion list) that a superficial look at the Course cannot reveal the depths of its profound spirituality. Words are redefined and then used according to the redefinitions throughout the Course. If one jumps in and begins to read here and there the Course will seem contrary to some of the ideas we hold dear as UB readers. But this is simply a result of not understanding the true meaning of the words used. I would like to challenge anyone to send me any idea the Course teaches which he or she thinks is an erroneous idea and I will interpret it as I believe Jesus, who is the real author of the Course, means for it to be interpreted. And please, one >erroneous idea= per post. (UB refers to The Urantia Papers.) This is my response. Several years ago I did a detailed study of ACIM. That study left no doubt in my mind of the origin of that work, or of its ultimate purpose. For reader convenience, ACIM is divided into three complementary volumes. Volume 1. The TEXT. 622 pages. Volume 2. WORKBOOK FOR STUDENTS. 478 pages. Volume 3. MANUAL FOR TEACHERS. 88 pages. I have copies of all three volumes.
~140~
I also have two computer search programs. One is a Folio Views NFO file on Volume I only. The second is an ASCII file on all three volumes using a Brigham Young University search program. I shall list some facts for you. The name Jesus never occurs in the TEXT or in the WORKBOOK FOR STUDENTS, except for one biblical quote on page 67. The name Jesus is limited to 16 other uses on five pages in the MANUAL FOR TEACHERS. Therefore, the name Jesus is limited to six of 1188 pages, all concentrated at the end of ACIM. An essential question is this: If Jesus is the author of ACIM, why does he not identify himself? Why does he exclude reference to himself to these six pages, concentrated to the very end of the three-volume set? ACIM uses the word Christ in 365 paragraphs. 130 of those are in the TEXT. (The Folio Views search program identifies words based on folios. For both ACIM and The Urantia Papers those are paragraphs. If a word occurs more than once in a paragraph Folio does not report such multiple use. Therefore the statements I make must be understood on the basis of this word recognition.) The Urantia Papers never use the word Christ for Jesus except in historical or date references. The word Christ in The Urantia Papers is limited to a title for Michael. Refer to my paper on Christ Names in The Urantia Papers. Unknown to most students/believers of The Urantia Papers, the word Christ is not applied to Jesus because of the identity of the Messiah. The word Christ is the Greek equivalent of the Hebrew Messiah. Jesus was not the Messiah. Therefore, The Urantia Papers avoid identifying Jesus as the Christ. ACIM never uses the word Messiah. I attempted to understand why the text of ACIM does not use the word Jesus. This word is used in 3,073 paragraphs in The Urantia Papers. I also wanted to know why it avoids the word Messiah, used in The Urantia Papers in 121 paragraphs. Upon further study I noted that never, in any of the text of 1188 pages is a direct claim made that Jesus is the author of ACIM. Such notion is a myth, and is a deduction based on interpretation of the text. It is also based on the idea that Jesus and Christ are equivalent. Since the word Christ is used so many times, all students assume this means Jesus. The Christ in ACIM is not the Christ of Christian religious tradition. The Christ of ACIM is a modern, New-Age, abstruse concept divorced from the idea that the Christ (the Messiah) will be our future planetary ruler. Such traditional views are not admissible within the conceptual framework of ACIM. The Urantia Papers are definite that Melchizedek will be our future planetary ruler, serving as vicegerent for Jesus-Michael. See pages 514, 611, 632, and so on. Therefore, the Old Testament prophecies on the Messiah must apply to Melchizedek, not to Jesus. Note Psalm 110, Psalm 2, Psalm 72, and so on.
~141~
The name Melchizedek, so important to our planetary future never occurs in ACIM. This name occurs 528 times in The Urantia Papers. The name Machiventa Melchizedek, the specific designator for our future planetary ruler, occurs 112 times in The Urantia Papers. This glaring absence of the name of our future planetary ruler is due to the fact that this planet has no future in ACIM. ACIM, Page 6: >Heaven and earth shall pass away means that they will not continue to exist as separate states. Note that ACIM defines heaven and earth as states of being, not as places. Page 70: The Holy Spirit is your Guide in choosing. He is in the part of your mind that always speaks for the right choice, because He speaks for God. He is your remaining communication with God which you can interrupt but cannot destroy. The Holy Spirit is the way in which Gods Will is done on earth as it is in Heaven. Both Heaven and earth are in you, because the call of both is in your mind. I shall return to the theme that the Holy Spirit is in the mind. Since Heaven and earth are within human mortals, according to this teaching, they must be states, and not places. Page 194: The world as you perceive it cannot have been created by the Father, for the world is not as you see it. God created only the eternal, and everything you see is perishable. Therefore, there must be another world that you do not see. The Bible speaks of a new Heaven and a new earth, yet this cannot be literally true, for the eternal are not re-created. Here ACIM teaches that the world we perceive is not as we see it. It is an illusion. This illusion was not created by the Father. (Or his vicegerent Creator Son representing the Father.) The Father could not have created the world we perceive because it is not real. Note how this compares with teachings in The Urantia Papers. p.599 - It was of the conclusion of the terminal mission of the Teacher Sons (at least that would be the chronology on a normal world) that John wrote: >I saw a new heaven and a new earth and the new Jerusalem coming down from God out of heaven, prepared as a princess adorned for the prince. p.600 - All the worlds of Satania can join in the hope of the one who wrote: >Nevertheless we, according to His promise, look for a new heaven and a new earth, wherein dwells righteousness. Wherefore, beloved, seeing that you look for such things, be diligent that you may be found by Him in peace, without spot and blameless.
~142~
ACIM rejects these concepts. All teachings within ACIM concentrate on self, and on the perceptions of illusion. Curiously, Jesus-Michael remained aloof from the revelation of The Urantia Papers. Although the Papers teach that nothing takes place within the domain of a Master Michael without his approval, he was not directly involved in the presentation of the Papers. In further study of our historical revelations I discovered that Jesus-Michael was not directly involved in any of those. The Old Testament prophecies were the work of Melchizedek in collaboration with the prophets and seers of Israel. Johns Apocalypse was presented by divine beings other than Jesus-Michael, except where the text has been perverted by a later Christian editor. The first Isaiah was taken to visit Jesus-Michael on Salvington, and Paul had a direct visitation, but the statements of those two men were from their understanding, not as direct words from God. Putting all of this together I reached the conclusion that Jesus-Michael never becomes directly involved in revelations to this world, except for the teachings he gave us while he lived here as a man. Given the fact that ACIM never directly invokes Jesus as the author of that work, I am left to conclude that Jesus was not the author of ACIM, and that the author styled his statements for all readers to infer that Jesus was the author. He used the modern abstruse concept of Christ to induce this inference. In other words, ACIM is a pretense on authorship. Could ACIM have come out of the subconscious of Helen Schucman? I cannot believe so. Conceptually it is complex, and seductive. It is directed toward a purpose which it plainly states. I cannot believe Helen Schucman would have had such a conscious purpose. But more, subconscious minds do not fabricate such complex and organized material. The products of marginal consciousness, as William Sadler preferred to call it, are not sophisticated logically; they ramble, hazily, as do dreams. They also do not show construction with deceptive purpose. They are simplistic. I could only conclude that ACIM came from the mind of another being with definite malicious intent. What is the nature of that intent? As I said, it is plainly stated. Page 13: This is a course in mind training. Page 1: Miracles are habits, and should be involuntary. They should not be under conscious control. Page 24: My control can take over everything that does not matter, while my guidance can direct everything that does, if you so choose. Page 25: This is controlled by me automatically as soon as you place what you think under my guidance.
~143~
WKBK Page 1: Second, be sure that you do not decide for yourself... This will interfere with transfer of training... Some of the ideas the workbook presents you will find hard to believe, and others may seem quite startling. You are not asked to judge them. You are merely asked to apply the ideas as you are directed to do. Nothing, in all creation, could be such a blatant denial of human choice. There is only one purpose behind such teaching: The human mortals who submit to this training will lose their human will and their human dignity. The submission of the human mind to this mind can only take place if those human mortals permit the entry of this mind into their mind. The Course is designed especially to accomplish that purpose. The Workbook For Students encourages human mortals to engage in practices to deny reality, and to submit to this insidious mind. The students first lesson is to condition his perception of reality, and to repeatedly admit: Lesson 1: Nothing I see in this room [on this street, from this window, in this place] means anything. Ten items are listed on this page. Among them: The body does not mean anything. He is aiming for the human body. He denies that it has value. He does so because he must condition the mind of his agents to the concept that they can remove the human body, but that such removal is meaningless. Lesson 3: I do not understand anything I see in this room [on this street, from this window, in this place]. Two paragraphs follow in which the student is urged to apply this to all things seen, which includes human bodies, without making distinctions of any kind. These are not exercises in judgment. For this purpose one thing is like another (which includes human bodies); equally suitable and therefore equally useful. Lessons 7 and 8 concentrate on preoccupation with past thoughts and associations. The student is urged to let go of those. Lesson 10: My thoughts do not mean anything. The Lessons go on and on, reshaping perceptions of reality. God is in everything. God is in everything I see because God is in my mind. The emphasis is mine. This is not a teaching that a Thought Adjuster dwells within us, respecting our decisions and will, but that this God is in the mind, directing what this person will think and do. Lesson 35: My mind is part of Gods; I am very holy.
~144~
When he enters their minds, and they submit to him, they will truly feel holy. He will induce such feelings; those feelings will absorb their state of being. 36: My holiness envelops everything I see. Those human mortals who experience these feelings, through his induction, will truly see holiness (or what they perceive to be holiness) in everything they gaze upon, including their brothers and sisters. 37: My holiness blesses the world. This is the ultimate deception. The holiness which his agents will feel will take them to absolute belief that their holiness can bless the entire world, including their brothers and sisters, who will be the targets of his purpose. 38: There is nothing my holiness cannot do. This mind means exactly nothing. Everything is accessible to him through the mind of the human mortal who submits to him. 40: I am blessed as a Son of God. The Course is specific that human mortals are equal to the divine Son of God. 42: God is my strength. Vision is his gift. All human mortals with whom I am personally acquainted, or who have published their experiences with Spirit entry into their minds, report their visionary experiences. This phenomenon is convincing proof to them that the Spirit is real. Importantly, he does not today display the full strength of his power. He is preparing a cadre of people for his service, and cannot bring them to his full state of being until the time comes to act. He is holding them in reserve, just as the members of the Cosmic Reserve Corps of Destiny are momentarily being held in reserve. He will take his agents into the Light. 44: God is the light in which I see. He will induce in their minds beautiful and glorious light. They will not question that he is God. He will direct their thoughts. 45: God is the mind with which I think.
~145~
The Course has these purposes: To get the students of this God thoroughly imbued with the fact of his presence in their minds, to alter their perceptions of reality, and to bring them divine light and feelings of divine holiness. From there he redefines holiness and goals to move them to a place where he can accomplish his purpose. He must redefine his presence to condition their minds to his replacement of a real God to the God now present in their minds. Note the deep blasphemy: Page 58: The First Coming of Christ is merely another name for the creation, for Christ is the Son of God. The Second Coming of Christ means nothing more than the end of the egos rule and the healing of the mind. I was created like you in the first, and I have called you to join me in the second. I am in charge of the Second Coming, and my judgment, which is used only for protection, cannot be wrong because it never attacks... Here it is obvious that the word Christ has been redefined to remove it from the traditional Christian sense. It now serves a totally different purpose. He is this Christ. All references to Christ in ACIM are references to him. The First Coming of Christ is no longer the human birth, life, and death of our Creator, but a redefinition, another name for the creation, the creation of this God. The Second Coming of Christ does not mean the return of Jesus, but is redefined as the end of the egos rule. Teachings on ego dominate much of the text of ACIM. In those teachings the spirit author dispels any notion that human mortals, in their present state, have dignity. As part of his mind conditioning he blasts away self-respect to replace it with notions that are compatible to his mind control. Page 37: Consciousness, the level of perception, was the first split introduced into the mind after the separation, making the mind a perceiver rather than a creator. Consciousness is correctly identified as the domain of the ego. The ego is a wrong-minded attempt to perceive yourself as you wish to be, rather than as you are. Yet you can know yourself only as you are, because that is all you can be sure of. Everything else IS open to question. Plainly evident of concern to this Sprit author is the separation. He separated himself from his God, from creation, and from reality. He became insane. From The Urantia Papers, p.754 - In all the administrative work of a local universe no high trust is deemed more sacred than that reposed in a Planetary Prince who assumes responsibility for the welfare and guidance of the evolving mortals on a newly inhabited world. And of all forms of evil, none are more destructive of personality status than betrayal of trust and disloyalty to ones confiding friends. In commit-
~146~

ting this deliberate sin, Caligastia so completely distorted his personality that his mind has never since been able fully to regain its equilibrium.
He knows it. But his personality is so distorted, he cannot now connect to reality. He must redefine reality as illusion, and teach such to his human students. Consciousness now becomes identified as the domain of the ego. His ego expression brought the origins of sin. He was first in this path. And he expresses it so accurately. The ego is a wrong-minded attempt to perceive yourself as you wish to be, rather than as you are. He is talking about himself. Yet you can know yourself only as you are, because that is all you can be sure of. Everything else IS open to question. This was the great horror he created when he went into ego rule. Because his mind is so distorted he could never again be sure of reality. Everything is now open to question. He can now only be sure of himself, AS HE IS. And this is what he teaches those mortal fools who follow him. But he has not lost his spiritual power. The Second Coming is his presence in their minds. They will truly believe this is the Second Coming. They will not be able to deny the miracles he performs in their minds. He has an ultimate purpose. That purpose is the Atonement. He is going to make Gods people atone for the judgment that was placed against him. In that manner he will bring healing to the world. His healing. Page 19: Our emphasis is now on healing. The miracle is the means, the Atonement is the principle, and healing is the result. The TEXT continues: To speak of >a miracle of healing is to combine two orders of reality inappropriately. Healing is not a miracle. The Atonement, or the final miracle, is a remedy and any type of healing is a result. The kind of error to which Atonement is applied is irrelevant. All healing is essentially the release from fear. To undertake this you cannot be fearful yourself. You do not understand healing because of your own fear. The word Miracles is his method of describing the actions he will induce his mortal agents to perform. Again, he repeatedly mentions fear because he must condition his agents to overcome the instinctive fear they will feel as they performs their acts of murder. But murder is redefined also. Including the sacrifice of other human mortals. All reality is redefined.
~147~
Page 384: This is the value that you think peace would rob you of. This is what you believe that it would dispossess, and leave you homeless. And it is this for which you would deny a home to peace. This sacrifice you feel to be too great to make, too much to ask of you. Is it a sacrifice, or a release? What has the body really given you that justifies your strange belief that in it lies salvation? Do you not see that this is the belief in death? Here is the focus of the perception of atonement as murder. Here is the source of the idea that love is fear. He rationalizes his purpose, and redefines reality, in order that his agents not focus on the perception of atonement as murder. He asks, Is it a sacrifice, or a release? He want his human servants to recognize that murder of their brothers and sisters is release and not sacrifice. The deep deception of these teachings is striking time and again. Page 2: Miracles are part of an interlocking chain of forgiveness which, when completed, is the Atonement. Note his emphasis on forgiving. All is love. All is forgiven. When his mortal agents dispatch their brothers and sisters it will be because of the love they feel for those brothers and sisters. The will not do it out of hate, but out of love. The Teaching Mission today emphasizes love. Unconditional love. In the delusions of those who follow such teachings they believe they are the new front for a new world. They will bring a world of love and forgiveness. They are the new Teachers and Leaders. Little do they know. Page 2: Atoning means undoing. This is his method of describing the retribution he will bring upon Gods people, as the expression of his vengeance upon his God. Page 6: I am in charge of the process of Atonement... My part in the Atonement is the canceling out of all errors that you could not otherwise correct. He will strive to cancel out all those past errors of judgment brought against him. Page 7: The forgiven are the means of the Atonement. (The forgiven are his agents.) Being filled with spirit, they forgive in return. (That is, being filled with his spirit.) Those who are released must join in releasing their brothers, for this is the plan of the Atonement. (The forgiven will release their brothers from this life. That is the plan of the Atonement.)
~148~
Miracles are the way in which minds that serve the Holy Spirit unite with me for the salvation or release of all of Gods creations. (The miracles will be performed by the forgiven. When their minds serve the Holy Spirit, his spirit, they will unite with him in the salvation of all of Gods creation, including especially their brothers, whom they will release by dispatching.) Page 9: The miracle joins in the Atonement by the mind in the service of the Holy Spirit. The forgiven, his agents, will truly believe he brings the Holy Spirit. They will have no doubt when he transforms them through penetration of their minds, and the altering of their moods and thoughts to deep spiritual feelings. Page 17: The Atonement can be accepted within you only by the releasing of the inner light. He will bring light - vivid, brilliant, glorious light. His agents will fully believe he is God. But he knew full well what Gods true people would think about him. Page 499: So do they think the loss of Sin a cause. And flee the Holy Spirit as if He were a messenger from hell, sent from above, in treachery and guile, to work Gods vengeance on them in the guise of a deliverer and friend. What could He be to them except a devil, dressed to deceive within an angles cloak. And what escape has He for them except a door to hell that seems to look like Heavens gate? In his insanity, this is an explicit description of the actual situation, accurately stated, once again. He cannot restrain himself. He must vent his frustrations. Many of the statement within ACIM, when viewed as expressions of his personal situation, offer startling insights. This truly is an insane mind at work. Never, ever, did I encounter such devious desecration as is found in ACIM. Indeed, what escape is there for any of us except a door to hell that looks to his agents like Heavens gate? A Course In Miracles becomes important when we recognize that his servants will need some form of reassurance after their deadly onslaughts. They will have good cause to refer to it, to give them solace for their murderous acts. It is truly a Devils Bible. I do not wish to write a book. Therefore, I limit further comment. Numerous aspects of presentation exist in A Course In Miracles which reinforce this assessment in multiple ways. For example, he explicitly describes his plan. Regardless of which illustrations we chose, we would end with the same judgment of this dreadful work.
~149~
No, Steve. This is devils work, straight out of an insane and tortured mind who has a purpose of wreaking vengeance upon his Creator, and using the fools of this world to do it. He will use all those who have given themselves to him. He will be able to do so because they permitted him to enter their minds. The fools were children in accepting the aliases of a being who pretends to be midwayer or an agondonter or an angel or a finaliter. And they have no way to know. Ernest
~150~
CHAPTER FIFTEEN Jesus Names in ACIM INTRODUCTORY REMARKS

(This chapter is adapted from a separate paper.) The name Jesus is not used in ACIM, either in Volume I, Text, 622 pages, or in Volume 2, Workbook For Students, 478 pages, except in one quotation. The name Jesus occurs sixteen times in Volume 3, Manual For Teachers, 88 pages, and is there limited to a total of five pages. Under a section entitled Does Jesus Have a Special Place In Healing? the name occurs eight times, seven on page 55, and once on the following page. Under Sections entitled Jesus C Christ and The Holy Spirit the use is four times on page 83, once on page 84 and three times on page 85. These counts include the title listings. The last two sections are in an addendum called a Clarification of Terms. This avoidance of the name of Jesus, and relegation to five pages of text in the rarely consulted third volume, is an indication of the state of mind of the spirit author. The seventeen occasions of the use of the word Jesus in ACIM are from a mass in excess of 480,000 words. The word Christ is used 365 times, while the plural possessive AChrist=s@ is used 89 times. Claims were made that the Christ of ACIM is Jesus, and that this Christ explicitly identified himself as Jesus. I shall show that both claims are false. This paper is not intended as a theological dissertation. Therefore I do not examine the meaning of the name Christ as it is used in ACIM, except in a peripheral manner as demanded by the specific illustration. I identify each case of use of the name Jesus. I examine its context, and attempt to understand the significance attached to that use.
FROM THE TEXT

Jesus #1: In speaking of the Holy Spirit ACIM states: Pg 67: The Bible says, >May the mind be in you that was also in Christ Jesus,= and uses this as a blessing. It is the blessing of miracle-mindedness. It asks that you may think as I thought, joining with me in Christ-...
15 - Jesus Names in ACIM
~151~
Commentary: In order to isolate identify of the author, and show that he is not Jesus, we must examine both the biblical and ACIM context. The quote is from Philippians 2:5 C Let this mind be in you, which was also in Christ Jesus. This is from the King James Version. The context is an exhortation by Paul to the Philippi Christians that they give of themselves in service, as Jesus gave of himself. This verse was used by the author of ACIM because its phrasing provided a vehicle of illustration. However, the author changed the mental association in order to accomplish his purpose. Examination of alternate translation shows how he would not have had the same convenience of choice if he had not used KJV. The Revised Standard Version, in verses three through eight, has this text: Do nothing from selfishness or conceit, but in humility count others better than yourselves. Let each of you look not only to his own interests, but also to the interests of others. Have this mind among yourselves, which is yours in Christ Jesus, who, though he was in the form of God, did not count equality with God a thing to be grasped, but emptied himself, taking the form of a servant, being born in the likeness of men. And being found in human form he humbled himself and became obedient unto death, even death on a cross. The concept from our traditional text is that all be willing to give for one another, regardless of ones social state in life, and not find an excuse to avoid service by counting another person better in possession. This was the kind of mind Jesus displayed when he humbled himself to death on the cross. Paul was asking the Philippians to have this attitude of unselfish devotion among themselves. By taking on this attitude of service one joins with Jesus. The author of ACIM employs the verse to a new definition which he calls miracle-mindedness. Miracle-mindedness is a state of mind, just as Pauls exhortation was to a state of mind. But now the author alters the concept because he defines miracle-mindedness differently from mere service to others. He uses this miracle-mindedness to introduce a more profound relationship between himself and the student. This more profound relationship is a request for the student to think as he thought. It asks that you may think as I thought, joining with me in Christ-... This instruction is more than to have the same attitude in service. The author requests the student to join with him in imitation of thought, not in emulation of service.
~152~
But the author himself does not make this request. When he says It we do not know if he assigns this invitation to the Bible or to miracle-mindedness. We cannot be sure from the context. The inference is that he is calling upon miracle-mindedness to produce this change in thought in the student. He clearly separates Jesus from himself when he asks the student to join with him in Christ. If he intends that this Christ is Jesus, he and Jesus cannot be the same identity. In following discussions I shall show that this Christ is not Jesus, but a state of mind different from Jesus which the author repeatedly invokes. The author clearly does not identify himself as Jesus. This is the only use of the word Jesus in the TEXT, Vol I. Nor do we ever meet it in the WORKBOOK FOR STUDENTS, Vol II of ACIM. Thus we never meet the name Jesus again through 1100 pages. This is a most notable, remarkable, and important omission of Jesus in the revelation of ACIM. This glaring absence shows a deadly difficulty for the author. He does not identify Jesus throughout this long text. Now on to other examples, all found in the MANUAL FOR TEACHERS.
FROM THE MANUAL FOR TEACHERS

We next meet the name Jesus on page 55 of the MANUAL FOR TEACHERS. This comes 1088 pages after the lone biblical quote on page 67. Jesus #2: This is a Section titled: DOES JESUS HAVE A SPECIAL PLACE IN HEALING? This use of the name Jesus is limited to the Section heading. Below the title, we find the name Jesus seven times on two pages. The name Jesus in this section is limited to these two pages. Jesus #3 and #4: Gods gifts can rarely be received directly. Even the most advanced of Gods teachers will give way to temptation in this world. Would it be fair if their pupils were denied healing because of this? The Bible says, Ask in the Name of Jesus Christ. Is this merely an appeal to magic? A name does not heal, nor does an invocation call forth any special power. What does it mean to call on Jesus Christ? What does calling on his Name confer? Why is the appeal to him part of healing?
~153~
Commentary: Note that he here uses the phrase Jesus Christ and not merely the name Jesus. In this paragraph the Christ of ACIM does not identify himself as Jesus. Jesus is here described as an object of appeal, not an identification. The author disclaims that an appeal in the name of Jesus can heal, when he says that a name does not heal. He also denies that prayer (an invocation) can call forth any special power. The historical records states, among other possible citations: John 14:13 - Whatever you ask in my name, I will do it, that the Father may be glorified in the Son. John 16:23-24 Truly, truly, I say to you, if you ask anything of the Father, he will give it to you in my name. Hitherto you have asked nothing in my name; ask, and you will receive, that your joy may be full. The Urantia Papers state: p.1952 - Hitherto have you made all your requests in my Fathers name. After you see me again, you may also ask in my name, and I will hear you. p.1639 - I have come forth from the Father; if, therefore, you are ever in doubt as to what you would ask of the Father, ask in my name, and I will present your petition in accordance with your real needs and desires and in accordance with my Fathers will. These flat contradictions are clear evidence that the author of ACIM cannot be Jesus. He baldly denies the promises Jesus gave to us about prayer in his name, and about his power through our invocation. Continuing with page 55: Jesus #5: What does this mean for you? It means that in remembering Jesus you are remembering God. The whole relationship of the Son to the Father lies in him. His part in the Sonship is also yours, and his completed learning guarantees your own success. Is he still available for help? What did he say about this? Remember his promises, and ask yourself honestly whether it is likely that he will fail to keep them. Can God fail His Son? And can one who is one with God be unlike Him? Who ascends the body has transcended limitation. Would the greatest teacher be unavailable to those who follow him?
~154~
Commentary: The discussion here deflects direct identification of the Christ of ACIM with Jesus. Identification must be inferred from the theological presentation, and the presentation is open to many different interpretations. Jesus is implied as an entity different from the author, as someone who went through a process to achieve completed learning. This growth of Jesus, required by ACIM, may be compared to the teachings of The Urantia Papers. p.1331 - Christ Michael did not progressively become God. God did not, at some vital moment in the earth life of Jesus, become man. Jesus was God and man C always and even forevermore. And this God and this man were, and now are, one, even as the Paradise Trinity of three beings is in reality one Deity. Therefore, the Son mentioned in this paragraph from ACIM would not be Jesus. Again on page 55: Jesus #6 and #7: The Name of Jesus Christ as such is but a symbol. But it stands for love that is not of this world. It is a symbol that is safely used as a replacement for the many names of all the gods to which you pray. It becomes the shining symbol for the Word of God, so close to what it stands for that the little space between the two is lost, the moment that the Name is called to mind. Remembering the Name of Jesus Christ is to give thanks for all the gifts that God has given you. And gratitude to God becomes the way in which He is remembered, for love cannot be far behind a grateful heart and thankful mind. God enters easily, for these are the true conditions for your homecoming. Commentary: Here the author of ACIM boldly states that the name Jesus Christ is but a symbol. The author does not acknowledge Jesus as a personality who stands for love that is not of this world. He acknowledges only the symbol. Hence, in this presentation the author of ACIM logically cannot identify himself with Jesus, since both are personalities, and he does not acknowledge Jesus as a personality. At the bottom of page 55 and to page 56 we meet this statement: Jesus #8: Jesus has led the way. Why would you not be grateful to him? He has asked for love, but only that he might give it to you. You do not love yourself. But in his eyes your loveliness is so complete and flawless
~155~
that he sees in it an image of his Father. You become the symbol of his Father here on earth. To you he looks for hope, because in you he sees no limit and no stain to mar your beautiful perfection. In his eyes Christs vision shines in perfect constancy. He has remained with you. Would you not learn the lesson of salvation through his learning? Why would you choose to start again, hen he has made the journey for you? Commentary: Again, the author of ACIM does not identify himself as Jesus. Here Jesus is again used as an object of discussion. Again, the author differentiates between Jesus and Christs vision. He clearly separates this Christ from Jesus, and adds to further confusion on whether this Christ is a personality or a state of being. Another use from page 56: Jesus #9: This course has come from him because his words have reached you in a language you can love and understand. Are other teachers possible, to lead the way to those who speak in different tongues and appeal to different symbols? Certainly there are. Would God leave anyone without a very present help in time of trouble; a savior who can symbolize Himself? Yet do we need a many-faceted curriculum, not because of content differences, but because symbols must shift and change to suit the need. Jesus has come to answer yours. In him you find Gods Answer. Do you, then, teach with him, for he is with you; he is always here. Commentary: Here an explicit statement is made that this course has come from him. This course must mean A Course In Miracles, although the author does not exactly say so. But is the him Jesus? To determine him we must refer to the preceding paragraph, a paragraph that comes between Jesus #8 and Jesus #9. No one on earth can grasp what Heaven is, or what its one Creator really means. Yet we have witnesses. It is to them that wisdom should appeal. There have been those whose learning far exceeds what we can learn. Nor would we teach the limitations we have laid on us. No one who has become a true and dedicated teacher of God forgets his brothers. Yet what he can offer them is limited by what he learns himself. Then turn to one who laid all limits by, and went beyond the farthest reach of learning. He will take you with him, for he did not go alone. And you were with him then, as you are now.
~156~
I separate this paragraph into two strands because of the different emphasis in the two parts. My commentary becomes difficult if I am to avoid theological issues. However, because of the statements made in this paragraph I must engage in brief discussion. I shall list the statements separately in order to show that the him who offered the Course is not Jesus. From this list we shall also be able to see that the Christ of ACIM once again does not identify himself with Jesus. Yet we have witnesses. The author does not say who these witnesses are. How grateful we all would feel if he would do so. Recurrently, and repeatedly, throughout ACIM, the author refuses to make explicit identifications that would take the material of the Course beyond inference and deduction. It is to them that wisdom should appeal. Since we do not know the identity of these witnesses we might be in grave spiritual danger if we make our appeal to them. These unidentified witnesses might be Lucifer and Satan. There have been those whose learning far exceeds what we can learn. Again, who are those? If this is Jesus talking he is stating that the learning of those far exceeded his learning, or what he can ever possibly learn. This admission would be contrary to the illustration I offered above about the perfectness of Christ Michael as the Creator. If this is another personality talking he is admitting his own limitations, not those of Jesus. Did the learning of Lucifer and Satan far exceed the learning of Caligastia? Probably. Caligastia has yet to learn his lesson. Nor would we teach the limitations we have laid on us. Who is us? What limitations? Who laid these limitations? Again, if this is Jesus talking he was limited as God. The Urantia Papers are careful in their discussion of the limitation of Creator attributes. p.235 - The divine natures of these Creator Sons are, in principle, derived equally from the attributes of both Paradise parents. All partake of the fullness of the divine nature of the Universal Father and of the creative prerogatives of the Eternal Son, but as we observe the practical outworking of the Michael functions in the universes, we discern apparent differences. Some Creator Sons appear to be more like
~157~
God the Father; others more like God the Son. For example: The trend of administration in the universe of Nebadon suggests that its Creator and ruling Son is one whose nature and character more resemble that of the Eternal Mother Son. It should be further stated that some universes are presided over by Paradise Michaels who appear equally to resemble God the Father and God the Son. And these observations are in no sense implied criticisms; they are simply a recording of fact. The author of ACIM certainly is not talking about the limitations of Creatorship, but rather about his limitations as a created being. The framework of discussion is of subservience to higher authority which can impose limitations. The author chafes under this imposition. Were these the rules for righteousness imposed by God upon his Created Planetary Princes? Limitations which the author of ACIM would not now teach? Obviously, this paragraph is a massive theological entanglement buried in nebulosity and vacuity. I now come to the second strand. A change in emphasis takes place which alters the subject of discussion. The author changes from the plural we and us of the first strand. He now uses he, his, and him. No one who has become a true and dedicated teacher of God forgets his brothers. Yet what he can offer them is limited by what he learns himself. Is the author of ACIM here referring to Jesus or to himself? If he means Jesus then Jesus is severely limited by what he learns! The limited learning of Jesus conditions what Jesus can teach his brothers! Thus we can see how the author defames and denies the power of Jesus if the student comes to such conclusion. If the author is not Jesus then he is the one who is so limited. Then turn to one who laid all limits by, and went beyond the farthest reach of learning. He will take you with him, for he did not go alone. And you were with him then, as you are now. Here the author again changes emphasis. He states that he took action to exceed those limits which were placed upon him. This really is a complaint. The author objects to those limitations. He states that he had the power to exceed those limitations. What he means by the farthest reach of learning is another of those nebulous introductions of thought which befuddle the thread of concepts. Where was this personality, who was he, and how were we with him then? If the author of ACIM is the one who laid all limits by, not Jesus, then the he and the him must be the author of ACIM.
~158~
By the time one has progressed through the conceptual confusion of this paragraph one is isolated from the Jesus of the preceding paragraph. Then the him we are attempting to identify in this intervening paragraph is not the Jesus of the preceding paragraph, although the author leaves us with mere fog in our attempts to determine his meaning. That probably was his purpose. Yet again he left the reader to infer, while deflecting good, solid thinking. But nowhere is there a specific identification of the author with Jesus. Jesus has come to answer yours. Once again this is a third-person use which avoids direct identification of the author with Jesus. The obscurity of phrasing throughout this paragraph (and much of ACIM) merely reinforces our conclusion that the author of ACIM cannot afford to specifically identify himself as Jesus. The next section on Jesus comprises two pages out of 1188 pages of text. The name Jesus is used four times in this section. Jesus #10 Page 83 begins with the title: JESUS CHRIST Presumably, the author of ACIM will now, after 1183 pages, give us his definition of Jesus. He does not. Jesus #11 & #12: The name of JESUS is the name of one who was a man but saw the face of Christ in all his brothers and remembered God. So he became identified with CHRIST, a man no longer, but at one with God. The man was an illusion, for he seemed to be a separate being, walking by himself, within a body that appeared to hold his self from Self, as all illusions do. Yet who can save unless he sees illusions and then identifies them as what they are? Jesus remains a Savior because he saw the false without accepting it as true. And Christ needed his form that He might appear to men and save them from their own illusions. Commentary: Here the author states that Jesus, the man, was an illusion. According to this author, Jesus, this illusion, saw the face of Christ in all his brothers. What was the CHRIST Jesus saw in all his brothers? Apparently Jesus had to see this Christ in his brothers before he could identify with it. Thus the author explicitly states that Jesus earlier was not Christ, and later acquired identity with this Christ according to this recipe. According to The Urantia Papers Jesus was not Christ, and therefore would not have identified himself with this CHRIST, or any other Christ.
~159~
According to this ACIM teaching Jesus became one with God AFTER he identified with this CHRIST. Such teaching is gross perversion of all Christian belief and the teachings of The Urantia Papers. These statements are supremely important to our understanding. Obviously, the term Christ is used once again in conflicting conceptual terms. Here the author invokes one sense to mean a state of being, the face of Christ, and not personality. But the use confuses us. The author turns around and implies personality in the illustration. Jesus identified with this Christ. Was this Christ a state of being or was it personality? We cannot explicitly determine the meaning of the author. The author then switches subjects in the last sentence. He introduces us to another Christ. This other Christ needed the form of Jesus that He might appear to men and save them from their own illusions. Obviously, the author is differentiating between this other Christ and Jesus. This other Christ needed the form of Jesus. The other Christ, of course, is Caligastia. Truly, this is an exact and precise statement, one of the most clear sentences in the entire Course. The author had to take on the appearance of Jesus to accomplish his ends. He did so by assuming the name Christ. This is the Christ who will save men from their own illusions. But this is not an identification as Jesus. The author states explicitly that he takes on the form of Jesus. Indeed! Jesus #13: In his complete identification with the Christ - the perfect Son of God, His one creation and His happiness, forever like Himself and one with Him - Jesus became what all of us must be. He led the way for us to follow him. He leads you back to God because he saw the road before him, and he followed it. He made a clear distinction, still obscure to you, between the false and true. He offered you a final demonstration that it is impossible to kill Gods Son; nor can his life in any way be changed by sin and evil, malice, fear or death. If the Christ of ACIM has been redefined, as its adherents say, then this Christ cannot be Jesus. In fact, the author tells us explicitly that Jesus became completely identified with this Christ. Again this implies a spiritual state, not a personality. Thus, according to his argument, Jesus became identified with this concept the author introduces into his presentation. The name Christ did not become identified as Jesus. Jesus could not have become identified with this Christ unless this Christ was something different from Jesus. And this Christ was the perfect Son of God, His one creation and His happiness, forever like Himself and one with Him. Jesus was not this Christ, this perfect Son of God, until he identified with this Christ. Again we see the blasphemy, denying the status of Jesus as Creator and God. Again we see the confusion in concept. This Christ is different from Jesus be-
~160~
cause he did not become like Jesus; Jesus became like this Christ. In other words, this Christ was first, and Jesus was second, since Jesus identified himself with this Christ. Thus Jesus led the way for all of us to follow this Christ. Jesus then leads us back to this God. Thus Jesus became the example of how we should follow this Christ and this God. The author of ACIM is positively making Jesus subservient to this Christ. Since this Christ is someone other than Jesus, the author makes Jesus subservient to this state of being, or other being. Since the author is the Devil, this CHRIST, and since he is making Jesus subservient to this CHRIST, he is making Jesus subservient to himself. That is exactly what he wishes he could do. We now go to page 84. This is still under the section titled JESUS CHRIST. Jesus #14: Is he Gods only Helper? No, indeed. For Christ takes many forms with different names until their oneness can be recognized. But Jesus is for you the bearer of Christs single message of the Love of God. You need no other. It is possible to read his words and benefit from them without accepting him into your life. Yet he would help you yet a little more if you will share your pains and joys with him, and leave them both to find the peace of God. Yet still it is his lesson most of all that he would have you learn, and it is this... Here we have an explicit statement from the author of ACIM that Christ takes many forms with many different names. Jesus is not unique. But, again, we have no direct identification of the Christ of ACIM with Jesus. How could a spirit personality identify with one, if there are many forms with different names? Page 85 has still another section defining THE HOLY SPIRIT This section has three references to Jesus, all on one page. Jesus #15: Jesus is the manifestation of the HOLY SPIRIT, Whom he called down upon the earth after he ascended into Heaven, or became completely identified with the Christ, the Son of God as He created him. The Holy Spirit, being a creation of the One Creator, creating with Him and in His likeness or Spirit, is eternal and has never changed. He was >called down upon the earth= in the sense that it was now possible to accept Him and to hear His Voice. His is the Voice for God, and has therefore taken form. This form is not His reality, which God alone knows along with Christ, His real Son, Who is part of Him.
~161~
This paragraph offers more obfuscation. Jesus apparently became completely identified with >the Christ,= the Son of God, as He created him. I am not sure who created what from this twisted sentence. But the author of ACIM is not identifying himself with Jesus. In all the theological teaching in ACIM which describes the attributes of Jesus, Jesus is subjected to a secondary role, inferior to this Christ. Jesus #16 & #17: The Holy Spirit is described throughout the course as giving us the answer to the separation and bringing the plan of the Atonement to us, establishing our particular part in it and showing us exactly what it is. He has established Jesus as the leader in carrying out His plan since he was the first to complete his own part perfectly. All power in Heaven and earth is therefore given him and he will share it with you when you have completed yours. The Atonement principle was given to the Holy Spirit long before Jesus set it in motion. Here the Holy Spirit has established Jesus as the leader in carrying out His plan, making Jesus subservient to the Holy Spirt. Again there is no identification of the author of ACIM with Jesus.
CONCLUSIONS
1. The author of ACIM never identifies himself as Jesus. 2. All ascriptions of authorship are to this Christ and not to Jesus. 3. The sadly mistaken notion that ACIM was written by Jesus, a notion that conditions our eternal survival, was based strictly on assumption, out of use of the word Christ, exactly as the author intended. 4. In all cases in which Jesus serves in a functional role in ACIM, and not merely as an object of reference, he is made subservient to another being, or a state of being. 5. The vast body of text of ACIM uses inference and deduction to lead the student into a swamp of conceptual confusion. 6. The appeal of ACIM, as with all other channeled materials, is on emotions and feelings, not on rigor of thought or righteousness. 7. As I illustrated above, (Jesus #1), the concentration of ACIM is on self, and not on service. 8. Study of ACIM shows the acute difference between the light offered by The Urantia Papers, and the darkness offered by ACIM. 9. All those who adhere to the teachings of ACIM have placed themselves in eternal jeopardy. Such individuals cannot discern the difference between light and darkness.
~162~
CHAPTER SIXTEEN Klimo on Channeling

In 1987 Jon Klimo published Channeling, (Jeremy P. Tarcher, Los Angeles). The book was a review, for laymen, of the channeling phenomena, and communications from paranormal sources. Klimo surveyed channeling as a Modern Phenomena, as a Historical Phenomena, Who Does It?, What Do They Say?, Who Are They Channeling?, and How Do They Do It? He then went on to examine possible explanations. To say that he was a believer would be an understatement. His last chapter is devoted to providing the elements and methods to get you to communicate with the Spirits. He refers to Opening To Channel, How to Connect With Your Spirit Guide, by Sanaya Roman and Duane Parker, (H. J. Kramer, Tiburon, California, 1984. In his Historical Phenomenon he expresses his belief that the Apostle Paul experienced psychic phenomena on the road to Damascus. He says this about Jesus: One of the chief assumptions of this book is that channeling includes most major recorded spiritual communication between physical and nonphysical beings. The earlier prophets and later saints of the worlds religious traditions may have been channels of extraordinary spiritual import. Few Christians, however, would be willing to grant that Jesus was merely a channel. The contention or faith remains that he was not just the Son of God but that he was God in human form. His would not be a case of trance mediumship in which the human body was taken over and used by God. For, according to doctrine, in Jesus case nothing came through an intermediary; the channel and the source were one. Yet to read Jesus words sometimes gives the eerie feeling that he was sent to earth to channel guidance from home or from a parent spirit. The picture that emerges from Christs words in the Bible is strikingly similar to the channeled material of the last 150 years: Jesus was spirit incarnated for a particular lifetime. He took his identity and guidance from his parent source and asked that we identify with him and with his relationship to his (and our) Father. At the same time, an occult hierarchy of various levels and densities of spirit, full of revelation, voices, and visions, can be traced. For example, in Matthew, Christ says For it shall be given you in that same hour what ye shall speak. For it is not ye that speak, but the Spirit of your Father which speaks in you. On another occasion, as Jesus spoke, behold a bright cloud overshadowed
16 - Klimo On Channeling
~163~
them: and behold a voice out of the cloud, which said, This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased. In Luke we read: My mother and my brethren are those which hear the word of God and do it. Klimo clearly interprets all religious and spiritual events as channeling phenomena. Of the Apostle Paul he said: In the famous experience of Saul on the road to Damascus, in Acts 9:3-7, it appears that Saul is channeling like the earlier prophets, only now the source is the discarnate Jesus. Klimo includes the Apostle John in his channeling classifcation. Saint John the Divine, in the book of Revelation, written about A.D. 68,
also seems to have channeled Jesus, among an assortment of other characters, constituting the richest biblical case of channeling.
Klimo also includes the Holy Spirit in his hypothesis: Part of the Christian legacy is the Holy Spirit, sometimes called the Holy Ghost, which is said to appear as a nonphysical spiritual presence that is also part of the one God and capable of being channeled. In the cases of Peter and Paul in the New Testament, the nonphysical realm has become heaven, discarnate beings angels, and almost any channeled spirit is The Holy Spirit or The Holy Ghost. These views are typical of many persons who solicit the Spirits. In Chapter Nine I reported how the Spiritualists looked upon true spiritual phenomena in the same way. I shall offer three examples of the Spirit channelings discussed by Klimo. Although his list is far from exhaustive, not covering many countries, he did provide some indication of the widespread scope of this activity.
Benjamin Creme and Maitreya

See The Reappearance of Christ and the Masters of Wisdom, Benjamin Creme, The Tara Press, London, 1980. British artist and journalist Benjamin Creme believes he is the channel for Christ, whom he refers to as Maitreya, head of the planets spiritual hierarchy, and the new world order. He publishes such works as The Christ and His Reappearance, The Masters and [Spiritual] Hierarchy, The Effect on Existing Insti-
~164~
tutions of Christs return, and The Anti-Christ: The Forces of Evil. One message received from the Christ presence through Cremes channeling is the following: I come to tell you that you will see Me very soon, each in his own way . . . Nothing separates you from Me, and soon many will realize this. I am with you and in you. I seek to express that which I am through you; for this I come . . . My body of workers will show the world the problems of Mankind can be solved: through the process of sharing and just redistribution the needs of all can be met . . . The greatest change will be in the hearts and the minds of men, for My Return among you is a sign that men are ready to receive new life. That New Life for men do I bring in abundance. On all the planes of this life flow, reaching the hearts and the souls and bodies of men, bringing them nearer the Source of Life Itself. My task will be to channel those waters of Life through you.@ How clear the Rebel Spirit has been! Nothing separates him from his people. He will express what he is through them. Each will see him, or at least those images he wishes to project of himself. How will they be able to deny such powerful presentations, of great beauty, and of heavenly light? His body of workers, his cadre, will show how the problems of the world can be solved, indeed, when he takes them into murderous cleansing of the earth of all those foolhardy human mortals who believe in a true God. Indeed, they will see him very soon, each in his own way, by whatever images he deems suitable to a particular individual. Nothing separates him from his agents, literally nothing, for he is actually and truly within them, in their minds. Great changes are even now going on within the hearts and minds of his followers as he conditions them to his presence, and to his desires. When he scalps their minds to perform his deeds they will truly believe they are the mechanisms of new life. On all the psychic and spiritual planes this new life will flow, reaching their hearts and their souls and their bodies as he brings them closer to him, and to the Source of Life Itself, the overpowering bliss of life he will show them. He will channel it through them and they will believe they are the servants of this great god, performing a necessary service for the benefit of all mankind as he redistributes the spiritual loyalties of the world to himself. This phenomena in England shows how no land escapes which forgets God and proceeds into new age explorations.
~165~
Ken Carey and Starseed

See The Starseed Transmissions: An Extraterrestrial Report, Key Carey, UNI-SUN, Kansas City, 1982. Carey was a former postal employee turned California farmer. He engaged in a stupendous channeling of revelation in rural California during a concentrated snowy eleven days. Klimo summarized this material. . . . We are spiritual beings who are awakening, in the last part of this century and the beginning of the next, into the organic unity of a planetary species operating in harmony with a larger Creation, as was always meant to be. . . . We are the bridge between spirit and matter, Creator and Creation, between the spirit and the forms through which the spirit flows. . . . We are learning to identify ourselves not as the form, but as the force that flows through and gives life to form. He is creating an organic unity of his agents, into a new planetary species, operating in harmony with his Creation, as was always meant to be. He was deprived of that Creation because he rebelled; now he is preparing to retrieve it from the hands of his God. The source urges that his subjects should C Feel me rising up within; reflect me in all that you are. As the transmutation from material disorder to spiritual order takes place, You are not to act upon my information in the future, you are to be my information. The subjects are further urged to C . . . awaken to the inevitable changes at hand and come into alignment with, and join the loving forces at work, rather than hold back within the outmoded forms of matter and selfishness that are to be transformed by the work. Two-thirds the way through the eleven-day transmission, the source identified itself: I am Christ. I am coming this day through the atmosphere of your consciousness. I am asking you to open the door of your reason, to allow me into your heart . . . I am the bridegroom spoken of old. I came to you first through a man named Jesus . . . Rejoice! The millennia of
~166~

your fasting is over, the bridegroom returns . . . Whoever will come after me will have to die to all definitions of self, take up my spirit, and follow along the lines of my vibratory field.
How utterly profound will appear the images this being will create in the minds of all who give themselves to him. He calls to them, to die to all definitions of self, to take up his spirit, and to follow in the lines of his images. And he pretends to be Christ, as he first appeared through Jesus. True blasphemy indeed, and none of his agents recognize it. When he appears to them in resplendent glory they will have no alternative but to believe that he really is the Christ. And they will do whatever he requests.
Jack Pursel and Lazaris

Refer to Concept: Synergy, PO Box 159(M), Fairfax, California, 94930. In many of the transmissions Caligastia speaks of the changes taking place on the world. Pursel was a regional insurance supervisor in Florida when he suddenly and mysteriously began to channel. The entity which came through Pursel identified himself as Lazaris. Klimo did an interview with Pursel, to obtain these remarks from Lazaris. People are growing more rapidly than theyve ever grown. Theyre opening the doors to a spirituality more profoundly than ever . . . And what is happening in the bursting forth is that theres a fundamental Christian approach, and theres an unbelievable growth in that movement . . . The other direction is toward a metaphysical relationship, toward a metaphysical spirituality as opposed to a fundamentalist spirituality. In other words, people are moving in centrifugal energy away from the middle ground of nebulousness--of well just wait and see, wont we attitude C away from intellectual noncommitment of science and philosophy that has so long been predominant in your reality. . . . Were moving into a more avant-garde sort of spirituality, a reaching out to the edge of reality, to the edge of possibility, and saying Is there something more? and therefore moving in that direction. We would prefer those that are moving into that metaphysical spirituality as opposed to the fundamentalist spirituality, but we respect both. Yes, he respects both, but he is going to do his utmost to eliminate, once and for all, that fundamentalist spirituality which has been such a bane to him. Spiritual changes are taking place ever more rapidly, until the day comes when he will strike. No more will there be any person on this earth who will shrug it off with I shall wait and see. Everyone will be caught; many will be murdered. Everyone will be forced to decide their loyalties. Everyone, that is, who lives to
~167~
make such decisions. God is now bringing a great spiritual baptism to this planet; he will find his true sons and daughters. No one will escape. And he uses the Devil to perform this task.
How Do They Do It?

Klimo recognized that the Spirit communication may be through many different levels of altered mental states, from deep trance, to fully conscious voices and control of the physical body. He classified them as intentional and spontaneous. He admits that in spontaneous channeling the individual is not able to control the activity and is at the mercy of its comings and goings. This gives it an unbidden, obtrusive quality which offends the sensibilities of many people. The earlier illustration of John Ballou indicated this non-permissive control. I know of a woman who had practiced channeling for some period of time. One evening she was washing dishes at her kitchen sink when she suddenly heard a voice behind her right ear. She swiftly turned C but no one was there. Another woman come to me after I gave a lecture in Washington, DC. She stated that she needed a ride home, and wondered if I would take her, since my route went in her direction. The request was a pretext to talk with me privately. She and her daughter had practiced channeling until her daughter began to complain about Avoices@ coming into the house over the telephone lines. The daughter had become psychotic. The woman solicited my help. I was unable to advise her, except to get out of contact with the Spirits. I know another woman on Long Island, New York who actively solicited the Spirits. She consulted a Channeling Teacher in Manhattan who taught her routines to practice contact with the Spirits. Shortly she began to receive transmissions, but very uncomfortable ones. The Spirit continued to haunt her, causing her to forsake her duties as wife and mother, until she lost contact with reality. She also became psychotic. This went on for a period of two years, until finally she ended in a hospital. With the strong support of her husband she eventually was able to break contact with the Spirit and return to a normal life. She also solicited my advice concerning these matters. Klimo offers the following classifications for channeling, although I feel some of them should be qualified as not true channeling states. We may receive message from valid spiritual sources, but Klimo lumps these all together as Achanneling.@ Refer to Chapter Six and the Judy Tuttle messages. Full Trance: The Channeler appears to go into an unconscious state, and has no memory of events afterward. To enter this state they quiet themselves, close their eyes, and Astep aside,@ or Avacate the seat of consciousness.@ Ectoplasmic performances are done through Full Trance. Sleep Channeling: Ideas are implanted during sleep. The individual will receive information that is not part of a dream. Upon awakening he may have a sense of an experience rich with words. He knows something he did not know
~168~
previously, or he may have a strong desire to visit a particular place or begin a certain project. Cayce reported how he came to previously unknown knowledge while asleep. This, and dream communications, may be categories where information may come as the result of Thought Adjuster communication or angelic ministration. Dream Channeling: This is similar to Sleep Channeling except that the information comes in a memorable dream. Refer to Helen Schucman=s vivid dream experiences prior to her receiving A Course In Miracles. We are cautioned concerning dreams: P.1099 - If one is disposed to recognize a theoretical subconscious mind as a practical working hypothesis in the otherwise unified intellectual life, then, to be consistent, one should postulate a similar and corresponding realm of ascending intellectual activity as the superconscious level, the zone of immediate contact with the indwelling spirit entity, the Thought Adjuster. The great danger in all these psychic speculations is that visions and other so-called mystic experiences, along with extraordinary dreams, may be regarded as divine communications to the human mind. In times past, divine beings have revealed themselves to certain God-knowing persons, not because of their mystic trances or morbid visions, but in spite of all these phenomena. P.1208 - While their mortal hosts are asleep, the Adjusters try to register their creations in the higher levels of the material mind, and some of your grotesque dreams indicate their failure to make efficient contact. The absurdities of dream life not only testify to pressure of unexpressed emotions but also bear witness to the horrible distortion of the representations of the spiritual concepts presented by the Adjusters. Your own passions, urges, and other innate tendencies translate themselves into the picture and substitute their unexpressed desires for the divine messages which the indwellers are endeavoring to put into the psychic records during unconscious sleep. P.1208 - It is extremely dangerous to postulate as to the Adjuster content of the dream life. The Adjusters do work during sleep, but your ordinary dream experiences are purely physiologic and psychologic phenomena. Likewise, it is hazardous to attempt the differentiation of the Adjusters concept registry from the more or less continuous and conscious reception of the dictations of mortal conscience. These are problems which will have to be solved through individual discrimination and personal decision. But a human being would do better to err in rejecting an Adjusters expression through believing it to be a purely human experience than to blunder into exalting a reaction of the mor-
~169~
tal mind to the sphere of divine dignity. Remember, the influence of a Thought Adjuster is for the most part, though not wholly, a superconscious experience. Light Trance: The individual may enter a trance state but remembers what transpired. Many modern reports fall in this category. It is easily confused with Open Channeling. Clairaudient Channeling: The individual may receive a distinct verbal message. This also may be confused with angelic or midwayer ministration. Clairvoyant Channeling: In this form the individual may see images, rather than hear voices. Refer to descriptions by Scott Foerster. Automatisms: Automatic writing, speaking, and so on fall in this category. They invariable require that the individual release mind and motor control. Open Channeling: In this form the individual is fully conscious and perceives messages coming to him. Refer to illustration in the following Chapter. Carl Jung, the famous psychiatrist, spent a good portion of his life chasing contact with the Spirit world. In one episode he became so intimate with the Spirits he also lost contact with reality. His case also progressed into psychosis. In a similar pattern to the cases I illustrated above, his wife worked with him to return to the real world. This period was recalled by Jung. As Klimo wrote: Jung reported a number of personal experiences that resembled channeling. Late in his life, writing in Memories, Dreams, Reflections, he recounts a number of visionary (or hallucinatory) experiences. Perhaps most interesting is the mysterious circumstance surrounding the writing of an early 1916 piece he called Septem Sermones ad Mortuos, or Seven Sermons to the Dead. He later considered this to be part of his Ajuvenile period and hoped serious readers of his work would ignore it. These sermons are a continuation of earlier conversations with inner figures that had been published in his Red Book. They are written in a rather biblical style, similar to much channeled literature, and they reflect a personality (Philemon) and a perspective quite different from Jungs earlier and later work. Jung devised all manner of explanations for the phenomenon, from a Universal Consciousness from which we all could tap the entire gamut of world knowledge, both past and present, to other assorted explanations. In his discussions of the source of the phenomena Jung referred to the impersonal or collective unconscious: Its contents are not personal but collective; that is, they do not belong to one individual alone but to a whole group of individual. and generally to a whole nation, or even the whole of mankind These contents are not acquired during the individuals lifetime but are products of
~170~

innate forms and instincts . . . the primordial images which have always been the basis of mans thinking C the whole treasure-house of mythological motives.
In 1902, when the international Spiritualist movement was in full swing, Jung completed his M.D. thesis, The Psychology and Pathology of a So-Called Occult Phenomenon. In it he studied a young girl whose experiences involved double consciousness, somnambulism, and what we would call channeled contact with discarnate entities. He concluded that spirits, therefore, viewed from the psychological angle, are unconscious autonomous complexes which appear as projections because they have no direct contact with the ego. Besides the complex, Jung believed that the shadow side of each person C the least evolved and understood part C could on occasion present itself in ways that might appear to be something or someone other than the normal self. Klimo goes on to express his views of Jung=s theories. Channeling, by this view, might be the individual tapping into the material of this racial memory. With regard to the chief contents of the collective unconsciousCwhat Jung called archetypesCpsychologist Robert Masters says: I subscribe to Jungs definition of an archetype as an essentially irrepresentable energy constellation which can nonetheless be represented. While this concept of the collective unconscious and the archetypes may open the door for a more self-transcending view of communication, it is still consistent with a basically closed model of the human psyche, though now on the scale of a group psyche. On one occasion, while trying to come to terms with the identities of supposedly channeled spirits, he confided: I once discussed the proof of identity for a long time with a friend of William James, Professor Hyslop, in New York. He admitted that, all things considered, all these metapsychic phenomena could be explained better by the hypothesis of spirits than by the qualities and peculiarities of the unconscious. And here, on the basis of my own experience, I am bound to concede he is right. In each individual case I must of necessity be skeptical, but in the long run I have to admit that the spirit hypothesis yields better results in practice than any other. Refer to Carl Jung, Collected Letters, Vol 1, 1906- 1950, Bollingen #45, Princeton University Press, 1973. If Jung had followed his instincts, and his personal experience, he would have recognized with more certainty the source of his psychosis, and the source of the Acollective consciousness,@ which is nothing more than the memory banks of that evil personality.
~171~
Jung=s episode of psychosis, and the similar experience by the woman from Long Island, demonstrate an important element of relationships with the Spirits. Jung had a strong and determined mind. So did the woman from Long Island. Although they sought the Spirits, they would not let go of their will. They both ran head long into an incompatibility of wills. If you entertain the Spirit in your mind you must let go of your will. If you do not let go of your will he will torment you. My assessment of this torment is rooted in the fact that the spirit world must respond to human calls for help. If you solicit the Devil he must respond. But he does not like what he finds if you maintain a strong mind. He cannot take control of you. If you continue to pursue contact with him he will torment you. You must make a decision. You must either let go, or you must give him your will. P.398 - Mind such as man comprehends is an endowment of the seven adjutant mind-spirits superimposed on the nonteachable or mechanical levels of mind by the agencies of the Infinite Spirit. The life patterns are variously responsive to these adjutants and to the different spirit ministries operating throughout the universes of time and space. The capacity of material creatures to effect spirit response is entirely dependent on the associated mind endowment, which, in turn, has directionized the course of the biologic evolution of these same mortal creatures. The point I am making is not that our ability to effect spirit response is dependent upon the biologic level of the mind, but that such power does exist in the universe, and that persons living today can effect such response. This fact is clearly evident in the phenomenon of channeling. Jung and the woman from Long Island both let go of the attempt at contact. They were eventually rehabilitated. Perhaps these illustrations will serve to help all those individuals who attempted contact with the Spirits, but then either ran into mental torment, or later abandoned those attempts. You are not lost before God if your heart is true.
~172~
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN The Storm Clouds Gather

The September, 1999 issue of the Sedona Journal of Emergence, (Light Technology Publishing, 4030 E. Huntington Drive, Flagstaff, Arizona, 86004), carried an article channeled through someone identifying herself as Norma Gentile. The title was Children of Both Dark and Light, The New Generation. The article carried ominous statements. It was addressed to the recent violence in the public schools of the United States, classifying the children of the current generation as those who are Apolarity conscious.@ That is, they play out their part in displaying both the Adark and light@ of our existence. Each generation that incarnates on the planet has a series of tasks. Those of us who are among the baby boomers have worked to bring about a new energy consciousness. Those of the current teenage generation have accepted the task of breaking open our concepts of polarity consciousness. These children, these perpetrators, are acting out an agreement made long ago. It is with the deepest love that they play their part in opening up the U.S., Canada and Europe to a quality of grief and grieving that has not been known since WWII. Strange as it may seem, these children are part of a generation that is more spiritual, more connected to All That Is than the older generation. These children who perpetuate violence, perhaps especially these children, know spirit in an intimate way. This connection is profound to the point of their being able to play a role in our unfolding drama that is cast as evil. Yet these children, who are within spirit, understand that evil is simply another aspect of spirit defining itself. Moving outside of polarity consciousness, any action simply becomes an interaction with some aspect of All That Is. The articles then goes on to several crucial remarks. Regardless of the circumstances, those carrying out violent or abhorrent acts may be seen to be playing out a role that is required at this time. The movement of compassion is to allow for a larger, unrestricted viewpoint to emerge. This viewpoint then allows love to lead ones vision of a circumstance.
17 - The Storm Clouds Gather
~173~
Thus, justification is given for acts of violence, and reasons why it should be tolerated. Note the remark which states that evil is simply another aspect of spirit defining itself. Elsewhere the article states, under a section titled: TIME TO MERGE LIGHT AND DARK Unity consciousness might best be described as a phenomenon that lies within the eighth dimension and above. Christ consciousness is an apt term for the experience of unity consciousness manifesting on Earth. Anytime one person embraces both poles of any experience, Christ consciousness appears. So by engaging both the good and the evil, you not only experience, but you actually bring the energy of Christ consciousness into the Earth plane, and in exchange, All That Is grows through your actions. Clearly the agents of Caligastia are being prepared for engaging both the good and the evil. They will actually bring the energy of Christ consciousness into the Earth plane, and in exchange, All That Is grows through (their) actions. The following was channeled in Pocatello, Idaho, in 1999. The Spirit was identified as Aaron. This was published in the Light and Life Journal, produced by Jim Cleveland in Xenia, Ohio. Jim is a channeler, and serves as a focal point for channeling groups in the Urantia community. I take excerpts and intersperse commentary. Tonight I would like to discuss with you certain perspectives regarding how you may look at your purposes, not only here in communication with us, but also the motivations which guide you in life. You may question at times why it is so diffcult to perceive our influence. We recognize that in varying degrees you strive to understand our presence and to perceive the insight we offer, sometimes to come up frustrated and feeling as though you are missing some connection. Thus the Devil reassures his agents while they await his direction. Recognize that we have a singular, prime directive, which supersedes all other efforts we might make regarding this planet and the mortals here. This prime directive is the attunement of your thought processes into alignment such that you are more receptive to recognizing the ministrations of your indwelling Spirit. Here he tells them: they have one prime directive. They are to bring their minds (thought processes) into alignment with his mind (ministration of his indwelling Spirit).
~174~
As far back as the early 1990s he had stated to scattered Urantia channeling groups that he was bringing the ACorrecting Time.@ These channelings took place in Woods Cross, Utah during 1991 through Jan Messenger. Greetings. I am Melchizedek Planetary Prince of Urantia. I come here tonight in order to welcome you to the Brotherhood of Planetary Believers, to wish you well in your future missions and to tell you that important, indeed stupendous events are not far in the future and that you will be needed to undertake certain assignments . . . The planet is going through an intense shake up at this time in many overt and subtle ways . . . We require your help in this endeavor . . . As I have said previous, the correcting time has begun and begins the great harvest of souls ripened and ready to receive these truths. This movement or harvesting, gathering, brings much to our hearts and will certainly also gladden yours when you see the results. The Correcting Time, of course, is the Atonement. He will correct all those errors from God which placed him in judgment. But to continue with the message of Aaron, 1999. The awareness that the correcting time is occurring brought fascination on your world to those involved; amazement, wonder, excitement, joy, in the idea of reclamation. Suddenly minds were astir. And many people began to think of all the possibilities why we would come to serve here on your world this way. Many ideas have surfaced that have been popular. And sometimes confusion has occurred; such that, amid these expectations, disillusionment and frustration resulted causing persons to slip away for lack of real understanding or sensitivity to the underlying mission: to facilitate comprehension of the foremost spiritual reality residing in your mind. When you personally think of how you may best serve God, what sorts of thoughts come to your mind? Do you think of telling others what you have learned, or writing a book? Talking to groups? Providing papers with our words? Evangelizing? Or do you recognize, perhaps more now than earlier in your association with us, that you best serve your maker by striving to know God and thereby allowing his presence to manifest in your life those things which God would have known to others through you. Inward is the path to truest service for others rather than trying to create fantastic possibilities of service. If you would each dedicate yourself to the inner life with God, the manifestation of service possibilities will arise beyond your imaginations! You will do that which God would have you do.
~175~
And therein lies the perspective that we would most like to have you understand as you proceed forth. The many happenings on your world are beneficial, all ideas for God have value, but the greatest production, the highest awareness, will come from seeking to do what your inner relationship tells you. I hope these thoughts tonight have allowed you some perspective. And I thank you for listening. Thus the Devil reassures his people that they should not give up hope, or cease their belief in him, but should continue in their efforts to maintain a strong connection with him. The inner life with God means their submission to his influence in their minds. Then their manifestation of service possibilities will arise beyond imagination! As with A Course In Miracles, and the multitudes of his productions, the many happenings on your world are beneficial, all ideas for God have value, but the greatest production, the highest awareness, will come from seeking to do what your inner relationship tells you. Thus he reassures them through their time of waiting.
Preparation of His Cadre

The following well illustrates the Aopen channel.@ I offer the full account here in order for the reader to obtain some sense of the phenomena going on all about us today. This account appeared in the Light and Life Journal, Issue #8, Winter 19992000. The man was Allen Wolf. He is married, with grandchildren. He is a counselor by profession, currently working with elementary school children. He has lived and worked in India, South-East Asia, the Middle East, and Europe. He now lives in the Shenandoah Valley of Virginia. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ One night, after reading a bit in my favorite book of spiritual inspiration, I was sitting on my bed, in silent, still, thanks and openness, just practicing being fully in Gods presence. Suddenly, I felt, more clearly than I ever had before, Jesus personal presence there with me in the room. I personally consider Jesus to be the greatest example in our history of a truth-knowing, God-sharing person, but I felt very comfortable in his presence there in my room. It was if we were life-long friends! I sensed that he was there to answer a question I had on my mind, so I asked him if he were coming again to us soon, as many people hoped, to help us all find our way to spiritual unity, world-wide. His loving, definite, clearly communicated response to me, was: I will be returning, as I promised C but not yet. In the meantime, Im sending others in my stead. There will soon be an incarnated unanimity of spirit around the globe.
~176~
That was the beginning. Messages started coming to me the next day and continued for quite some time. Id receive these messages at various times: when I was totally relaxed, and just enjoying being alive in the moment; while in the midst of my fairly normal lifes activities; while thinking about my various little problems and concerns; and as I took my daily meditative walk, attempting to get myself into a state of thankful, humble understanding, and loving communion with God. Out of the blue, these totally unexpected, clear, and precise messages would come to me. They were much like listening to that quiet inner voice, except these messages were unmistakably direct and filled with intensity. The messages were not audible, but were just there somehow, clearly in my mind, like instantaneous, intimate telepathy, and behind them all I was aware of a definite, new, personal, spiritual-presence. A presence whose energies radiated calmness, knowing reassurance, and a smile of joyous spiritual excitement. This clearly loving, spiritual presence said to me, over and over, regularly, day after day, in slightly different ways, yet always basically the same, Im coming! Im coming to you all soon! In your time soon Im coming! I asked repeatedly who, or what, this was . . . what the message meant and what was I to do with this? C Was I imagining, wish-fulfilling, going nuts or hallucinating?! C But all I would get in response was a joyous (bordering on laughing), loving, friendly, comforting, yet completely serious: Im coming! In your time, Im coming. In fact, Im already on my way! And, All thats been promised is now happening. Its started. Its time now C The time is now. When I asked for more details, the response was, The specifics and exact time-lines are still not known, even to me. But its all going to happen, its simply a matter of when. And another time, Things are starting to come to fruition even now. On another occasion, Im coming to you soon; in your time conceptions of soon. My missions now been fully approved. On still another, Im coming, you know that C Im coming to you all soon! This went on for several weeks, almost every day, while I at times, of course, questioned my own sanity . . . but at the same time, I grew tremendously in my own personal understanding of the possibilities and realities of the world of the spirit. I told no one what I was going through, because I really didnt know yet whether or not this was a purely personal spiritual experience, between God and me alone, and not necessarily relevant to others and their understanding of truth. But then one freezing, cloudy-gray, sleet-threatening, winters day, as I was heading back home after a walk through my favorite cow pasture, during which I stood there literally crying out to God, looking up to the skies begging for assistance in understanding just what I was going through . . . I was suddenly stopped in my tracks by a powerful, awe inspiring, very real spiritual presence. It was, beyond doubt, a definite God-presence, of complete love and understanding, that from within and above somehow, entirely overwhelmed me with the powerful
~177~
and obvious living reality of the inherent interrelatedness of all life and earthly reality around me C as well as myself C with God, love, truth, and the rest of the universe. It felt like my spine, whole person, and being, was being infused from above, moment by eternal moment, with shooting, swirling, yellow-gold bright particlerays, of completely conscious, all-knowing, compassionate, communicating, living light! In that moment, however long I stood there in normal earth-time (I have no idea), I was directly connected to and part of everything . . . just as everything was equally connected to and part of me. The world and everything in it; life as a whole, both worldly and purely of the spirit . . . all without question, were One. Awed like Ive never been before, my whole body, completely straight and alert in the moment, to the sacred and eternal life-essence all around and in me, felt utterly alive, filled, and expanded five or six feet beyond my physical body, in all directions. I was very soon shaking uncontrollably, and tears of joy were rolling down my face in the cold winter air. But I also clearly felt this personal God-presence with me, somehow both within me and yet off to the side a bit of all this interconnecting, swirling, yellowgold living light . . . and I immediately recognized that there, staying with me, throughout my experience (however long it lasted - it felt like eternity!), was the familiar, loving, spirit-personality who had been communicating with me regularly for weeks now, with those clear, smiling messages of, Im coming! Up until this moment, I had only known this presence as one, which felt to me, like a being with vast understanding and advanced experience, representing some higher level of reality . . . or God. Now, in this moment, I realized clearly that this personal presence, most obviously to me, was that of a new, great spiritual Teacher of truth and of God, being sent to us all now directly from and by God, to help us world-wide in our search for greater understanding, for loving, compassionate living, and for spiritual unity. It didnt feel like the spirit-presence of Jesus, though close, or that of our Father or Mother, though also close. The personal presence was overwhelming filled with love, understanding, compassion and comfort, and with the very real power of direct and immediate knowledge of the universal truth and reality of God. My heightened spiritual awareness told me this was, indeed, a new and direct representative of GodCa spiritual Teacher, uplifter and sustainer, for ALL of humanity. Although I was told a few things directly in words during my experience, most of what was communicated was instantaneously transferred to me, in deep direct understanding, through some sort of immediate telepathy . . . or through that yellow-gold, swirling sacred lights. C I dont really know. But I immediately just knew the answers to many questions and concerns Id had been stumbling over, off and on for years C about myself, about life, about truth and God, about love and the shape and course of things to come on this world, and more.
~178~
But mainly, I knew full well now, with personally experienced, deep direct spirit contact, the truth of what Id been told repeatedly in those many messages, in weeks prior: That the new spiritual age of this planet is now beginning, and that were all due, very soon, to witness C and be a part of, as each of us choose C a God-directed, world-wide, coordinated, mission of spiritual uplifting that will include a great personal Teacher of Gods truth and love; a Teacher like weve never had before; a direct representative of God, living among us. And this Teacher is coming with associates, both male and female, of similar spirit-understanding and purpose of mission, around the world. Its a unified mission for all of humanity, not just a chosen few, not just for those of any particular religion or specific set of beliefs, and it is not going to be a temporary visit, but will be established over a long period of time. This soon-coming great spiritual Teacher, I was told, will be both a leader and example for us spiritually. He will be much like a much wiser, elder brother, a close friend and companion, a guide and spiritual counselor for us all. Or for anyone willing to listen to and follow the teachings of world-wide spiritual unification presented by he and his associates. Hell be here to help us, regardless of our individual religious or cultural tradition, learn how to better live with, assist and care for each other; to show us how to reach out and love our neighbors, whoever they may be, more wisely, more fully and consistently; and to lead us, through example, with his personal, strong God-knowing presence; toward becoming more true, actual living reflections of Gods love, understanding and compassion. But before this all comes about, I was led to understand, there is to occur an intensifying of world-wide changes, on many levels, a kind of a transition period, such as many feel weve already begun. Well witness changes politically, economically, socially, militarily, scientifically, technologically, climatically, geologically, religiously and spiritually, all around the world. Many of these changes have already begun, are increasing and will continue to increase. These changes are necessary to assist us all in being able to wake up from our materialistic stupor, to a deeper understanding of spirit reality . . . so we can finally start living peacefully and compassionately together world-wide, as the one true family of all humankind. We must begin to understand the reality of our true earthly brotherhood; the reality of the fatherhood of God; and the reality that Love rules the Universe. When we begin to learn these realities, it will set the stage for the arrival of this new Teacher and his associates. And though they are here in spirit form now, assisting in these many changes, even they do not know the exact timetable or details of their physical arrival, because this whole process of change, now building world-wide, is completely dependent on our own free-will decisions and actions and our own related processes of opening up to the real understanding of true spiritual living. But it will happen, and soon C these Teachers arrival C thats inevitable and decided. Its part of Gods will and overall plan.
~179~
All of this came clearly, instantaneously confirmed to me during my spiritual visitation divine contact, there in that frozen cow pasture. I still have no idea how long my experience lasted in real time. Time took awhile to come back clearly to me afterwards; though I was, for the most part, easily able to shift focus day by day to continue the responsibility of taking care of all my professional, family and personal, matters. But I certainly did so with quite a different internal perspective than I had previously! The visitation contact C diffuse, divine C was a powerful, intense, personal revelation; one of sure, calm, spiritual-knowing, while at the same time, being one of simply experiencing the overwhelming, direct, personal presence of living Truth. The overwhelming power of this sudden, unexpected, direct personal experience, given to me that night C the pure, swirling, light; the deep touch of infinite knowing and connecting, with life-essence and God-presence combined; and the direct communication and contact with a personally, loving, and reassuring spiritual Teacher from, and of, God C remains vivid to me to this day. I hesitate, still, to allow myself to go back fully into the spiritual state that experience took me to . . . It was so intense, so far above and beyond normal everyday life. Eventually, though, that night in the cow pasture, when I knew the visit and direct spiritual contact/revelation experience was about to be over, and the Teacherpresence was about to leave, I asked this God knowing personal presence specifically, How will I know you when you arrive? Can you tell me what your name will be? His clear worded response was, Youll know me by my presence. My name will be germane to all.@ There had been no indication of what I should or shouldnt do in the aftermath of this remarkable experience, so, I asked him, Can I talk about this? He hesitated, seeming almost surprised by my question, and then gave me a simple, clear and firm, reassuring, Yes. CAnd then it was over. Normal everyday reality returned all around me, and I wiped my joyous tears away, turned and began my half-stumbling trek across the cow pasture, towards home.
~180~
CHAPTER EIGHTEEN The Reserve Corps of Destiny

God did not permit the Iniquitous One to pursue his deadly plan without providing ministration to his true children. A group of other human beings have been prepared for service in this grave planetary crisis. P.1257 - The reserve corps of destiny consists of living men and women who have been admitted to the special service of the superhuman administration of world affairs. This corps is made up of the men and women of each generation who are chosen by the spirit directors of the realm to assist in the conduct of the ministry of mercy and wisdom to the children of time on the evolutionary worlds. It is the general practice in the conduct of the affairs of the ascension plans to begin this liaison utilization of mortal will creatures immediately they are competent and trustworthy to assume such responsibilities. Accordingly, as soon as men and women appear on the stage of temporal action with sufficient mental capacity, adequate moral status, and requisite spirituality, they are quickly assigned to the appropriate celestial group of planetary personalities as human liaisons, mortal assistants. P.1257 - Mortals of the realm are chosen for service in the reserve corps of destiny on the inhabited worlds because of: 1. Special capacity for being secretly rehearsed for numerous possible emergency missions in the conduct of various activities of world affairs. 2. Wholehearted dedication to some special social, economic, political, spiritual, or other cause, coupled with willingness to serve without human recognition and rewards. 3. The possession of a Thought Adjuster of extraordinary versatility and probable pre-Urantia experience in coping with planetary difficulties and contending with impending world emergency situations. You will note that these Reservists are secretly rehearsed. Except for a few rare individuals they are not conscious of the manner in which they have been chosen for service. They are willing to give over lifes ordinary pursuits to wholehearted dedication to a great spiritual cause, without recognition or rewards. They have a Spirit from the Father which has extraordinary experience in dealing with world emergencies. Then, a highly important remark is made:
18 - The Reserve Corps of Destiny
~181~
P.1258 - (The cosmic reserve corps of universe-conscious citizens on Urantia now numbers over one thousand mortals whose insight of cosmic citizenship far transcends the sphere of their terrestrial abode, but I am forbidden to reveal the real nature of the function of this unique group of living human beings.) We now know the function of this special cosmic reserve corps. Currently living on this planet are more than one thousand human beings who have been secretly rehearsed for this grave spiritual crisis. These matters were revealed to us in our olden revelations, but we did not comprehend their meaning. In Chapter Six I showed how Judy Tuttle was told of the Sons and Daughters of God who would come together in distinctive service. These Sons and Daughters are not some accidental group out of traditional Christian theology. They are unique Sons and Daughters, chosen by God for service to their fellows in a time of extreme planetary emergency. Isa 28:9-13: Whom will he teach knowledge, and to whom will he explain the message? Those who are weaned from the milk, those taken from the breast? For it is precept upon precept, precept upon precept, line upon line, line upon line, here a little, there a little. Nay, but by men of strange lips and with an alien tongue the LORD will speak to this people, to whom he has said, This is rest; give rest to the weary; and this is repose; yet they would not hear. Therefore the word of the LORD will be to them precept upon precept, precept upon precept, line upon line, line upon line, here a little, there a little; that they may go, and fall backward, and be broken, and snared, and taken. These Sons and Daughters who now come in service will not be youngsters of twenty or thirty years of age. They will not even be forty years of age. They will be older people, chosen because they required a life time of teaching and instruction. Through their lives they learned many things, precepts and concepts, piled upon one another, outside the framework of traditional Jewish or Christian theologies. They studied, not in seminaries, but by vast reading, line upon line, and still more line upon line, here a little, and there a little, gaining education in the affairs of God outside the context of conventional religious institutions. God will not speak to his people with familiar tongues. These Sons and Daughters will not be preachers in church pulpits, nor theologians in seminaries. They will speak truth to Gods people in such unfamiliar terms many Jews and Christians will reject their teaching. Such teachings, adequate to the greatest spiritual crisis of all time, will be foreign to normal conceptual thinking. They will
~182~
speak with strange lips and with an alien tongue. The LORD will speak to this people, to whom he has said, This is rest; give rest to the weary; and this is repose; yet they would not listen. Why? Because Jews and Christians do not know the ways of God. They know only the ways of their familiar doctrines and theologies. Therefore Gods word will be to them precept upon precept, precept upon precept, line upon line, line upon line, here a little, there a little; that they may go, and fall backward, and be broken, and snared, and taken. Only the most extreme spiritual condition, wrought by the Devil, will bring many to their senses. The rest will be lost. While this reassurance is addressed to those who go forth in that unique service, it should be reassuring to all of Gods people.
Still Another Message to Judy

The following post was in response to one from Judy Tuttle in which she reported another message from our Celestial Visitors. They stated that they were looking for the Jesus gene and that they were fishers of pearls, meaning the pearls from among mankind. To: Judy Tuttle From: Ernest P. Moyer <epmoyer@netrax.net> Subject: les Pecheurs de perles Judy: I received your post this morning. You said: les Pecheurs de perles Date: Wed, 7 Oct 1998 22:09:44 0700 I feel comfortable writing this to you, after spending many hours reading your web site and realizing that you are a believer in alien abductions. I have been a participant in these abductions for many years and upon two occasions these have been validated by physical evidence. Nothing can be more boring to another than to listen to such scenarios and this is not my intent. But, upon one occasion I was told that, We are searching for the Jesus gene. That is the best that I can articulate in the English language.
~183~
Today, at work after listening for the hundredth time to one of my favorite operas, les Pecheurs de Perles I stepped outside for a break. I felt the presence of many, many unseen others. They are here in mass. Here to foster and protect those of a higher spiritual nature. Within my mind, I was told. We are the pearl fishers, the fishers of pearls. I send this to you, FWIW. Judy Although Judy did not correctly state my position concerning our celestial visitors she was aware of the research I had done on that subject. In connection to this activity, now going on so widespread around our planet, Judys message captures the essence of that remarkable episode. The activity is under the direct supervision of Jesus, and the purpose is to foster and conserve the higher spiritual types, those who love Jesus, and have the Jesus gene. Our celestial visitors are Fishers of those Pearls. This was truly a remarkable insight into celestial activities now going on around our world. But that episode is not unconnected to total planetary activity. Gods purpose is to find his true people. He cannot find his people without subjecting them to extraordinary trials and tribulations. They must be forced out of their complacent attitudes and reliance on the secular and traditional vehicles of this world. We can see from the Isaiah revelation that many will fall. God is looking for those who are willing to rely on him and his revelations, and make their decisions accordingly. He wants to salvage the higher spiritual types for the future of this world. P.1207 - For many thousands of years, so the records of Jerusem show, in each generation there have lived fewer and fewer beings who could function safely with self-acting Adjusters. This is an alarming picture, and the supervising personalities of Satania look with favor upon the proposals of some of your more immediate planetary supervisors who advocate the inauguration of measures designed to foster and conserve the higher spiritual types of the Urantia races. The elements of this salvation are to first bring a great spiritual crisis. This will unfold through the Devils agents. Next, Gods people must decide to save themselves physically, from the devastations of nuclear war. In such manner he will be a Fisher of Pearls from among mankind.
~184~
The choices will be horrendous. Will the testimony of the spiritists, and their dramatic experiences, outweigh our faith in revelation and trust in God? How many will fall into the deadly trap of believing the world must be cleansed by eliminating superstitious souls? We dont know. But Gods people will make the right decisions, and will remain firm to Him, not matter what the trials, and no matter what the cost. In the course of my contacts with many people I met individuals who have had unusual spiritual experiences. The experiences were momentary, came to them from outside, not from their minds, and left them puzzling over the reason. These people never channeled nor did they ever attempt to contact the spirits. Hence, these are not channeled experiences, nor spiritist experiences, but events which came to them unexpectedly, literally out of the blue. At the time of the experience they had no idea of the possible meaning, and have lived many years of their lives puzzling over the purpose. Judy Tuttle was only one of those, While her experiences are specially unique, others also have had intimations of future service to God. I offer these few testimonies to illustrate what is going on around our planet today. These testimonies were offered voluntarily by the respective individuals. Those persons do not thereby necessarily imply endorsement of my views expressed in this book. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Douglas Graham Douglas was born in the 1920s in Budapest, Hungary of a Scottish father and a Hungarian mother. After World War II he emigrated to the United States. He carries a strong Hungarian accent to this day. I met Douglas at his home in Denver, Colorado in the mid 1990s, when he offered for me to sleep there during a Urantia conference in Boulder. During my stay I gave him copies of some of my written materials, and he responded with this brief account. Just before WW2 after the usual Sunday service in a Lutheran Church in the Fortress district of Budapest I stayed up at the east side of the horseshoe shaped balcony. Across the nave of church in the west side of the balcony a beautiful light appeared and I heard a voiceless message coming out of the light. You are beloved and you are on the planet to perform important tasks. This divine protection made me completely fearless during the onrushing catastrophes, during the Gestapo interrogation while Hungary was occupied by the Nazis in 1944, during the titanic battle between one million Nazi troops and one million Soviets when Budapest was reduced to ruin in 1945, during my KGB Captivity in 1946 while Stalin was consolidating his subjugation of Central Europe, and during my subsequent service in British Intelligence. That secondlong memory of divine appearance gave me the faith to survive.
~185~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ George Thornbury While attending a Urantia meeting in Vancouver, British Columbia, in 1999 George stated to me that he had an unusual spiritual experience when he was a teenager. I asked if he would be willing to share the experience with others. He later sent me this statement, which he had prepared for a Toastmasters meeting in Kentucky several years earlier. THE QUESTION - THE VISION In 1956, I was 16 years old. Like many teenagers, I was insecure and unsure about myself. Adding to the misery of being a teenager, my father was an alcoholic. Much of my growing young years were in a house filled with tension and scenes of a drunken father on wild angry rampages. As a result I was very troubled; I was confused about life and the world around me. I have a true story to share with you. This is a story about the most unusual event that has ever happened to me in my 57 years. You may or may not believe me, I request only that you listen to my story. I was dating a young girl, Cherry Scott, who lived near by. It so happened that the Methodist church I attended was having a revival and I asked Cherry to go with my family and me. It was in the fall and I remember the night was cool. And I can still clearly picture the pews curving around the pulpit and alter and see the people in the audience. But what I most remember is the message the old minister preached. He preached about committing yourself to doing Gods will. For 30 minutes, he described that Gods greatest desire was for me to do his will; that if I would only make that one great decision, my life would change, I would change and I would become a new person. He was absolutely excellent in his appeal to the human heart in making the ultimate decision. His sermon was free of confusing theology and the guilt bashing of being a sinner. His challenge was clear and direct and I could easily understand it. As he preached, I took in his words but argued with them. I resisted, but I could feel, deep inside, the truth of his message. He preached with great conviction and I understood that God wanted only a commitment of my will to him. As his alter call reached a peak, other people went forward, but I still resisted. Finally, I made a decision to surrender my will to God. I stepped out into the aisle, rushed to the alter, knelt on my knees and closed my eyes. With the greatest intention I could have at that young age, I offered my will, my heart and my soul to God
~186~

I was in a deep state of transformation. SUDDENLY, in my minds eye, I saw a figure approaching. Immediately, I was awash in a cloud of immense and over-powering love, the likes of which I had never felt before or since. My mind was a jumble of thoughts and feelings. I knew I was the only one who could see the angel. I was confused about who he was and what was happening. As he was approaching, clothed in a soft white field of energy and in a full length white robe, a question from the angel was asked of me! -WHAT DO YOU WANT ? . . . Sadly, at that moment, disaster struck. The minister gently placed his hand on my shoulder and distracted my mind and my focus from the apparition. He was gone. I have absolutely no idea what might have happened if the encounter with the angel had been completed. I suspect I would have sealed my decision with some type of agreement that would have drastically altered the course of my life. The encounter ended abruptly. I can only guess how my life may have been different. All my life, I have treasured that experience. The memory of the reality of that brief moment, of feeling the wave of love from that personality is as strong as any other memory I have. That one memory has helped me endure many dark hours of doubt. I cannot stress to you enough, so that you could understand, how real that experience was and is for me. I do not expect to see my angel again in this life. But later, after I leave this world, I will look into my records of spiritual development and find out who this character was. And, if permitted, I will have another meeting with him. I have several questions for him. Why did he approach me? What did he want? Where did he come from? Can we proceed from where he left me before? And most importantly how can I yet make a final, complete and irrevocable decision to commit my will to the will of God, to fuse my mind with his mind, to blend my time limited perspective with his eternal nature? My answering YES that evening was the catalyst for the angel to appear to me. Since then I have repeated YES to the call of God thousands of times; but NEVER with the depth of intensity and conviction at that revival. When all dogma, theology and doctrines are removed there is still one question. At sometime during your life here, or in your life after you leave this world, you have to answer the ultimate question. This is the last question that every person, regardless of their race, religious beliefs or spiritual development, has to answer. And the question, as it was for me that night more than 40 years ago, is: WILL YOU GIVE YOUR LIFE TO GOD ? WILL YOU COMMIT YOUR SOUL TO HIS ETERNAL CARE ?
~187~
WILL YOU, UNRESERVEDLY, DEVOTE YOUR LIFE TO FINDING HIS WILL FOR YOU LIFE? CAN YOU AND WILL YOU, SEARCH DEEP WITHIN YOURSELF AND MAKE THE ULTIMATE DECISION? WILL YOU SAY YES TO GOD ? ? ? I close with two thoughts: ONE: the experience I had was of a spiritual nature. I was stunned and surprised about seeing what I saw but I COULD NOT DENY THE REALITY OF THAT WHICH I HAD EXPERIENCED . . . I KNOW WHAT I SAW WAS OUTSIDE OF MY OWN MIND . . . . IT WAS REAL ! ! TWO: the ultimate question will be with you and always remain with you until you give your final and ultimate answer: WILL YOU FOLLOW GOD ? I pray your answer in yes! ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ JJ Johnson. I first met JJ in the early 1990s at a Urantia meeting in Phoenix, Arizona. We had gathered to discuss a law suit which had been filed by the Urantia Foundation against Kristen Maaherra for violating the copyright of The Urantia Papers. JJ was a founding member of the Grand Canyon Urantia Society in Phoenix. He held various offices and served on a number of committees. He is currently their president. JJ served on the Urantia International Fellowship committee and has attended most International Conferences. JJ read The Urantia Papers cover to cover 4 times during his first year and is on his seventeenth reading. Two of his articles were published in the Spiritual Fellowship Journal, Spring 1999. They indicate some of JJs evangelical outreach. JJ has always been a very practical, down-to-earth, business man. He was a contractor to the United States government in Saudi Arabia on two separate occasions. I met JJ again during the 1999 conference in Vancouver. The evening before we left Vancouver he independently described an unusual spiritual experience that took place at a business seminar he had attended in Chicago. He stated that he had told me about it years earlier, but I simply did not remember. Following is his account.
~188~

The attendees had broken up into small discussion groups. Suddenly, out of nowhere, a Warm, Loving, presence manifested itself and simultaneously everything around me illuminated. This Loving Presence communicated to me that there was a Loving Father (this was not in words/talking, but achieved the same purpose ) and it was such a profound experience that it left me no doubt that this was something other than just my own mind manifesting this experience. The moderator of the group seemed to recognize what was happening and tears of joy were streaming down his face as well as mine. To this day I dont know how the other person seemed to know what was happening. We shared no words; none were necessary. It was a spiritual experience that transformed my life. That was around 1969/1970. I was 22/23 at the time. About six years later (1975) I was directed to The Urantia Papers in a unique way. I started reading from the front of the Papers. In my private study I always read from cover to cover. I enjoyed and was fascinated by the Forward, but it took me until page 24 to discern that no human mortal could reveal such things. After having my personal religious experience in 1969 I seemed to have acquired the ability to discern spiritual truths and act on them. The Urantia Papers are the only written source that was in harmony with what I know to be true and consistent within itself. They provide a way to confirm new experiences as also true. I was born in Kentucky. My grandparents had a Tabernacle with a Cracker Jack Stand in front on their farm. A preacher would visit once a week or so to give the sermon. I was five years old when the following happened. I think they were Holy Rollers, speaking in tongues, and so on. I ran out into a huge empty field during one of these, to me a meaningless and scary sermon, spread my legs in defiance, and looked up into the sky. I said I cant believe in God. Looking back, I see this episode as: If this is what God is all about, I dont want any part of it. At the moment I was prepared to get hit by a bolt of lightning but I had to say it. Because I didnt have the faith as my family and friends had when I was growing up, I had to wait until my personal religious experience at age 22 to know there is a Loving Heavenly Father. During this seventeen year wait, I was an agnostic, I would not be an atheist. I viewed it as Who am I to say there is no God. I did know if there was a God, God would know that I was sincere and would somehow give me proof . Prior to my experience, I could not make spiritual decisions. I could see people with Living Faith and how it motivated them but seemed to have no spiritual drawing power to confirm these things for myself. There was a spiritual void. However, after my spiritual experience, I could peruse any book to discern for myself the truths revealed. I would discard anything that wasnt in harmony with what I knew to be true. Of course, The Urantia Papers were the only source that I could wholeheartedly embrace..
~189~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Richard Preiss I first met Richard at the Urantia International Conference in Green Lake, Wisconsin in 1984. We had sporadic contact over the years, and then began to develop a closer friendship around 1995. He also told me about this experience some years before, but again I failed to recognize the significance of his account. At my request he offered it for publication here. I was born an orphan. My birth mother, 22, was "slow" as they said then. I was her second illegitimate child. This fact made her eligible for mandatory sterilization. I was taken from her immediately, and placed in a private home two years later. My adoptive parents were wonderful, middle class immigrants who did the best they knew. I am thankful. However it came to be, I regard my Father in heaven as my birth father. That was the beginning, I believe, of my growing relationship with the Father. He's the one who has taken care of me my being alive and my coming to Him. In my mid-youth approximately, I had several memorable, seemingly significant dreams. I am not a person to remember dreams; I do so only occasionally. These dreams were of the same event/scene: what appeared to be a group of bearded, furrowed, long-haired, academic men. I would be in the middle of them, and they, bodiless, would be in rows around and in front of me.They seemed to be talking to me, though I know not what was said. One spoke at a time, but it seems they became animated as a group, ready to pounce at the end of a comment by another. I had this dream several times, but not repeated in my older years. I attended seminary, 400 miles away from home, at the Order of St. Francis, from ages 13 to 17. Here the ideas of theology, philosophy, worldliness, poverty, chastity and obedience were first introduced to me. That experience made me, from then on, forever curious about the great Why and What and Who. The experience did not make me enamored of the Catholic priesthood and it's ritualistic, dogmatic approach to a living God. By 1974 I had read many out-of-the-ordinary spiritual, occult, science fiction, eastern mystical, and religion-of-the-west tracts, books, and articles. I tried to find a common thread among them. With a dearth of deep spiritual and emotional explanations, the Urantia Book showed up. Within two years I was fully accepting and bringing my life in tune with God . . . though back-sliding in my humanity. I am a sinner.
~190~
Slowly over time the Father, my angels, and above all, my Controller, (Spirit of the Father), showed themselves to me with certainty in my mind, but with nothing supernatural or frightening. Just a calmness of knowing and an increasing belief/dependency on my unseen heavenly friends. They worked in the name of the Father, to help me gain good earthly achievements. Even for common everyday desires my remarks and requests would be heard. I would be helped in one way or another. The most amazing feature is this: you must let go after asking because it takes time for the angels to move pieces naturally into place, to open the space needed for you. In 1985 I was with my four year old boy at home. My wife and I had separated shortly before. I then had an unexpected experience. It was early afternoon, sunny, and I was washing dishes next to a window in the kitchen. My boy wanted to go outside and asked me to help button his coat. In the moment of twisting one button through the buttonhole, I suddenly felt an impulse to turn my head toward the window. As I did so I saw a door open to another reality. The "opening" was about two and one-half feet square, and the horizon I saw through the opening seemed to "off" compared to the horizontal I know. A small humanoid figure stood In the opening; pixie-like In appearance. The figure had something like a pad or sheet of paper, blank as far as I could tell, cradled in one arm. The figure made as though to step through the opening when he suddenly looked directly at me. Then he immediate retreated and the door to the other reality closed. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Editors note: C. S. Lewis, in reporting a personal visionary experience, described how the horizontal alignment between the two realities seemed to be askew. I quote from his account in the "fictional" Perelandra. "What I saw was a very faint rod or pillar of light. I don't think it made a circle of light either on the floor or the ceiling, but I am not sure of this. It certainly had very little power of illuminating its surroundings. So far, all is plain sailing. But it had two other characteristics which are less easy to grasp. . . . The other was its angle. It was not at right angles to the floor . . ." ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

My Personal Testimony
~191~
I was raised in a fundamentalist Christian family. I was always acutely conscious about God. At the age of ten I had a vivid dream, one I never forgot. My father was a school teacher, but we lived in a farmhouse with an apple orchard directly at the rear of the house. The kitchen was a separate wing. A wood burning range sat in the middle of the back wall. Two windows looking out on the orchard flanked the range. In my dream I walked to the window on the right side. The blinds were pulled down. I lifted the blind to look out. There I saw Jesus standing in the middle of the orchard, gazing silently at me. As a teenager I became deeply disillusioned by the conflict between my religious teachings and the behavior of the adult world. Although I was familiar with Paul's exhortations on righteous living I felt his statements did not reflect the actual world. I also felt the conceptual Christian structure was inadequate to our knowledge of the universe. At the age of sixteen I decided to attend a religious boarding school in New Jersey, expecting that the people would be more righteous, and that they would have more adequate theological answers. Within a few weeks I was even more disillusioned. The following year I returned home, lost from God, lost from understanding, and lost to my personal worth. At the age of eighteen I left home and God. Over the next twenty years I followed the usual agnostic course of life. I married, obtained an education, bred children, and was well on my way to an influential career in the electronics communications industry. God had other plans. In 1965, a year out of college, he began to introduce me to information which showed that this planet is under surveillance by celestial agencies, that they are deeply concerned about our course, and that they were contacting scattered people here and there. Over the next two years he led me to more and more information about those celestial activities. I became thoroughly convinced that we would shortly be subject to a great planetary judgment. In the fall of 1967 he led me to The Urantia Papers. Two Papers were especially striking, Paper 20 on The Paradise Sons of God, and Paper 21 on The Paradise Creator Sons. They were the culminating event in an increasing spiritual crisis. Suddenly, late in the year, I had an unusual spiritual experience. I saw no visions; I heard no voices. I simply felt the presence of God's Spirit. I have no adequate way to describe that experience. I truly felt that I walked with the angels, and that I understood as they understood. I have often quoted a passage from the Dead Sea Scrolls which I feel captures my situation.
~192~
"For lo, Thou hast taken a spirit distorted by sin, and purged it of the taint of much transgression, and given it a place in the host of the holy beings, and brought it into communion with the sons of heaven." Simply stated, that was the way I felt. I began to understand many things about God, and his program on this world. Somehow, through a spiritual bond, he gave me understanding. Nevertheless, I continued as an ordinary mortal, with all the personal faults and misjudgments of a limited human being. Notwithstanding these human limitations, I have since been dedicated to him, and to his will.
Appendix
~193~
APPENDIX
This is an edited version of a paper I had posted to Urantia Internet Discussion groups in September, 1999. I do not repeat arguments I covered in earlier parts of this book, except to keep this presentation coherent. Unusual Spiritual Experiences Part I The Role of the Teaching Mission In July, 1998 Lamar Zabielski removed me from his UBTalk list because of a report and discussion I had on a personal experience of glassy eyes. Actually, glowing is a more proper term. Three young men had approached me while I was sitting on the patio in the evening at a Summer Study session in Lake Forest, Illinois in the early 1990s. (It was still full light.) Two of those were sons of Thern Blackburn from Woods Cross, Utah. (Thern has since died.) They approached me to discuss my opposition to the Teaching Mission. They tried to convince me that it was a valid spiritual phenomenon. Only two of the men exhibited that strange light effect in their eyes. At the time I wrote my post I compared the experience to the TV and book illustrations of the eyes of zombies. I expressed the belief that the media illustrations are founded on actual phenomena, that they did not just derive out of some persons fanciful imagination. I had an opportunity to discuss this with Kurt Cira at the recent conference in Vancouver. He once again confirmed my witness. He also saw this strange phenomenon at Lake Forest. He reported to me that Susan Meyers also had the same experience. I have greatly puzzled over this experience. It has not happened again although, I can assure you, I have looked for it in the eyes of the channelers at several conferences. And then, as I was walking from one meeting to another at Vancouver, it occurred to me why this was so unusual, and why I did not have a repeat of that experience. I believe Susan, Kurt and myself were permitted to witness this phenomenon. I believe it was an unusual presentation. I believe the midwayers altered our vision to permit us to see the glow within the eyes of those men. I believe they extended our vision, for that brief period, in order that we have convincing demonstration of the permanent alterations that take place in the neurological systems of those who give themselves to Caligastia. As we well know, human vision range is limited, but can be extended.
~194~
P.865 - The 1,111 loyal secondary midwayers . . . exist just outside the range of mortal vision and possess sufficient latitude of adaptation to make, at will, physical contact with what humans call material things. These unique creatures have certain definite powers over the things of time and space, not excepting the beasts of the realm. The experience was a mighty boost in my belief of the permanent effect which takes place in the members of the Teaching Mission who have unalterably entered into a pact with the Devil. Once the channelers sell their soul there is no escape. Many have debated this with me. They ask, Is there no retreat from that compact? My answer is no. There is no rehabilitation of those people, and they forever lose their Thought Adjusters. I repeat: I believe this extended vision took place for the purpose of confirming my estimates of the Teaching Mission. Since I am the only person who has spoken so openly, so adamantly, and so vigorously in opposition to that movement, it may be that I serve to alert other members of the community to that spiritual danger. Perhaps I was permitted to observe this phenomenon because I serve in a role to help crystallize the spiritual decisions now unfolding. Some may argue that the experience was imaginary or psychological, that it derived from my intense interest in denouncing the Teaching Mission. But such argument denies the experience of Kurt and Susan. It also denies the reality of malevolent Spirit Beings who can enter human mind, and reduces our relationship with true living spiritual realities to mere spiritual feelings and notions. We should ever keep in mind: the members of the Teaching Mission speak of the Spirits who talk to them in their heads, and give them feelings of love and peace and joy. Are we then to reduce all spiritual phenomena to mere feelings, human psychology, or imagination? If the members of the Teaching Mission so strongly testify to their spiritual experiences, and we assign that phenomena to mere psychological disturbance, what does such assignment say about our grasp of spiritual realities? Others may argue that members of the Teaching Mission carry on ordinary lives, and otherwise conduct themselves sanely in the world. Why would we say they are psychologically disturbed in their relationships with God? Is their testimony not real? After all, they are nice people. On the other hand, if we permit such psychologically disturbed people to participate in Urantia affairs and offer voting power to them, how much have we jeopardized the conduct of group policies? The danger is not in their psychological disturbance but in their betrayal of God and the Revelation. Of course, these thoughts have become academic. The influence of members of the Teaching Mission, and their sympathizers, upon the Urantia community have now effectively undermined more traditional approaches to group policies.
Appendix
~195~
This shift in policy should not be taken lightly. It should be viewed in the worst possible potentials for betrayal of God and the Revelation. The fact that such spiritual phenomena would appear at the end of the age was revealed to us, but those revelations were suppressed. Modern generations do not seriously believe in them. By suppressing those revelations we effectively removed all warnings given to us by Jesus. Little did we realize the ominous and shocking spiritual forces we would let loose upon the land. For example, we see one of those warnings in the Gospel of John 16:1-4. This warning appears explicitly in the Urantia Papers. P.1951 - After Peter, James, John, and Matthew had asked the Master numerous questions, he continued his farewell discourse by saying: And I am telling you about all this before I leave you in order that you may be so prepared for what is coming upon you that you will not stumble into serious error. The authorities will not be content with merely putting you out of the synagogues; I warn you the hour draws near when they who kill you will think they are doing a service to God. And all of these things they will do to you and to those whom you lead into the kingdom of heaven because they do not know the Father. They have refused to know the Father by refusing to receive me; and they refuse to receive me when they reject you, provided you have kept my new commandment that you love one another even as I have loved you. I am telling you in advance about these things so that, when your hour comes, as mine now has, you may be strengthened in the knowledge that all was known to me, and that my spirit shall be with you in all your sufferings for my sake and the gospels. It was for this purpose that I have been talking so plainly to you from the very beginning. I have even warned you that a mans foes may be those of his own household. Although this gospel of the kingdom never fails to bring great peace to the soul of the individual believer, it will not bring peace on earth until man is willing to believe my teaching wholeheartedly and to establish the practice of doing the Fathers will as the chief purpose in living the mortal life. Indeed, that is exactly what is going on. The impending terrors were also foretold elsewhere in the gospels. Matt 10:21 Brother will deliver brother to death, and the father his child, and children will rise against parents and put them to death. Matt 24:9 Then they will deliver you to tribulation, and put you to death; and you will be hated by all nations because of my name. Mark 13:12 And brother will deliver brother to death, and the father his child, and children will rise against parents and put them to death. Luke 21:16 You will be betrayed by parents and brothers and relatives and friends, and some of you they will put to death.
~196~
Compare this with the remarks recorded in the Urantia Papers: I have even warned you that a mans foes may be those of his own household. Therefore we can deduce that bitter persecutions will come at some future hour, and from members of the Teaching Mission, those who have given themselves to unclean spirits, to evil spirit personalities. We well know how members of the Teaching Mission believe they are serving God. But they do not know the Father, and they do not know Jesus. They know Caligastia pretending to be the Father and Michael, and providing spiritual feelings compatible with their belief. When their hour comes, now shortly upon us, they will kill us in the belief they are serving God. Two deductions can be made from the experience of Susan Meyers, Kurt Cira, and myself. Since one of those young men did not exhibit that glow it must mean that he had not entered into a compact with the Devil. Although he supported that movement, and participated, he had not yet sold his soul. He could still be retrieved from that danger. This is crucially important to many members of the Teaching Mission. It means that they still can be rehabilitated. Those who have not received a spirit guide should consider themselves extremely fortunate. They still have an opportunity for eternity. Even more, it may mean that many of them will be retrieved as the actions of those Devil agents come down upon us. Certainly, they will have deep regrets for the betrayal of their brothers and sisters. The second deduction concerns the discernment of the midwayers, the seraphim, and other personalities who are not curtailed by mortal limitations. All celestial personalities can easily recognize those who have permanently sold their souls to the Devil, and those who have not. If they can make those spiritual phenomena visible to us, they certainly can easily see such phenomena at their level. In other words, celestial personalities have means for recognizing the fact that Caligastia has taken up residence within the mind of a human mortal. In many Internet discussions, and in my papers, I have elaborated on the voluntary decisions made by those in the Teaching Mission. They make two primary, and unalterable choices: They place their personality in the hands of that Spirit, and they give their will to that Spirit. (Remember, when they invite the Spirits to enter their minds they cannot specify which Spirit will come. They open their minds to any Spirit who wishes to take advantage of that invitation. Since Caligastia is the only personality who can now invade the sanctity of human mind, he is the only one to exercise that opportunity.) Two personalities cannot be independently co-resident within human mind. One must dominate the other. Since Caligastia is the higher personality, when he enters human mind the human mortal must relinquish his personality to that Spirit. We have revelation concerning these matters, but most do not recognize it.
Appendix
~197~
P.37 - In any universe contest between actual levels of reality, the personality of the higher level will ultimately triumph over the personality of the lower level. . . . Undiluted evil, complete error, willful sin, and unmitigated iniquity are inherently and automatically suicidal. If those human personalities chose to affiliate with the Evil One, regardless how ignorantly they did so, through that act they chose to associate with undiluted evil, complete error, willful sin, and unmitigated iniquity. Such choice is inherently and automatically suicidal. Those people believe they gave their personalities and their will to the Father. It is their will to do the Fathers will. Unfortunately, the Father in this case is Caligastia pretending to other Spirit Personifications. Furthermore, as I have argued, A Spirit cannot enter human mind unless the human personality relinquishes his will. Just as two personalities cannot be co-resident within human mind, two wills also cannot be co-resident within human mind. Therefore, the human mortal has given over the two attributes which are exclusively his: personality and will. Such people are no longer human in a spiritual sense. They are mechanisms that still operate in the world, using their minds, but have lost all ability to anymore be candidates for eternity. P.1229 - 1. Spiritual (soul) death. If and when mortal man has finally rejected survival, when he has been pronounced spiritually insolvent, morontially bankrupt, in the conjoint opinion of the Adjuster and the surviving seraphim, when such co-ordinate advice has been recorded on Uversa, and after the Censors and their reflective associates have verified these findings, thereupon do the rulers of Orvonton order the immediate release of the indwelling Monitor. But this release of the Adjuster in no way affects the duties of the personal or group seraphim concerned with that Adjuster-abandoned individual. This kind of death is final in its significance irrespective of the temporary continuation of the living energies of the physical and mind mechanisms. From the cosmic standpoint the mortal is already dead; the continuing life merely indicates the persistence of the material momentum of cosmic energies. Mortal men do not make a conscious decision to reject survival. Their real choices are not conscious. When they invite a Spirit to enter their minds they make such choice within the depths of their hearts. To do so they were already spiritually insolvent. They were already morontially bankrupt. They were already uninterested in preserving their personality and their will intact. They did not mind giving themselves over to the Spirit. At that time the Adjuster and the guardian seraphim came to a conjoint opinion concerning that human mortal. This was immediately recorded on Uversa, and verified. At that point the indwelling Monitor departed. The Monitor departed because the human mortal manifested a desire to be cursed with the wicked presence of Caligastia. That was an eternal decision.
~198~
Some of us have an instinctive reaction against inviting spirits into our minds. We know that there is something spiritually repugnant about it. We do not engage in such practices. On the other hand, those who engaged in those practices did not have those instincts. Something undefinable is inherent in human mortals to make such choices. Since celestial personalities can view us with their extended vision they probably know which human mortals fall on which side of this spiritual coin. So does Caligastia. He does not waste his time on those who will not invite him in. On the other hand, he knows which human mortals may invite him in.

Ernest P. Moyer: Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ernest P. Moyer: Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter

1- A Warning From Jesus

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

1- A Warning From Jesus

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

1- A Warning From Jesus

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

When Their Hour Comes

1- A Warning From Jesus

Possible Confusion in the Gospel Record

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

1- A Warning From Jesus

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

1- A Warning From Jesus

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

1- A Warning From Jesus

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

2 - The Bitter Harvest of Godlessness

CHAPTER TWO The Bitter Harvest of Godlessness

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

2 - The Bitter Harvest of Godlessness

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

2 - The Bitter Harvest of Godlessness

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

The Kingdom of Heaven

2 - The Bitter Harvest of Godlessness

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

CHAPTERTHREE The Prince of This World

3- The Prince of This World

The Coming of the Rebel Prince

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

The God of This Age

3- The Prince of This World

Many Gods and Many Lords

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

The Prince of the Power of the Air

3- The Prince of This World

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

The Divine Councils On High

3- The Prince of This World

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

3- The Prince of This World

His Celestial Origins

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

3- The Prince of This World

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

CHAPTER FOUR The Release

Part 1: The Temple of God

Part 3: The Man

Part 4: The Seat

Part 5: The Restraint

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

CHAPTER FIVE The Wrath of the Prince

5- The Wrath of the Prince

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

5- The Wrath of the Prince

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

6 - The Judy Tuttle Message

CHAPTER SIX The Judy Tuttle Message

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

The Veil has been torn aside.

6 - The Judy Tuttle Message

Spirit Entry Into Human Mind

It is time for the Sons of God to come together.